Home

DX2000 User`s Manual

1. RS 232 interface connector option S A serial communication connector Q Ow that comes with the C2 option PROFIBUS DP port release number 3 or later A PROFIBUS connector that is provided on modes with the CP1 option IM 04L41B01 17E Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Names and Uses of Parts and the Setup Procedures Using the Operation KeyS eee v Using the Ethernet Interface 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 DX FeatUrES oyisi oeae eai ree A ckuetiveb ey E a E 1 1 Flow of Operation When Using the Ethernet Interface cenene 1 11 CG nnecting the DX ccrccsecusiet ieasescdess aan aa aaa ar aA 1 12 Sending E maill Messages s ssiissiAevt raise e ne dee Seva S E E N 1 18 Monitoring the DX on a PC BrowSel ossessioni aia oiai it 1 28 Accessing the Measurement Data File on the DX from a PC eee eeeceeeeteeeentteeeeneees 1 46 Transferring Data Files from the DX iinis enana aiani eiaa 1 48 Synchronizing the TMG s52s efaces aa ea E e a ages Shedsodee phase bbc heacians Ea 1 52 Using the Modbus Server Function cece eeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeesesaeeesneeensieeeeeeaes 1 54 Using the Modbus Client Function
2. Bit Name Description 0 Measurement dropout Set to 1 when the measurement process could not keep up 1 Decimal point unit information change Set to 1 when the decimal point unit information is changed 2 Command error Set to 1 when there is a command syntax error 3 Execution error Set to 1 when an error occurs during command execution 4 SNTP error when memory Set to 1 when the time could not be adjusted using SNTP 5 Custom display setup error Set to 1 if an error occurs when a custom display setup file is saved or loaded 6 7 IM 04L41B01 17E 5 2 Bit Structure of the Status Information Status Information 4 Bit Name Description 0 A D conversion complete Set to 1 when the A D conversion of the measurement is complete 1 Medium access complete Set to 1 when the display event manual sampled report or screen image data file are finished being saved to the external storage medium Set to 1 when setup data is successfully saved or loaded 2 Report generation complete Set to 1 when report generation is complete 3 Timeout Set to 1 when the timer expires 4 Custom display setup complete Set to 1 when the custom display setup is successfully saved or loaded 5 z 6 USER key detection Set to 1 when the USER key is pressed 7 E Status Information 5 Bit Name Description 0 Batch group 1 memory sampling Set to 1
3. a DNS Server A File Services Features Diagnostics Configuration 3 Storage E Active Directory Users a Organizational User More Actions Builtin User E Computers User E Domain Controlle B users User P ForeignSecurityf Users E yokogawa B products a Active Directory Sites ar Active Directory Lightweight ii DHCP Server Create a new object M IM 04L41B01 17E 1 81 99eJ19 U z U19473 ey Huish IS 1 14 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option 2 Enter dxadv into the First name Full name and User logon name boxes New Object User S 3 Enter record 1 in the Password box Select the Password never expires check box New Object User 4 Click Finish to complete the creation of the new account 1 82 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 14 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option Changing the Properties of the New Account Select the check boxes listed below Clear all other check boxes This account supports Kerberos AES 256 bit encryption Password never expires e The Password never expires check box was selected previously in step 3 so it will also be selected in this window e If you clear all the encryption method check boxes RC4 will be used
4. cc ccccsesseceseceeseceneeseecensseneeteneeeesessenenssersseeneensaees 1 56 Usage Example of the Modbus Function ce ccceecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeseeaeeesneeenneeeenaaes 1 67 Using the Setting Measurement Seref priesais diaid 1 72 Using the Maintenance Test Serversi asccn dave hua Aiea he isl aie 1 77 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option 1 78 Using the Serial Interface QA DX GAUSS sect voce spn a o Ea e E R a 2 1 2 2 Flow of Operation When Using the Serial Interface eeeeeeineieeiresrreerennnnns 2 3 29 GCOMMECUNG NE DX sezsa Hani A aA o ee aa an Taaa aan aSa 2 4 2 4 Setting the Serial COMMUNICATION 0 ee cette eee etete ee eeaeeeceeeeettaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeenteeeenaes 2 10 2 5 Using the Modbus Slave Function eeecceeseeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeesneeesesaeeeseeeeesneeeeneneeeeeeaees 2 11 2 6 Using the Modbus Master Function eee ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeecesaeeeeeeeeeeneeeensaeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 2 12 2 7 Usage Example of the Modbus Function eeeeeeceeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeesneeesenaeeeseeeesnnneeenaaes 2 15 2 8 Using the Setting and Measurement FUNCTION ee ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenaes 2 18 2 9 Using Barcode Input AS1 Option 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeesseeeseaeeeeneeeeenteeeneaes 2 21 Commands 3 1 Command Syntax nia ei caine an E Oh enti a dae 3 1 3 2 A List COMMANGS wrececceceescceeretbns iaoee eaa e gepa i E aga ieaS 3 4 3 3 Set p Parameters svir en N acelin ni
5. EE Syntax Example BE Syntax BV Syntax Example Description KE Syntax Switches out of operation mode AS1 advanced security option EE pl lt terminator gt pl Mode switch destination ENG SYS Memory sampling ENG sys In progress Setting mode during Basic setting mode memory sampling during memory sampling Stopped Setting mode Basic setting mode Switch to setting mode EEENG Returns to operation mode AS1 advanced security option BE pl lt terminator gt pl Mode switch operation END Current Mode END Setting mode Returns to operation mode Creates a setup file Setting mode Returns to operation mode during memory sampling Enters a string can only be used during serial communication BV pl p2 lt terminator gt pl 0 p2 Character string up to 100 characters Enter user123 BVO userl123 e You can use this command to enter character strings when the DX is displaying the character input window On models with the USB1 USB interface option this command can be used through the use of USB barcodes e On models with the AS1 advanced security option this command can only be used through the use of the serial communication barcode protocol or through a USB barcode reader Performs key operations KE pl lt terminator gt pl Key F1 to F7 Soft keys 1 to7 ESC ESC key MENU MENU key FUNC FUNC key START START key STO
6. Description WB Syntax Query Example WC Syntax Query Example Description YS Syntax number to 40001 and the register data type to INT16 YR5 W 01 04 1 40001 INT16 Set p3 to a value that is less than or equal to p4 The number of registers that are read from or written to is determined by the values that you set for p3 p4 and p7 An error occurs if the specified number of registers exceeds the number of registers that actually follow the first register p6 Sets SNTP client parameters WB pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl SNTP client function USE NOT p2 SNTP server name up to 64 alphanumeric characters p3 SNTP port number 0 to 65535 p4 Access interval OFF 1H 8H 12H 24H p5 Reference time for the access interval 00 00 to 23 59 p6 Timeout value 10S 30S 90S Parameters p2 to p6 are invalid when p1 is set to NOT WB Enable the SNTP client function set the server name to sntp daqstation com the port number to 123 the access interval to 24 hours the reference time to 12 00 and the timeout value to 30 seconds WBUSE sntp daqstation com 123 24H 12 00 308 Sets the SNTP operation when memory start is executed WC pl lt terminator gt pl Time adjustment using SNTP at memory start ON OFF WC Set the DX so that time is adjusted using SNTP at memory start WCON This command is valid when the SNTP client function is enabled WB command Se
7. Query Example Description UD Sets a batch name BT pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Batch group number Set this parameter to 1 when multi batch BT2 is not in use p2 Batch number up to 32 characters p3 Lot number up to 8 digits BT pl Assign the batch number PRESS5LINE and lot number 007 to batch group 1 BT1 PRESSSLINE 007 Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Sets a batch comment BU pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Batch group number Set this parameter to 1 when multi batch BT2 is not in use p2 Comment number 1 to 3 p3 Comment string up to 50 characters BU p1 p2 _COMPLETED BU1 2 THIS PRODUCT _IS COMPLETED Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Writes a Batch Text Field MH pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Batch group number Set this parameter to 1 when multi batch BT2 is not in use p2 Field number 1 to 24 p3 Field title up to 20 characters p4 Field string up to 30 characters MH p1 p2 Set batch group 2 text field 1 title to Ope and the string to DX MH2 1 Ope DX e Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e This command can only be performed when memory sampling for the specified batch group is not taking place Switches the screen To return to the screen that was used before you started using communication commands Syntax Example UD pl lt terminator gt pl Screen type 0 Return to the screen that
8. 3 3 Setup Parameters Channel Number and Other Notations and Valid Ranges Type Model Notation and Valid Range Notes Measurement channels DX1000 001 to 012 Varies depending on the number of inputs DX2000 001 to 048 Varies depending on the number of inputs Computation channels DX1000 101 to 112 High speed input model M1 PM1 101 to 124 Medium speed input model M1 PM1 DX2000 101 to 112 High speed input model M1 PM1 101 to 160 Medium speed input model M1 PM1 External input channels DX1000 No setting DX2000 201 to 440 MC1 Manual DX1000 No setting sample DX2000 001 to 120 MC1 Report channels DX1000 R01 to R12 High speed input model M1 PM1 R01 to R24 Medium speed input model M1 PM1 DX2000 R01 to R12 High speed input model M1 PM1 R01 to R60 Medium speed input model M1 PM1 Internal switches DX1000 DX2000 S01 to S30 Output relays DX1000 101 to 106 Varies depending on the A option DX2000 101 to 106 111 to 116 121 to 126 131 to 136 Constants DX1000 DX2000 K01 to K60 M1 PM1 Communication input data DX1000 C01 to C24 M1 PM1 DX2000 C01 to C60 Display groups DX1000 1 to 10 1 to 6 when using the multi BT2 batch function BT2 option DX2000 1 to 36 1 to 12 when using the multi BT2 batch function BT2 option Remote control terminals DX1000 DX2000 D01 to D08 R1 PM1 Pulse inputs DX1000 DX2000 P01 to P08 PM1 Q
9. 000 3 10 setting data basic setting data ccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeees 4 6 Setting FUNCION sssrin eaa 1 72 3 10 setting MONG aia nccdcactenstaisxessncepdsieesesadounessaondssuech Aaeeei mii 3 9 setup parameters T Shifting the transfer UME sissisodan 1 48 SIMUILANCOUS ACCESS 2 iiaii an a iaaa 6 17 simultaneous users NuMber Of sissit 6 1 single negative reSPONSE cccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeees 4 1 SMTP server name SNTE CUO vrei acenie texscemnar censesaees E SNTP client Seting Of iion a awe Mace SNMP OG isur aT eee einen tents DNTP SCWED rscticsttercrneecesnnensareanenendetenaees SNTP server setting of SOT KOYS 3 scp co ceces cree peta ny seteeeeestestaaieats eens esau noe Special data values sssrinin aae ainin means special values status information style number sub delimiter SUDJOCbekicestticeenetiaesdintanedisbenevsetsteane ba Aaa ERREA subnet mask is SUM Valle calculation Ofrar issnin 4 4 Supported TUNCHONS reisinin aaa 6 3 6 7 switching the screen operator page eseeseeseeeereeen 1 36 SYSLSM CONTIQUIATION sslinds acea 1 78 system mail error a system mail invalid USEL c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee 1 25 system mail memory full cceeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeaees 1 24 system mail power failUre cceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeees 1 24 system setting SMa rronin a 1 20 T terminator esse ccessntcessceseansecc
10. Connect the connector IP address assignment method Fixed IP address Set the IP address Set the subnet mask Set the default gateway Set the host name optional Set the domain name optional Set the DNS server search order Set the domain suffix search order End of setting Automatic retrieval of the IP address DHCP aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy Set the auto retrieval of the DNS Automatically register the host name Set the host name Set the domain name Set the DNS server search order Not specified when the DNS auto setting is enabled Not specified when the DNS auto setting is enabled IM 04L41B01 17E 1 11 1 3 Connecting the DX Connecting to the Port Connector Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the DX rear panel CAUTION Do not connect an Ethernet cable whose plug does not comply with FCC specifications If you do the DX may malfunction Connecting to the PC Make the connection via a hub For a one to one connection with a PC make the connection as shown in the figure below Multiple DXs can be connected to a single PC in a similar manner PC DX Hub Pele le Ethernet cable 1 12 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 3 Connecting the DX Setting the IP Address and Host Information e DX1000 Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the M
11. DX User accounts UserA User B User C User D User E User F Authentication Client PC DX DX Register the limitations to apply to the users Password change Terminology KDC Server Key Distribution Center Manages the DX account host account and the user accounts for operating the DX Encryption Method The method for encrypting the authentication data Authentication The process by which the DX determines whether or not a user is qualified to operate it Host Account The DX user account on the KDC server Host Principal The DX name used on the application User Account The account of a user who can operate the DX Mapping The establishment of an association between the host principal and the host account Realm Name The name of the domain that contains the KDC server and the DX 1 78 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 14 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option Flow of Operation To use the password management function you must configure a KDC server and the DX First configure the KDC server and then configure the DX KDC server configuration Configure the KDC server Time synchronization Synchronize the time on the DX with that on the KDC server See the explanation below DX configuration Configure the DX password management function Management initiation See chapter 3 of the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Ma
12. HOSE NAIM C E T ESET host ipninCiPalwrecesee ci et oar eis aera how to use extended hold registers ceeeeeeeeeees 6 18 ID NUMDET oe ec cceceesenseeeeecececseaeeeceeeeessneeeeeeeeeseeseeeee 4 3 include instantaneous value cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 19 1 20 include Source URL wisascrsceis seasecacenasaiscisavesserscasccaderarwoasseene 1 20 include tag ch in subject 2csnwnui aaa kecdete 1 20 Initial patinas ninen r Ei RAE input register instrument information output commands 3 8 3 15 3 67 instrument information SEPrVer cccceecceeeeessteeeeeeees 1 5 6 1 Inter DlOCK delay x6foccsscthies vendesieieeal is eaineesinde eden ae internal SWITCHES wise cesceszeacesseveececsaessaeties caves esavedaecazexeeseseee internal switch status UEa e E E E E N E E T IP address ansen aE EEDE EEn EO IP address setting of ITU T Standard cccccccccecceececssseeeeeseeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeee K KDC Servei ramino a aeerrnneniacmecnared cates 1 78 KDC server configuration example ccccseeeeeees 1 81 KDG Serv NAME u eiiie reiasa kepal VE sonrai a TR AR keepalive setting of L LE oer E A reer rerceer pene pry aor perer eee ere 3 2 list OF FEQISIENS uiie ae iE 6 12 loading to communication input data 0 eeeeeeeees 1 59 loading to communication input data and writing of values to UNG SOI Eurima cass haa tev ser meenrenienesenerv
13. Message 32 characters Spaces are embedded when the number of characters is less than 32 characters ggg gt Message write destination display group 11 characters XX XX XX XX The groups in which the message is written are delimited by commas and displayed Up to four groups ALL When the multi batch function is not in use All display groups When the multi batch function is in use All display groups in the specified batch group ZZZ Operation property KEY Key operation COM Communication REM Remote ACT Event action SYS System uuu User name up to 20 characters nnn Message sequence number 0 for add messages z Space e Example EA 01 05 11 12 20 00 operation start 01 02 03 04 KEY admin Lk 01 05 11 12 20 00 operation start 01 02 KEY admin ri 01 05 11 12 20 00 0123456789abcdefg 01 02 03 04 KEY admin 12 EN E 4 24 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Change Settings L og AS1 option The change settings log is output by the FLSETTING command Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_ fffffffF zzz uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu XXXXXXXXXX CRLF ENCRLF yy mo dd hh mm ss ee lO aE ZZZ uuu Year 00 to 99 Month 01 to 12 Day 1 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 File name no extension 8 characters Operation type KEY Key operation COM Communication operation User name 20 characters XXXXXXXXXX File serial numbe
14. Organization Member Of Dialin Environment Sessions Remote control Terminal Services Profle come General Address Account Profle Telephones Delegation User logon name host dxadv ict r User logon name pre Windows 2000 host is not attached before mapping dxadv It is attached after mapping is performed successfully Logon Hours Log On To T Unlock account Account options I Use Kerberos DES encryption types for this account I This account supports Kerberos AES 128 bit encryption Mths account supports Kerberos AES 256 bit encryption TF Do not require Kerberos preauthentication Account expires Never End of f pe ni m aA IM 04L41B01 17E 1 83 99eJ 19 U z9 U19473 ey Huish IS 1 14 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option Mapping the host principal to the host account Open the command prompt and execute the following command ktpass princ host dxadv the name of the realm you are using pass record 1 mapuser dxadv ptype KRB5_NT_PRINCIPAL crypto All out C yokogawa dxadv keytab The file dxadv keytab is created in the C yokogawa folder es Administrator Command Prompt ygawa dxady Create an Active Directory User Account and Change Its Properties Create an Active Directory DX user account Change the properties of the account to match those of the host In this example select the following check box This a
15. e 4PANEL is available only on the DX2000 You cannot set the first menu item to SEPARATOR Setting the submenu Syntax SM pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Type DISP_SUB p2 Menu type TREND DIGITAL BAR TRENDHISTORY OVERVIEW INFORMATION LOG 4PANEL CUSTOM_PANEL ANNUNCIATOR p32 Submenu items to display The DX displays the items in the specified order The DX does not display menu items that are not specified When p2 is set to TREND select from the When p2 is set to TRENDHISTORY select from the items below GROUP1 to GROUP36 Display group SEPARATOR When p2 is set to OVERVIEW select from the items below CURSOR Cursor display TO_ALARM Alarm summary TO_TREND To the trend display TO_DIGITAL To the digital display TO_BAR To the bar graph display o EXPAND Expand S TAG PRIORITY Tag prioritized display 3 ALARMACK1 Individual alarm acknowledgment S level 1 a ALARMACK2 Individual alarm acknowledgment level 2 ALARMACK3 Individual alarm acknowledgment level 3 ALARMACK4 Individual alarm acknowledgment level 4 SEPARATOR When p2 is set to INFORMATION select from the items below ALARM MESSAGE MEMORY Alarm summary Message summary Memory summary items below GROUP1 to GROUP36 CIRCULAR_KIND ALL_CHANNEL SCALE DIGITAL MESSAGE _DISP TREND SPACE AUTO EXPAND FINE GRID AUTO_ZONE TAG_PRIORITY SEPARATOR Display group Circular type All channel display Scale disp
16. 7 see DXAavanced il DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 Communication Interface vigilantplant YOKOGAWA IM 04L41B01 17E Yokogawa Electric Corporation 7th Edition Thank you for purchasing the DX1000 DX2000 This Communication Interface User s Manual contains information about the Ethernet serial interface communication functions To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises The following manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the DX e Paper manual Manual Name Manual No Description DX1000 DX1000N Operation Guide IM 04L41B01 02E Explains concisely the operating procedure of the DX1000 and DX1000N DX2000 Operation Guide IM 04L42B01 02E Explains concisely the operating procedure of the DX2000 DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 IM 04L41B01 91C Control of Pollution Caused by the Product Gives a description of pollution control e Electronic manuals provided on the accompanying CD ROM Manual Name Manual No Description DX1000 DX1000N Operation IM 04L41B01 02E This is the electronic version of the paper Guide manual DX2000 Operation Guide IM 04L42B01 02E DX1000 DX1000N IM 04L41B01 01E User s Manual DX2000 User s Manual Describes how to use the DX The communication and network functions custom display functions and some of the options are ex
17. Boundary position 1 to 99 Boundary value p1 rtially expand the display of channel 001 Set the boundary position to 25 and the boundary val SP ue to 1 00 V 001 0N 25 100 You can specify computation channels on models with the M1 or PM1 math option You can specify external input channels on models with the MC1 external input channel option For a channel whose input range is set to SKIP using the SR command p2 cannot be set to ON For a channel whose computation channel is turned off using the SO command p2 cannot be set to ON For a channel whose external input channel is set to OFF using the ER command p2 cannot be set to ON Set p3 as a percentage of the range defined by the span upper and lower limits scale upper and lower limits when scaling is enabled Set p4 to a value from span upper limit 1 to span lower limit 1 If scaling is enabled set p4 to a value from scaling lower limit 1 to scaling upper limit 1 The decimal place and the number of digits are the same as those for the span or scaling settings see the SR command You can use this command includes the query when the partial expanded display function is set to USE using the XU command You cannot use this command if the partial expanded display range does not exist for example when the span range is 1 Sets a tag ST pl p2 p3 pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt Measurement computation or ext
18. ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 4 hh Hour 00 to 23 m mm Minute 00 to 59 p ss Second 00 to 59 8 nnn Error number 000 to 999 a XXXXXXXXXX Detailed code 9 characters SUCCESS Success OVER Over the limit DORMANT Internal processing error HOSTNAME Failed to look up the host name TCPIP Internal processing error SEND Failed to send the request TIMEOUT A response timeout occurred BROKEN Packet was corrupt LINK The data link is disconnected _ Space e Example EA 01 05 11 12 20 00 SUCCESS 01 05 11 12 21 00 SUCCESS 01 05 11 12 30 00 292 HOSTNAME EN IM 04L41B01 17E 4 19 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data DHCP Log The FL command is used to output the data e The DHCP log is output Up to 50 accesses to the DHCP server are retained e Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss nnn xxxxxxxxxCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 nnn Error number 000 to 999 Description given in the table Xxxxxxxxx Detailed code 9 characters Description given in the table Space The table below shows the contents of the log during normal operation Error Number Detail Code Description 562 ON Detected that an Ethernet cable was connected OFF Detected that an Ethernet cable was disconnected 563 RENEW Requesting address renewal to the DHCP server
19. RELEASE Requesting address release to the DHCP server 564 RENEWED Address renewal complete EXTENDED Address release extension request complete RELEASED Address release complete 565 IPCONFIG IP address configured 566 NOREQUEST Configured not to register the host name 567 UPDATE Registered the host name to the DNS server 568 REMOVE Removed the host name from the DNS server 4 20 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data The table below shows the contents of the log during erroneous operation Error Number Detail Code Description 295 REJECT Address obtained by DHCP is inappropriate 296 ESEND Failed to send to the DHCP server ESERVER DHCP server not found ESERVFAIL No response from the DHCP server ERENEWED Address renewal rejected by the DHCP server EEXTENDED Address lease extension request rejected by the DHCP server EEXPIRED Address lease period expired by the DHCP server 297 INTERNAL Host name registration failure transmission error reception timeout etc FORMERR Host name registration failure format error DNS 4 message syntax error SERVFAIL Host name registration failure server failure DNS server processing error a NXDOMAIN Host name registration rejection non existent domain 4 NOTIMP Host name registration rejected not implemented 9 REFUSED Host n
20. e Precautions to be taken when the client device writes the data Input range 9 9999E29 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E29 If values outside this range are used on a computation channel a computation error occurs 401001 External input channel write register 201 16 bit signed integer l 401240 External input channel write register 440 e Precautions to be taken when the client device writes the data Only data in signed 16 bit integer type can be written The measurement range and unit are set using the external input channels The decimal point position is determined by the Span_L settings 6 10 IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Extended Hold Registers Shared with the Modbus slave function release number 3 or later The following hold registers have been added You can perform a portion of the operations by writing in the registers You can write to these registers when a DX with the AS1 advanced security option is in operation mode Internal switch Lot number or lot number for each batch group when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use Batch number or batch group number for each batch group when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use Recording memory sampling start and stop or recording memory sampling start and stop for each batch group when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use Alarm ACK Alarm display reset Computation start computation st
21. p3 Hour to create reports hh fixed format hh Hour 00 to 23 RO Create a daily report at 9 O clock everyday parameter p2 05 in this example is invalid in this case RODAY 05 09 Description e You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e Parameter p2 is invalid even if it is specified for reports other than monthly and daily reports IM 04L41B01 17E 3 51 ainiin e 3 6 Basic Setting Commands For creating daily weekly reports Syntax RO pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Report type DAY WEEk p2 Day of week to create reports SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT p3 Hour to create reports hh fixed format hh Hour 00 to 23 Query RO Example Create a daily report at 9 O clock every day and a weekly report at 9 O clock every Tuesday RODAY WEEK TUE 09 Description You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option RM Sets a report channel When not using report channels Syntax RM pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Report channel number p2 Report channel usage OFF Query RM p1 Example Disable the channel 001 report channel RMOO1 OFF Description e You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 When using a report channel Syntax RM pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Report channel number p2 Report channel usage ON p3 Measurement computation or external input chann
22. s Manual or the communication timeout time see section 1 3 whichever is shorter There is a communication error The connection is closed when there is a transfer error a reception error or when the keepalive function times out see Setting Measurement Server in section 1 1 Nofe ___ When the connection to the setting function is closed the DX returns to the operation mode screen and the user is logged out 1 76 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 13 Using the Maintenance Test Server When Not Using the Login Function Access the server using the user name admin or user You can use either the administrator admin or user commands depending on which name you used to log in When Using the Login Function Standard Log in as an administrator or user who has been registered on the DX Of the commands in chapter 3 you can use either the administrator or user commands depending on which name you used to log in On DXs with the AS1 Advanced Security Option Access the server using the user name admin or user You can use either the administrator admin or user commands depending on which name you used to log in Telnet Operation Example The example below shows how to perform operations using Telnet on Windows XP The necessary operations vary depending on the operating environment Perform the operations that are appropriate for your environment Connecting Type telnet in the Windows co
23. 99eJ 19 U JUIN ey Huish 1 3 Connecting the DX IP address 18 6 233 146 Subnet mask 255 255 254 Default gateway 10 0 232 1 HAC address 00 00 64 88 26 28 DNS server Primary 600p Secondary 8 8 amp Host name dxady Domain name daqstation com Releasing Network Information 1 Display the network information screen Press FUNC and select Network info 2 Execute the network information release Press FUNC and select Network info gt Release IP address 18 0 233 140 IP address Subnet mask 255 255 254 Subnet mask Default gateway 10 0 232 1 Default gateway HAC address 00 00 64 88 26 28 HAC address DNS server DNS server Primary 000o Primary Secondary 600a m Secondary Host name Host name dxadv dxady Domain name Domain name daqstation com daqstation com avorite System Network regist info info jae a 18 6 233 148 255 255 254 10 0 232 1 00 00 64 88 26 28 6 6 8 a 8 8 INFO 3 34 lt c gt a o ET 0 8 IP address 18 0 233 140 Subnet mask a 8 Subnet mask 255 255 254 0 Default gateway Default gateway 10 0 232 1 HAC address 00 00 64 88 26 28 HAC address 00 00 64 88 26 28 DnS servar EET rimary oe o If released network will be Secondary ee ee Oe may disconnected Continue Host name dxady The network information is released DISP ENT
24. Ethernet Setting the Web server Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Server gt Server modes Server FTP Use Web SNTP Not Modbus Not EtherNet IP Not Use Not e Web For the Web item under Server select Use or Not don t use When Use is selected the Web page item is added to the basic setting mode menu Port Number The default value is 80 To change the setting Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Environment tab gt Communication gt Service port For the selectable range of port numbers see section 6 1 Setting the Web page Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Web page On DxXs without the AS1 advanced On DXs with the AS1 advanced security option security option Basic Setting Node ia Basic Setting Node Page type Page type On Off On On Off On Access control Off Access control off Command Use 1 28 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Page Type Monitor Configure the monitor page You can carry out the following operations on the monitor page e Display the alarm summary e Display the measured and computed values of all channels e Display logs m
25. No 3 41 No 3 42 No 3 44 No 3 44 No 3 42 No 3 42 No 3 42 No 3 42 No 3 42 No 3 42 No 3 43 3 6 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 2 A List of Commands Basic Setting Commands e Inorder to activate the settings that are changed using the basic setting commands the settings must be saved using the YE or XE command Make sure to save the settings before changing from the basic setting mode to the operation mode Otherwise new settings will not be activated e The settings that are returned in response to a query in basic setting mode contain the new settings even if they are not saved However the new settings are not activated unless they are saved If the settings are cleared or if you change from basic setting mode to operation mode before saving the settings the settings that are returned in the response to a query contain the settings that were used before they were changed Note e The settings that are changed using the YA YK RU YQ YS YB YD WS WW and WQ commands are activated after saving the new settings using the XE command and restarting the DX e When you execute the YE or YO command communication is disconnected Commands listed after the YO or YE command are ignored Group Command Function Execution Administrator User Page Name Mode WU Sets the environment Basic setting mode Yes No 3 45 WE Sets calibration management Basic setting mode Yes No 3 47 wo Sets alarm and DO settings Basic settin
26. Note Output commands except BO CS and IF cannot be placed in a command sequence Group Command Function Execution Administrator User Page Name Mode Control BO Sets the byte output order All modes Yes Yes 3 60 cs Sets the check sum can only be used during serial All modes Yes Yes 3 60 communications IF Sets status filters All modes Yes Yes 3 60 CB Sets the data output format All modes Yes Yes 3 60 cc Disconnects the Ethernet connection All modes Yes Yes 3 60 can only be used for Ethernet communications Setup measurement and control data output FC Outputs screen image data All modes Yes Yes 3 61 FE Outputs setup data All modes Yes Yes 3 61 FD Outputs the most recent measured computed data Operation mode Yes Yes 3 61 FF Outputs FIFO data Operation mode Yes Yes 3 61 FL Outputs a log alarm summary or message summary All modes Yes Yes 3 62 Is Outputs status information All modes Yes Yes 3 62 FU Outputs user levels All modes Yes Yes 3 63 FA Outputs internal DX information All modes Yes Yes 3 63 ME Outputs data stored on the external storage medium Operation mode Yes No 3 63 and internal memory MO Outputs the data stored in the internal memory Operation mode Yes No 3 63 Dedicated commands for RS 422 485 Esc O Opens an instrument All modes Yes Yes 3 64 Esc C Closes an instrument All modes Yes Yes 3 64 Common commands among instruments I Outputs instrument information All modes Yes Yes 3 65 Maintenance Test
27. OPERATOR Operator page MONITOR Monitor page p2 Webpage ON OFF p3 Authentication OFF No authentication ADMIN Administrator privileges USER User privileges p4 Command input on off USE NOT WW p1 Enable the operator page disable authentication and enable command input WWOPERATOR USE OFF USE Description e Parameters p3 and p4 are valid when p2 is set YQ to ON e Parameter p3 is OFF or ADMIN when p1 is set to OPERATOR e Parameter p4 is valid when p1 is set to OPERATOR e p4is invalid on models with the AS1 advanced security option Sets communication timeout When using no timeouts Syntax Query Example YQ pl lt terminator gt pl Communication timeout OFF YQ Disable the communication timer YOQOFF When using timeouts Syntax Query Example YQ pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Communication timeout ON p2 Timeout value in minutes 1 to 120 YQ Enable the communication timer and set the timeout value to 3 minutes YOON 3 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 53 eastanes eo 3 6 Basic Setting Commands i Syntax Query Example Description YU Sets FTP transfer timing YT pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Automatically transfer data when display and event data files are created ON OFF p2 Automatically transfer data when report data files are created ON OFF p3 Automatically transfer data when snapshot data files are created when snapshot is executed ON OFF p4 Transfer
28. Subject System warning e Syntax header1 CRLF header2 CRLF CRLF Power failure CRLF lt Host_name gt CRLF hostCRLF CRLF lt Power_fail gt mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF lt Power_on gt mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF CRLF Access the following URL in order to look at_a_screen CRLF http host domain CRLF CRLF System Mail Memory Full Format e Subject Subject System_ warning e Syntax headerl CRLF header2CRLF CRLF Memory full CRLF lt Host_name gt CRLF hostCRLF CRLF lt Memory remain gt ppp pMbytesCRLF lt Memory blocks gt bbb 400CRLF lt Media_remain gt rrr rMbytesCRLF CRLF Access the following URL in order to look at_a_screen CRLF http host domain CRLF CRLF ppp p Remaining amount of internal memory bbb Number of unsaved blocks 0 to 400 rrr r Remaining free space on the external storage medium when an external storage medium is connected 1 24 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 4 Sending E mail Messages System Mail Error Format e Subject Subject System_ warning e Syntax header1 CRLF header2 CRLF CRLF Error CRLF lt Host_name gt CRLF hostCRLF CRLF mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF ERROR ff f CRLF aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy Operation aborted because an error was found_in media CRLF CRLF Access the following URL in order to look at_a_screen CRLF http host domain CRLF CRLF EE Error number 200 201 211 281 to 285 For details on the error see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s
29. Turn off the DX and connect the barcode reader to the RS 232 interface connector 2 Turnon the DX The DX is ready to receive commands Commands That You Can Use The commands that you can enter using barcodes are listed in the table below Users cannot execute operations commands that are not allowed under their user privileges For details about the commands see chapter 3 eu zu jenas y Huisy Type Command Administrator User Dedicated barcode commands KE Key operations Yes Yes BV Enters a string Yes Yes BP Supports login Yes Yes Control commands PS Starts or stops recording Yes Yes EV Executes manual sample takes a snapshot Yes Yes or causes a timeout MS Writes a message Yes Yes TL Starts stops resets computation MATH or Yes Yes clears the computation dropout status display IR Resets a relative timer Yes Yes AK Clears alarm output Yes Yes CV Switches between normal and secondary Yes Yes trend interval EM Starts or stops the e mail transmission Yes Yes function CU Recovers Modbus manually Yes Yes BJ Writes a free message Yes Yes EJ Changes the login password Yes Yes BT Sets a batch name Yes Yes BU Sets a batch comment Yes Yes MH Sets a batch text field Yes Yes CL Executes manual SNTP Yes Yes LO Loads setup data for setting mode Yes Yes LI Saves setup data Yes Yes MA Resets a match time timer Yes Yes UD Switches the screen Yes Yes BQ Lo
30. W RD B X RD B X RDB O RD B O RD B O SG SG SG QO i SG O SG O FG FG Za nd DDV a 7J o V O aH 20 a Terminator external ra SD A SDA SD B SDB RDA RD A O RD B RD B O SG SG O FG O sarees O bocce se n n lt 32 Do not connect terminators to 1 through n 1 e Two wire system Connect the transmission and reception signals with the same polarity on the RS 422 485 terminal block Only two wires are used to connect to the external device Terminator external 120 Q 1 2W or greater Terminator external RS 422 485 Host device terminal on the DX SDA eh z A A SD B SDB B B RD A RDA RD B RDB SG SG SG LN Yen 7 a 20 eee n n S31 Do not connect terminators to 1 through n 1 2 8 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 3 Connecting the DX A Note The method used to eliminate noise varies depending on the situation In the connection example the shield of the cable is connected only to the DX s ground one sided grounding This is effective when there is a difference in the electric potential between the computer s ground and the DX s ground This may be the case for long distance communications If there is no difference in the electric potential between the computer s gro
31. is enabled changes to the FTP transfer time settings for measured data are invalid 1 See the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual Setting the FTP Client Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt FTP client gt FTP transfer file FTP transfer file settings FTP connection destination settings Basic Setting Node File Siecaeper Grice Hodbus client connect limits Disp amp Event data Use Not Use pepo srr Client number 1 Snapshot Off Setting orf lang en Allowed IP Address 6 6 Transfer wait time Disp amp Event data 8 min Report 8 min On Off Use Not Setting the FTP transfer files e Display and Event Data Select On when automatically transferring display and event data files e Report Select On when automatically transferring report data files including template based report files e Snapshot Select On when automatically transferring snapshot data files e Setting This item is only available on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Select On when automatically transferring the setup file and change settings log file that are saved when the settings have changed Transfer wait time e Disp amp Event data Set the time to delay the data transfer to the FTP server in the range of O to 120 minutes When FTP transfer at signing is enabled on a DX with the AS1 adva
32. n Allowed IP Address o Use Not e Use Not To place a limitation on the IP addresses that can connect to the DX Modbus server select Use Only the IP addresses specified here can connect to the DX Modbus server To not place a limitation select Not e Client number You can register up to 10 IP addresses Select the client number from 1 to 10 e On Off To allow connections select On e Allowed IP Address Enter the IP address in the range of 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 You cannot enter a host name 1 54 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 9 Using the Modbus Server Function Port Number The default value is 502 To change the setting Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Environment tab gt Communication gt Service port For the selectable range of port numbers see section 6 1 Reading Writing the DX Data on Another Device Another device client device sends commands to the DX to read the DX data or write data to the DX You can perform some operations such as memory start by writing in the registers For the function codes that the DX supports and the DX registers that the client device can access see Modbus Server Function in section 6 3 Specifying the Register Number Specify the DX register on the client device according to the instructions below e If you are using a commercial SCADA system or something similar specify the reg
33. recorded Report data file When the file division mode is Combine or Separate data files are automatically transferred when a report file is closed or divided For example data files are transferred once per month when generating only daily reports When the mode is Seprt2 an individual report file is output for each event t See section 9 5 in the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual Snapshot data file The files are automatically transferred when a snapshot is executed They are transferred regardless of the media storage setting Indicates snapshot using the FUNC key communication command EV2 command USER key or remote control function Setup file and change The DX automatically transfers the setup file and change settings settings log file when the log file that are automatically saved to the CF card when the settings settings have changed are changed When FTP transfer at signing is enabled on a DX with the AS1 advanced security option this file is automatically transferred after you sign in See section 2 1 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual 2 Only on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Shifting the Transfer Time Release number 3 or later There may be cases when data cannot be transferred from the DX to the FTP server due to too many simultaneous connections to the FTP server An example is when multiple files are created and need to be transferred at the same tim
34. 10 Using the Modbus Client Function Note About the MW100 e MW100s that support auto setting are those with firmware version R2 22 or later e MW100 modules that can be automatically set are the following input modules The installable input modules vary depending on the MW100 firmware version 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module 10 CH High speed Input Module 30 CH Medium Speed DCV TC DI Input Module 10 CH Medium Speed Pulse Input Module If there are no channels to be assigned or the Modbus server setting is OFF auto setting fails with an error Check the settings e MW100s that are connected through auto setting automatically switches to the measurement mode e Port number 34324 of the MW100 is used to perform auto setting e For details on the MW100 settings see the user s manual of the MW100 The first channel information of the MW100 that is automatically set to the external input channel can be displayed when the cursor is on the first or last channel GROUP 1 2067 81 61 10 10 10 Yue DISP M 1hour Ext channel gt Range Alarm First CH Last CH Ext range On Off Span Lower Span Upper Unit On 2 0000 2 0000 WO Ext alarm off off off off mone In addition the status of the connected MW100 can be confirmed on the Modbus status display screen HODBUS CLIENT 2
35. 3 32 BD Sets an alarm delay Ss Yes No No 3 32 NC Sets a comment text field S Yes No No 3 33 NB Sets a comment text block S Yes No No 3 33 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 11 spuewwog el 3 2 AList of Commands Command Function Execution Setting Connection Monitor Page Name Mode Administrator User Connection NW Sets an annunciator display S Yes No No 3 33 NG Sets a Web report layout S Yes No No 3 33 NH Sets Web report layout details S Yes No No 3 33 FR Sets the interval for acquiring data to the FIFO OSsb Yes No No 3 33 buffer SY Sets a four panel display OSs Yes Yes No 3 34 SM Sets the custom menu S Yes No No 3 34 Operations are limited by the user privilege settings 3 12 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 2 A List of Commands Control Commands AS1 To apply settings that you have changed using the basic setting commands you need to save the settings using the YE command Command Function Execution Setting Connection Monitor Page Name Mode Administrator User Connection BT Sets a batch name O Yes Yes No 3 37 BU Sets a batch comment O Yes Yes No 3 37 MH Writes a batch text field O Yes Yes No 3 37 UD Switches the screen O Yes Yes No 3 37 PS Starts or stops recording O Yes Yes No 3 39 AK Clears alarm output acknowledge alarms O Yes Yes No 3 39 EV
36. 32 bit floating point UINT 32_B UINT 32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L 6 6 IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Modbus Server Function Modbus Server Specifications Communicate via ModbusTCP Communication media Ethernet 10Base T Port 502 tcp default value Command wait timeout 1 minute However the timeout to receive the command after starting to receive the command is 10 seconds Maximum number of connections 2 Supported functions The functions that the DX supports are listed below Function Function Operation Code 3 Read the hold register 4XXXXX The client device reads the communication input data 4 Read the input register The client device reads the computed measured 3XXXXX alarm and time data of the DX 6 Single write to hold register The client device writes to the communication input 4XXXXX data or external input channel of the DX Loopback test The client device performs a loopback test of the DX 16 Write to the hold register The master device writes to the communication input 4XXXXX data or external input channel of the DX Register assignments shared with the Modbus slave function Input register pata Number Data type Measurement ch Measured data 300001 to 300048 16 bit signed integer Alarm status 301001 to 301048 Bit string Computation ch Computed data 302001 to 302120 32 bit signed integer Alarm status 303001 to 303
37. 4 502 Auto 5 502 Auto 6f 502 Auto 502 Auto 8 502 Auto 125ms 258ms ELLIS ls Next 1 2 1 8 9 16 Transmitted command settings Basic Setting Node Client command number First Last Server Regi Type ifr n cai cas 1 30001 INTIE atu ai o4 1 40001 INT16 afw n 101 105 2 40010 INT32_6 aloft Off 6 OFF Poff Bort 1 8 3 16 Basic settings Read cycle Set the read cycle to 125m 250m 500m 1 2 5 or 10s Retry interval Set the interval for retrying the connection when the connection is interrupted for some reason Select Off 10 20 or 30 s 1 2 5 10 20 or 30 min or 1 h When Off is selected the connection is not retried The communication stops if the communication fails Destination server settings Server number Select 1 to 16 for the server registration numbers to be configured Port Enter the port number in the range of 0 to 65535 for the selected server The default value is 502 Modbus server name Set the destination Modbus server name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Ifthe DNS is used you can set the host name as a server name e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required 1 56 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function e Unit Select Auto if the unit number of the destination server is not required Otherwise select Fixed If you select Fixed the unit number item is displayed e N
38. Commands The following are examples of setting commands for the Modbus Client function For the Modbus Master function substitute master for client and slave for server Connection DXAdvanced Instrument A Instrument B Instrument C example Modbus client Modbus server 1 Modbus server 2 Modbus server 3 I Ethernet l Loading to Communication Input Data The DX inputs data loaded from the server to communication input data as floating point type data e Example 1 Load the value of the 16 bit signed integer assigned to register 30001 of instrument A to C01 Communication input data Register of instrument A c01 30001 16 bit signed integer Command setting R M C01 C01 lt 1 30001 INT16 e Example 2 Load the value of the 32 bit signed integer assigned to registers 30003 and 30004 of instrument B to C03 Only the smallest register number need be specified in commands Communication input data Register of instrument B C03 lt 30003_ lower bytes 32 bit signed integer 30004 higher bytes Command setting R M c03 C03 lt 2 30003 INT32_L e Example 3 Load the values of the 16 bit signed integers assigned to registers 30001 and 30002 of instrument B to C01 and C02 Only the smallest register number need be specified in
39. Earlier Format version 1 e Format Details Item Description Output Value Version Format version 1 Number of blocks Number of configured channel information blocks Up to 348 Block size Configured channel information block size 72 fixed Block 1 ton Configured channel information blocks Up to 25056 bytes See Block Details Output in the byte order specified by the BO command Block Details Item Number of Bytes Description Channel number 2 1 to 440 Decimal place 1 0to4 Reserved 1 0 Channel type 4 2H for measurement and external input channels and 4H for computation channels This value is ORed with 800H when the range mode is DI or 8000H when the range mode is skip Unit information 8 The terminator is 0 Tag information 24 You can enter up to 16 characters for the tag comment The terminator is 0 Minimum input value 4 Measurement channels Allowable input range under the current setting Maximum input value 4 Computation channels 9999999 99999999 fixed External input channels 30000 30000 fixed Span lower limit 4 Measurement channels when scaling is not used Same value as the DX span setting Span upper limit 4 Measurement channels when scaling is used Same value as the DX scale setting Computation and external input channels when scaling is not used Same value as the DX span setting Scale lower limit 4 Measurement channels Same valu
40. Example Description XB Syntax Query Example Description XJ p3 Scan interval 25MS 125MS 250MS 1S 2S 5S p4 A D integration time AUTO 600Hz 50Hz 60Hz 100ms XV Set the scan interval to 1 second in normal mode XV1 NORMAL 1S The combinations of available scan interval modes and scan intervals vary depending on the model For details see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E You can set p4 to 600 Hz for fast sampling mode You can choose 100 ms when the scan interval is set to 2 s or 5 s On models with multi batch BT2 you can only set p2 to NORMAL and p3 to 1S 2S or 5S Sets burnout detection XB pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Burnout processing OFF No processing UP Sets the computed result to positive overflow Sets the computed result to negative overflow DOWN XB p1 Set the measured result to UP positive overflow when channel 001 burns out XB001 UP Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Sets RJC When using the internal compensation circuit Syntax Query Example XJ pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 RJC mode INTERNAL XJ pr Set the channel 001 RJC to internal compensation circuit XJ001 INTERNAL When using an external RJC Syntax Query Example Description XJ pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Measurement channel number p2 RJC mod
41. Executes manual sample takes a snapshot or O Yes Yes No 3 39 causes a timeout CL Executes manual SNTP O Yes No 3 39 CV Switches between normal and secondary trend oO Yes No 3 39 interval MS Writes a message display and write O Yes No 3 40 BJ Writes a free message O Yes No 3 40 EJ Changes the login password O Yes No 3 40 TL Starts stops resets computation MATH or clears O Yes No 3 40 the computation dropout status display LO Loads setup data for setting mode Os Yes No 3 41 LI Saves setup data S Yes No 3 41 CM Sets communication input data OSsb Yes Yes 3 41 CE Sets communication input of an external input OSsb Yes Yes 3 41 channel EM Starts or stops the e mail transmission function O Yes No 3 41 CU Recovers Modbus manually O Yes No 3 42 YO Loads a setup file for basic setting mode B Yes No 3 42 IR Resets a relative timer O Yes No 3 42 MA Resets a match time timer O Yes No 3 42 CW Sets an event switch O Yes No 3 42 LR Loads custom display screens S Yes No 3 42 LW Saves custom display screens S Yes No 3 43 BQ User locked ACK AS1 advanced security option O Yes No 3 43 EC Clears setup data and executes a cold reset AS1 B Yes No 3 43 advanced security option EE Switches out of operation mode AS1 advanced O Yes No No 3 44 security option BE Returns to operation mode AS1 advanced security Ss Yes No No 3 44 option Dedicated Barcode Commands Handled as key input BV Enters a string can only be used during
42. IM 04L41B01 17E 1 43 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Writing Messages Operator page only You can assign a text string to one of the DX messages 1 through 10 and write the message to a specified group at the same time The maximum message length is 32 alphanumeric characters The current message setting is overwritten This operation is not available on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Example of Writing a Message when the multi batch function BT2 option is not in use Use message number 9 and write the message ALARM to all groups Successful completion of the writing operation is indicated in the Command Response box 4 COMMANDIMAINI 10 0 23 75 Microsoft Inte a x Active Message Message No Write message to All Groups O Group Number GROUP 1 Input Characters ALARM Specify a message number EIET to display the corresponding z character string Command Response 000 0K E Example of Writing a Message when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use Use message number 1 and write the message start to all display groups in batch group 1 Successful completion of the writing operation is indicated in the Command Response box F COMMANDIMAIN 10 0 23 75 Microsoft Inte a Active Message Message No Write message to Batch Group Display Group All Groups O Group Number BATCH1 1 Input Characters start Se
43. IP address port number State Connection state ESTABLISHED Connection established eth Outputs Ethernet statistics Syntax eth lt terminator gt Example eth EA 00 00 00 12 34 56 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 65 spuewwog el 3 11 Maintenance and Test Commands Ethernet Statistics Name In Pkt In Err Out Pkt Out Err 16 Coll 100 0 0 0 0 0 mb0 74 0 64 0 0 EN help Outputs help Syntax help pl lt terminator gt pl Command name close con eth help net quit Example help EA con echo connection information eth echo ethernet information help echo help net echo network status quit close this connection EN net__ Outputs network statistics Syntax net lt terminator gt Example net EA 00 00 00 12 34 56 Network Status APP power on time 00 00 00 12 34 56 APP applalive disable APP genedrops 0 APP diagdrops 0 APP ftpsdrops 0 TCP keepalive 30s TCP connects 14 TCP closed 0 fo TCP timeoutdrop TCP keepdrops TCP sndtotal TCP sndbyte TCP sndrexmitpack w TCP sndrexmitbyte TCP revtotal TCP revbyte DLC 16 collisions EN oooroC OM Oo TCP keepalive Keepalive check cycle TCP connects Total number of connections established TCP closed Total number of closed connections TCP timeoutdrop Total number of closed connections due to TCP retransmission timeout When the transmitted packet is not received the D
44. IS 1 14 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option ktpass Execution Example Windows Server 2008 This execution example is different from the configuration example on the previous page Administrator C Windows system32 cmu_exe gth 16 Oxbfc9 minist rator NS KERBEROS gt m Settings on the DX Configure the following settings on the DX For the setup procedure see page 1 80 Item Setup Items Host principal dxadv Realm name Specify the realm name Password record 1 Encryption method AES256 KDC server name Specify the KDC server name Port number 88 Note The realm name is the domain name in all caps 1 86 IM 04L41B01 17E Chapter 2 Using the Serial Interface 2 1 DX Features Serial communication can be performed using RS 232 or RS 422 485 Explains the serial communication functions Modbus Master e The DX can connect to a Modbus slave device and read or write to the internal register The read data can be used as communication input data of the computation function on a computation channel The data can also be handled on the external input channel The data that can be written to the internal register is measured data and computed data M1 or PM1 option DX2000 with MC1 option Fora description of the settings required to use this function see section 2 4 For details on the Modbus function codes that the DX supports see section 6 3 e For the setting pr
45. IS 1 3 Connecting the DX When using a fixed IP address DHCP Set DHCP to Not IP address Set the IP address to assign to the DX Subnet mask Set the subnet mask according to the system or network to which the DX belongs Default gateway Set the IP address of the gateway Host name Set the DX s host name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters You do not have to set this parameter Domain name Set the network domain name that the DX belongs to using up to 64 characters You do not have to set this parameter Server search order Register up to two IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS servers Domain suffix search order Set up to two domain suffixes primary and secondary When obtaining the IP address from DHCP DHCP Set DHCP to Use DNS accession To automatically obtain the DNS server address select Use Otherwise select Not If you select Not you must set the server search order Host name register To automatically register the host name to the DNS server select Use Host name Set the DX s host name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters Domain name Set the network domain name that the DX belongs to using up to 64 characters Server search order not necessary when DNS accession is enabled Register up to two IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS servers Domain suffix search order Set up to two domain suffixes primary and secondary IM 04L41B01 17E 1 3 Connecting th
46. JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 1 DX Features SNTP Server Client DHCP Client The client function retrieves time information from a specified SNTP server such as at the specified interval The server function provides time information to DXs connected to the same network This function can be used to automatically retrieve IP addresses from a DHCP server You can also manually request or release network information EtherNet IP Server Release number 3 or later Other Functions The DX supports the following features e Loads data for measurement computed and external input channels e Writes to communication input data and external input channels For operating instructions see the EtherNet IP Communication Interface User s Manual IM04L41B01 18E Checking the connection status of the Ethernet interface You can check the connection status of the Ethernet interface on the rear panel or on the display of the DX For a description on the location and meaning of the connection status indicator see section 1 3 Keepalive extension function of TCP This function drops the connection if there is no response to the inspection packet that is periodically transmitted at the TCP level For a description of the settings required to use this function see section 1 3 Log display You can display operation logs on the log display The log can also be confirmed using a communication command In addition the Web screen can show the
47. LF characters are reserved You cannot use them as parameter characters German and French only Used for Command Tag Tag ST Message Message SG Arbitrary message Message BJ Group Group name SX File header File header TZ Batch text field Field title BH Field characters Batch comment Comment character string BU Four panel display Screen group name SY E mail Header 1 YU Header 2 App 6 IM 04L41B01 17E Appendix 4 Output Flow of the File or the File List on the External Storage Medium and Internal Memory Example in Which the File 10101000 DAD Is Output The figure below shows the output flow of the file 10101000 DAD in the DATAO directory of the external storage medium Command to send START Command description Send the command LL MEGET DRV0 DATA0 10101000 DAD Specify the file name using full path and output the data Binary see section 4 1 Received response data Binary header Binary footer i l l i Binary data l l l J NO Bit 0 of the binary header flag 0 There is more data 1 Data transmission is complete Is there more data Send the command MENEXT Binary see section 4 1 Output the subsequent data Binary header Binary data Binary footer l IM 04L41B01 17E App 7 xipueddy
48. LP2 To send system notifications Syntax Query Example YU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p lt terminator gt p1 Information to send SYSTEM p2 Recipient 1 ON OFF p3 Recipient 2 ON OFF p4 Whether to include source URL ON OFF p5 Subject up to 32 characters p6 Header 1 up to 64 characters p7 Header 2 up to 64 characters YU p1 Send system notification e mail that includes the source URL to recipient 1 Set the subject to SystemAlert and header 1 to LP2 YUSYSTEM ON OFF ON SystemAlart LP2 To send report generation notifications Syntax YU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p lt terminator gt p1 Information to send REPORT p2 Recipient 1 ON OFF 3 54 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 6 Basic Setting Commands Query Example Description i Syntax Query Example Description YW Syntax Query Example Description YX Syntax Query p3 Recipient 2 ON OFF p4 Whether to include source URL ON OFF p5 Subject up to 32 characters p6 Header 1 up to 64 characters p7 Header 2 up to 64 characters YU p1 Send report generation notification e mail that includes the source URL to recipient 1 Set the subject to Report and header 1 to LP2 YUREPORT ON OFF ON Report LP2 For details on system notifications see section 1 4 You can use report generation notification on models with the M1 or PM1 math option For details on e mail settings see sectio
49. M1 or PM1 math option You can specify external input channels on models with the MC1 external input channel option Query Example When Using Alarms Syntax SA pl1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 lt terminator gt pl Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Alarm number 1 to 4 p3 Alarm on off ON p4 Alarm type H High limit alarm L Low limit alarm h Difference high limit alarm 1 Difference low limit alarm Query Example Description High limit on rate of change alarm Low limit on rate of change alarm Delay high limit alarm Delay low limit alarm ct HH Characters are case sensitive p5 Alarm value p6 Relay setting ON Relay setting on OFF Relay setting off p7 Relay number when p6 is set to ON Space when p6 is set to OFF p8 Detection of alarm ON OFF SA p1 p2 Set a high limit alarm alarm value 1000 on channel 002 alarm number 1 and activate relay 101 when an alarm occurs SA002 1 ON H 1000 ON 101 e For a channel whose input range is set to SKIP using the SR command p3 cannot be set to ON e For a channel whose computation channel is set to OFF using the SO command p3 cannot be set to ON e For a channel whose external input channel is set to OFF ER command p3 cannot be set to ON All alarm settings on a channel are set to OFF when e Its input type is changed VOLT TC etc e Its measurement range is changed e Its span or scaling values are changed during
50. Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E System Mail Invalid User Format e Subject Subject System warning e Syntax header1lCRLF header2CRLF CRLF User lockedCRLF lt Host_name gt CRLF hostCRLF CRLF mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF ERROR CRLF lt User_ name gt uuue eu CRLF Access the following URL in order to look at_a_screen CRLF http host domain CRLF CRLF mo dd_hh mi ss Time when the e mail was created uuu eeu Name of the invalid user up to 20 characters IM 04L41B01 17E 1 25 1 4 Sending E mail Messages Report Mail Format e Subject Subject Report data e Syntax header1l CRLF header2 CRLF CRLF ti_report CRLF lt Host_name gt CRLF hostCRLF CRLF mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF lt CH gt ccc CcCRLF lt tp gt eee gt eCRLIF lt tp gt eee gt eCRLIF lt tp gt eee gt eCRLF lt tp gt eee eCRLF lt Unit gt uuu uCRLF CRLF Access the following URL_in order to look at_ a_ screen CRLF http host domain CRLF CRLF ti Contents of the report mail hourly daily weekly or monthly report ccc c Channel number tag comment or tag number Up to 16 characters Channels set to Skip or Off are not output For the channel number see section 3 3 tp Report content average maximum minimum instantaneous and sum Four items among these are output eee e Measured Computed value up to 10 digits including the sign and decimal point However for the sum value the value is output a
51. Reserved 1 0 Alarm type 4 The following settings are entered in order from level 1 to 4 0 Setting off 1 H high limit 2 L low limit 3 h difference high limit 4 difference low limit 5 R high limit on rate of change 6 r low limit on rate of change 7 T delay high limit 8 t delay low limit Alarm value 4x4 The alarm values are entered in order from level 1 to 4 Output in the byte order specified by the BO command Manual Sampled Data Report Data The ME or MO command is used to output the data The ID number of the output format is 17 See section 4 1 For the data format see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E The ME or MO command is used to output the data The ID number of the output format is 18 See section 4 1 For the data format see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E 4 38 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 4 Output Format of Instrument Information This section describes the instrument information output format of the instrument information server Note The CRLF used in this section denotes carriage return line feed Response The parameters of the packet that are returned as a response are lined up according to the following format EACRLF Parameter 1 value of parameter 1 CRLF Parameter 2 value of parameter 2 CRLF sasuodsay a The parameter values are outp
52. Special Response Commands 3 11 Maintenance and Test Commands 3 10 Output Commands Special Response Commands l Outputs instrument information Syntax I lt terminator gt Description This command sends the maker model serial number and firmware version in a comma separated ASCII string with a terminator at the end Example YOKOGAWA DX1000 99AA0123 F1 01 3 11 Maintenance and Test Commands Available when using the maintenance test server function via Ethernet close_ Closes another device s connection Syntax close pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Port on the DX side 1 to 65535 p2 IP address on the PC side 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p3 Port on the PC side 0 to 65535 Example close 34159 192 168 111 24 1054 EO Description You cannot use this command to disconnect a server port You cannot use this command to disconnect from the DX that you are operating Use the quit command instead con Outputs connection information Syntax con lt terminator gt Example con EA 00 00 00 12 34 56 Active connections Proto Local Address Foreign Address State TCP 192 168 111 24 34159 192 168 111 24 1053 ESTABLISHED TCP 0 QO O 0 34155 0 0 0 O O LISTEN TCP 0 O O 0 34159 0 0 0 Or O LISTEN TCP 0 O O 0 34150 0 0 0 O O LISTEN EN TCP Protocol used Local Address DX socket address Displays IP address port number Foreign Address Destination socket address Displays
53. Timer digits MATCHTIMETIMER Match time timer iye Query SK p1 Query SJ p 1 Example Set the constant in constant number K01 to Example Assign timer 1 to computation channel number 1 0000E 10 110 Do not convert the unit of time and enable the reset setting J110 1 OFF ON TIMER SKKO1 1 0000E 10 Description You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option IM 04L41B01 17E 3 31 ainiin el 3 4 Setting Commands Description e You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e Set parameters p1 and p2 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e You cannot use this command while computation in progress e When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling e About p3 Because the DX integrates sampled data over each scan interval the physical value integrated over a given unit of time may be different from the actual integrated value This occurs if the unit of time is different from the scan interval If this occurs set p3 to the same unit of time as that for the physical value that you are measuring The DX calculates the integrated value using one the following conversion formulas based on p3 OFF 2 measured value IS 2 measured value x scan interval MIN 2 measured value x scan interval 60 HOUR 2 measured value x scan interval 3600 The scan interval unit is seconds TX Sets the
54. User90 The DX returns the following message E1 407 Password has expired Please enter a new password 6 Enter a new password Note e You cannot use the same combination of user ID and password as another user Enter a password that is between 6 and 20 characters in length e You cannot register a character string that contains spaces or the word quit IM 04L41B01 17E 1 73 9oej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 12 Using the Setting Measurement Server The DX returns the following message E1 408 Enter password again for confirmation Enter the password that you entered in step 6 The DX returns the following message EO You are now logged in Logging In after the Password Has Been Set 1 Specify the host name or IP address of the DX that you want to connect to Or specify the port number 34260 of the setting measurement server The DX returns the following message E1 406 Select function from setting or monitor Enter setting to log in to the setting function Enter monitor to log in to the monitoring function The DX returns the following message E1 400 Input username Enter the user name The DX returns the following message E1 405 Input user ID Enter the user ID The DX returns the following message E1 401 Input password Enter the password The DX returns the following message EO You are now logged in You will need
55. W Sets an input range Sets a computing equation Sets the range of an external input channel Sets memory sampling Sets an alarm Sets the trend interval and auto save interval Sets the circular display offset time Sets how the DX operates after one circular display cycle Sets the secondary trend interval Sets manual sampling Sets sampling conditions for event data Sets a zone Sets a partial expanded display Sets a tag Sets a display group release number 2 or earlier Sets a trip line release number 2 or earlier Sets a display group release number 3 or later Sets a trip line release number 3 or later Sets a message Sets the directory on the external storage medium for saving data Sets a file header Sets a data file name Sets the date and time Sets daylight saving time Sets the trend display Sets the line width and the number of grids to use on the trend graph Sets the bar graph display Sets the bar graph for a channel Execution Mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Administrator User Yes Yes
56. When multi batch BT2 is in use you cannot use this command in batch overview mode To switch the operation screen mode Syntax UD pl1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Display type 5 p2 Operation screen mode COMMON BATCH COMMON Batch overview mode BATCH Batch single mode p3 Batch group number Description You can use this command when multi batch BT2 is in use e Parameter p3 is valid when p2 is set to BATCH Set parameter p3 by referring to the table in section 3 3 PS Starts or stops recording Syntax PS pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Recording start or stop 0 Start 1 Stop p2 Batch group number 0 All groups 1 2 Batch group number Example Start recording PSO Description e When you start recording the DX records display event and report data to the internal memory e Parameter p2 is valid when multi batch BT2 is in use If you omit p2 it is the same as setting p2 to zero When the AS1 advanced security option is in use and the DX is in setting mode it will not start recording even if you send a PSO command Set parameter p2 by referring to the table in section 3 3 AK Clears alarm output acknowledge alarms Syntax AK pl1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Executes alarm acknowledge 0 0 Alarm acknowledge 1 Individual alarm acknowledgment Example 2 Resets alarm display p2 Channel number p3 Alarm level 1 to 4 Clear alarm output acknowledge alarms AKO Description e If you set p1 to 2 when annunc
57. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Page No 3 19 No 3 20 No 3 20 No 3 21 No 3 21 No 3 22 No 3 22 No 3 23 No 3 23 No 3 23 No 3 23 No 3 23 No 3 24 No 3 24 No 3 24 No 3 24 No 3 25 No 3 25 No 3 25 No 3 25 No 3 26 No 3 26 No 3 26 No 3 26 No 3 26 No 3 27 No 3 27 No 3 27 3 4 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 2 A List of Commands Group Command Function Execution Administrator User Page Name Mode TN Sets a scale Operation mode Yes No 3 27 SV Sets a measurement channel s moving average Operation mode Yes No 3 27 sc Sets a channel display color Operation mode Yes No 3 27 TA Sets an alarm point mark Operation mode Yes No 3 27 TG Sets a color scale band Operation mode Yes No 3 28 SQ Sets the LCD brightness and the screen backlight saver Operation mode Yes No 3 28 TC Sets the background color Operation mode Yes No 3 28 TP Sets the automatic switching back to default display Operation mode Yes No 3 28 NF Sets the favorite key operation Operation mode Yes No 3 28 TR Sets the automatic switching back to default display Operation mode Yes No 3 28 TQ Sets a timer Operation mode Yes No 3 28 TK Sets a match time timer Operation mode Yes No 3 29 TU Sets an event action Operation mode Yes No 3 29 SK Sets a constant Operation mode Yes No 3 31 SI Sets the rolling average function of a computation channel Operation mode Yes No 3 31 SJ Sets a
58. Yes Yes 3 65 eth Outputs Ethernet statistics Yes Yes 3 65 help Outputs help Yes Yes 3 66 net Outputs network statistics Yes Yes 3 66 quit Closes the connection to the instrument that you are operating Yes Yes 3 66 Instrument Information Output Commands Available when using the instrument information server function via Ethernet communications Parameter Function Page serial Outputs the serial number 3 67 host Outputs the host name 3 67 ip Outputs the IP address 3 67 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 15 spuewwog eo 3 3 Setup Parameters The measurement range and setup range of parameters used in a command vary depending on the combination of the command range and options Parameter Input Example of Measurement Range The span upper and lower limit parameters of the SR command input range setting command requires all digits including those to the right of the decimal to be entered For example if you want to set the upper limit to 1 0000 V when the measurement range is 2 0000 V to 2 0000 V the value is 10000 If you want to set the limit to 0 5000 V the value is 5000 The table below gives configuration examples Measurement Input Type Selectable Range of the Specified Range Parameter Range Parameter Measurement Range VOLT 20mV 20 000mV to20 000mV 10 000mV to 20 000mV 10000 to 20000 SQRT 2V 2 0000V to 2 0000V 2 0000V to0 5000V 20000 to 5000 TC R 0 0 to1760
59. You have to set the password using key operations KE Key operations Performs the same operations as pressing a key on the DX A user who is registered on the DX can use barcodes to supplement key input Scan the communication commands encoded in bar codes to operate the DX with a barcode reader You can perform the same operations that you can perform using the DX keys Handling of Barcode Input Barcode input is handled as key input Operations You can only use the following commands when you have logged into the DX using the keys The KE and BV commands and all control commands other than CM and CE Users cannot execute operations commands that are not allowed under their user privileges See section 2 8 for the correspondence between the commands that can be used and the user privilege settings 2 22 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 9 Using Barcode Input AS1 option Operation Log Operations are recorded in the DX operation log The operator is the user who was logged in using the DX keys Barcode Readers The DX recognizes the following barcode readers Model name MS9540 RS RS 232 interface Maker Metrologic Instruments Inc e Model name LS1902T RS RS 232 interface Maker Symbol Technologies Inc Because only a small number of characters can be specified in the header the input method may be limited when you use this barcode reader with the DX Operation Examples This section contains operation example
60. a measurement channel or when the channel is turned OFF for a computation channel eee Channel number 3 digits 001 to 048 Measurement channel 101 to 160 Computation channel 201 to 440 External input channel uuuuuu Unit information 6 characters left justified mV mV V i V ooo i C XXXXXX User defined character string pp Decimal point position 00 to 04 No decimal 00000 for 00 One digit to the right of the decimal 0000 0 for 01 Two digits to the right of the decimal 000 00 for 02 Three digits to the right of the decimal 00 000 for 03 Four digits to the right of the decimal 0 0000 for 04 Space Example EA 001mvV r01 002mV 01 EN IM 04L41B01 17E 4 7 sasuodsay a 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Measured computed and external input data The FD command is used to output the data e You can use the CB command to specify whether to output the data of measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to OFF e Syntax The measured computed data is output in the following syntax along with the date and time information for each channel EACRLF DATE yy mo ddCRLF TIME hh mm ss mmmtCRLF s_ccca a2aza4suuuuuufdddddE ppCRLF ccc alaza3a4 uuuuuu Year 00 to 99 Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 Millisecond 000 to 999 A period is placed between seconds and milliseconds Rese
61. ancillary operation of the start key Syntax TX pl lt terminator gt pl Computation operation OFF START RESET START Query TX Example Configure the start key so that computation also starts when the start key is pressed TXSTART BH Sets a batch text field Syntax BH pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt p1 Batch group number Set this parameter to 1 when multi batch BT2 is not in use p2 Field number 1 to 24 p3 Field title up to 20 characters p4 Field string up to 30 characters Query BH p1 p2 Example Register the title OPERATOR and the string DAQSTATION to batch group 1 s field number 2 BH1 2 OPERATOR DAQSTATION Description If you are using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command on a batch group that is recording memory sampling e For the characters that you can use see appendix 3 e Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 EH__ Sets calibration correction When p2 is set to BEGIN Syntax EH pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Type of operation BEGIN p3 Number of break points of the calibration segment OFF 2 to 16 OFF Turns off calibration 2 to 16 Number of break points When p2 is set to SET Syntax EH pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Type of operation SET p3 A specific break point 1 to 16 p4 Input value of the specific break point p5 Output value of the specific break point Description e Set p1 by
62. and authentication key Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Password management gt KDC connection Certification key KDC connection Certification key Basic Setting Node KDC connection Certification key KDC server name Host principal es 3 Port number 88 Realm name Password TETTI Encryption AES128 Input Clear Copy KDC Connection You can specify a primary and a secondary KDC server KDC server name Enter the KDC server name here using up to 64 alphanumeric characters Port number You can specify a value from 1 to 65535 If you do not specify a port number the default port number which is 88 is used Certification Key Host principal The DX account name registered on the KDC server You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters 1 You cannot use forward slashes or at signs Realm name The name of the domain that contains the KDC server and the DX You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters 2 You cannot use forward slashes or at signs Characters are case sensitive Password Set the password to use to access the KDC server using up to 20 characters The password is displayed as Encryption Method Select an encryption method that the server supports from AES128 AES256 and ARC4 ARC4 ARCFOUR is an encryption algorithm that is compatible with RC4 Note The host prin
63. at the specified acquiring interval FIFO acquiring interval set with the FR command By using this function it is possible to read measured computed data that have been saved at the specified intervals regardless of the frequency at which the PC periodically reads the measured computed data The following example shows the case when the acquisition interval is 1 s and the capacity of the FIFO memory is for 8 intervals Block 1 2 3 Previous read 4 Position RP1 5 Current read lt 6 Position RP2 7 Block 8 lt lt Most recent acquire Position WP e Acquiring of the Measured Computed Data The measured computed data are acquired to the internal memory at 1 s intervals e Measured computed data is acquired to positions 1 through 8 in order After acquiring to position 8 the next data is acquired to position 1 e Reading the Measured Computed Data FF GET command is used Outputs the data from the previous read position RP1 to the most recent acquisition position WP In this example more than 2 s has elapsed from the previous read operation Therefore data in blocks 5 and 6 are output The size of the internal memory reserved for FIFO FIFO buffer data size varies depending on the model Model Data size DX1002 DX1004 DX2004 and DX2008 1200 intervals 30 s at the fastest acquisition interval of 25 ms DX
64. based on the annunciator sequence Sequence pa S ISA A 4 NONHOLD RESET ISA Isaa froo RESET ISA M HOLD RESET Query WO p1 Example Specify no AND operation of the output relays set the relay action to energize and release the relay output when the alarm ACK operation is performed regardless of the alarm status WORLY NONE ENERGINE HOLD RESET WH Sets alarm hysteresis Measurement channels Syntax WH pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Channel type MEASURE p2 Hysteresis on high and low limit alarms 0 to 50 p3 Hysteresis on difference high and low limit alarms 0 to 50 Computation channels Syntax WH pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel type MATH p2 Hysteresis on high and low limit alarms 0 to 50 External input channels Syntax WH pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel type EXTERNAL p2 Hysteresis on high and low limit alarms 0 to 50 Query WH p1 Example Set the high and low limit alarm hysteresis for measurement channels to 4 0 and the difference high and low limit alarm hysteresis to 0 0 WHMEASURE 40 0 Description You can specify computation channels on models with the M1 or PM1 math option You can specify external input channels on models with the external input channel option XV Sets the scan interval and A D integral time Syntax XV pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl 1 fixed p2 Scan interval mode NORMAL FAST Fast sampling 3 48 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 6 Basic Setting Commands Query
65. bytes e For the data sum it is calculated from the binary data 1 byte Padding If the data length of the buffer is odd a zero is padded so that it is even 1 through 6 are summed as unsigned two byte integers unsigned short If the digit overflows a 1 is added Finally the result is bit wise inverted Sample Program The sum value is determined using the following sample program and the calculated result is returned The sum determined by the sample program can be compared with the header sum of the output binary header section and the data sum of the output binary footer section Sum Calculation Function for a 32 bit CPU Parameter buff Pointer to the top of the data on which the sum is calculated len Length of the data on which the sum is calculated Returned value Calculated sum int cksum unsigned char buff int len unsigned short p Pointer to the next two byte data word in the buffer that is to be summed unsigned int csum Checksum value int i int odd csum 0 Initialize odd len 2 Check whether the number of data points is even len gt gt 1 Determine the number of data points using a short data type p unsigned short buff for i 0 i lt len i Sum using an unsigned short data type csum pt t 4 4 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 1 Response Syntax if odd When the data length is odd union tmp Pad wit
66. commands Communication input data Register of instrument B c01 K 30001 16 bit signed integer c02 30002 16 bit signed integer Command setting R M C01 C0O2 2 30001 INT16 e Example 4 Load the values of the 32 bit floating point assigned to registers 30005 and 30006 of instrument B to C04 Only the smallest register number need be specified in commands Communication input data Register of instrument B co4 K 30005 lower bytes 32 bit floating point 30006 higher bytes on Command setting R M C04 C04 lt 2 30005 FLOAT_L IM 04L41B01 17E 1 59 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function Loading to External Input Channels DX2000 Only The DX inputs the data loaded from the server to the external input channel as a 16 bit signed integer type e Example 1 Load the values of the 16 bit unsigned integers assigned to register 30001 of instrument C to external input channel 201 External input channel Register of instrument C 201 K 30001 16 bit unsigned integer Command setting R 201 201 lt 3 30001 UINT16 e Example 2 Load the values of the 32 bit unsigned integers assigned to registers 32001 and 32002 of instrument C to external input channel 202 Only the smallest register number
67. communication log is output Up to 50 Modbus communication events are retained Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_c_ xxxxxxx_ kkkk_ nn _dCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 g Communication type C or M C Modbus client Ethernet M Modbus master serial xxxxxxx Even that occurred 7 characters DROPOUT Communication could not keep up and drop out occurred ACTIVE Activated READY Command ready state CLOSE Disconnected HALT Command halted kkkk Detail 4 characters GOOD Normal operation NONE No response from the slave device FUNC Received a function error REGI Received a register error ERR Received a packet error LINK Ethernet cable disconnected Modbus client HOST Unable to result the IP address from the host name Modbus client CNCT Failed to connect to the server Modbus client SEND Failed to send the command Modbus client BRKN Failed to receive the command Space At command start nn Command number 1 to 16 space d Command type R W E space R Read W Write E E M command gt Space e Example EA 01 05 11 12 20 00 C DROPOUT 01 05 11 12 21 00 C READY NONE 01 R 01 05 11 12 25 00 C HALT NONE 01 R EN E 4 22 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Alarm Summary e The FL command is used to output the data e The alarm
68. distance Up to 1 2 km Terminator External recommended resistance 120 Q 1 2 W IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Modbus Client Function Basic Operation e The DX as a Modbus client device communicates with Modbus servers periodically by sending commands at specified intervals e The Modbus client function operates independently from the Modbus master function via the serial communication e The supported functions are reading data from the input registers and hold registers on the server and writing data into the hold registers on the server Modbus Client Specifications Communicate via ModbusTCP Communication media Ethernet 10Base T Read cycle Select from the following 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s 5s and10s Connection retry Select the reconnection interval after disconnecting the connection after the connection wait time has elapsed from the following OFF 10 s 20 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min and 1h Connection timeout value 1 min However when the IP address is not established with DHCP a communication error results immediately Command timeout value 10 s Server Set up to 16 servers Supported functions Supported Modbus client functions are as follows The server device must support these functions Function Code Function Operation 3 Read the hold register The DX reads the hold register of the server 4XXXX 4XXXXX device into the commu
69. el 3 6 Basic Setting Commands p2 p3 p4 Where to write messages that you enter using keys COMMON All display groups SEPARATE Display group that you specify Power failure message OFF ON Message change OFF ON Input settings Syntax WU p1 p2 pl p2 lt terminator gt Setting type INPUT How to detect values that exceed the scale FREE When the measurement range is exceeded OVER When 105 of the scale is exceeded Alarm settings Syntax WU p1 p2 p3 p4 ps Description Pa pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt Setting type ALARM Alarm suppression function OFF ON Annunciator mode OFF ON Sequence ISA A 4 ISA A ISA M ISA A 4 No lock in ISA A Lock in ISA M Double lock in Color when no alarms are activated GREEN WHITE rameters p4 and p5 are valid when p3 is set to ON Security settings Syntax WU p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 Description pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt Setting type SECURITY Key OFF Disables security features KEYLOCK Locks the keys LOGIN Enables the login function Communication OFF Disables security features LOGIN Enables the login function Multi login ON OFF Password management ON OFF p4 and p5 are only valid on models with the AS1 advanced security option On models with the AS1 advanced security option p2 is fixed at LOGIN Media settings Syntax WU pl p2 p3 Example pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt Setting type MEDIA Automa
70. except for ME and MO and control commands CM and CE Main Functions and Commands e Outputting the Most Recent Measured and Computed Data Command Function FD The most recent measured and computed data is output in binary or ASCII format When the data is output in binary format only the significands of the measured and computed data are output To acquire the correct values you must combine the values output by this command with the decimal place information output by the FE command Example A value of 12 345 is output as 12345 in binary format BO When data is output in binary format this command specifies whether to output the data from the MSB most significant bit or from the LSB least significant bit FE Outputs the decimal place and unit information of the measured and computed data This command can be used when data is output in binary format e Outputting Measured and Computed Data at a Specific Interval The DX outputs the data from a FIFO buffer First In First Out see appendix 5 Command _ Function FF Outputs the significands of the measured and computed data in binary format To acquire the correct values you must combine the values output by this command with the decimal place information output by the FE command See appendix 5 Flow Chart of the FIFO Data Output BO See the explanation for Outputting the Most Recent Measured and Compute
71. exponent are spaces Relay Status and Internal Switch Status The FD command is used to output the DO status and internal switch status e Syntax EACRLF T101 106 aaaaaaCRLF T11 116 aaaaaaCRLF 121 126 aaaaaaCRLF 131 136 aaaaaaCRLF S01 S30 aaa CRLF ENCRLF aaa Indicates the relay statuses in ascending order by relay number from the left 1 Relay ON 0 Relay OFF Relay not installed Example 1 When relays 101 to 104 are ON and 105 and 106 are not installed for the DX1000 EA T101 106 1111 S01 130 000000000000000000000000000000 EN IM 04L41B01 17E 4 9 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Communication Log The FL command is used to output the data A log of setting basic setting output commands and responses is output Up to 200 logs are retained Logs that exceed 200 are cleared from the oldest data e Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_n uuu ufd_mmm mCRLF yy mo dd hh ss uuu mmm Year 00 to 99 Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 Connection ID A number used to identify the user that is connected O Serial 1to3 Ethernet User name up to 20 characters Multiple command flag Space Single T Multiple If multiple commands are separated by sub delimiters and output at once is displayed The multiple commands are divided at each sub delimiter and stored as individual logs 1 log for
72. fixed at zero 1 Calculate Cs Enable Calculate the checksum CS1 You can use this command only for serial communications Sets status filters IF p1l P2 lt terminator gt p1 Filter values for status information numbers 1to4 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p2 Filter values for status information numbers 5 to 8 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 IF Set the status filter values to 1 0 4 0 and 255 127 63 31 IF 1 0 4 0 255 127 63 31 For details see chapter 5 Sets the data output format CB pl lt terminator gt pl Output format 0 Normal output includes data from channels set to SKIP and OFF 1 Do not output data from channels set to SKIP or OFF CB Set the output format to normal output CBO e This setting is separate for each connection This command only affects the communication section and does not affect the front panel settings Effective range of commands Output information Corresponding command Instantaneous data output binary FD1 FF Instantaneous data output ASCII FDO Decimal place information ASCII FE1 Setup channel information binary FES Configured alarm information binary FE6 CC Disconnects the Ethernet connection can only be used for Ethernet communications Syntax CC pl lt terminator gt pl Disconnection 0 Example Disconnect the connection CCO Note Initialization of settings specified using the BO CS IF and CB commands Serial communication
73. follows The type of report to create is specified Report gt Basic settings e Web server is set to Use Communication Ethernet gt Server gt Server modes e The operator or monitor page is set to On Communication Ethernet gt Web page Press MENU to switch to setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Web Report lt gt pena 12 02 11 20 49 Oe MEMS Web Report No On Off On Title Item No fi 5 Item Channel Value Name 1 on Rot Sum 2 off ai off 4 Off s off Input 1 a Web Report No You can configure 10 different report layouts Set the number in the range of 1 to 10 On Off Select On to use the layout Title The report title This title is used to select the layout when displaying reports on the Web browser Enter the title using up to 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols Item No DX1000 and DX1000N only You can set up to 10 items Select 1 5 or 6 10 Item Channel Value and Name For each item number set the report channel computation type and name to assign to the item Enter the name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols For the procedure to configure the report see section 9 5 in the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E 1 40 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser e Displaying a Report 1 Click Report to open the Create Web Report window Z REPORT MENU 10 0 23 75 Microsoft Inte
74. format version 1 Reserved 4 Same as format version 1 Tag comment 64 The terminator is 0 Tag number usage 1 0 Do not use 1 Use use or not use Reserved 7 0 fixed Tag No 32 The terminator is 0 If tag number usage is set to zero do not use All zeroes IM 04L41B01 17E 4 37 sasuodsay a 4 3 Output Format of Binary Data Configured Alarm Information Data The FE6 command is used to output the data The ID number of the output format is 26 You can use the CB command to specify whether to output the data of measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to OFF The figure below indicates the format 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte lt gt k gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Version Reserved Number of blocks Block size Reserved Reserved N Configured alarm information block 1 XN N Configured alarm information block n Bes Format Details Item Description Output Value Version Format version 1 Number of blocks Number of configured alarm information blocks Up to 348 Block size Size of the of configured alarm information blocks 24 Block 1 ton Configured alarm information blocks Up to 8352 bytes See Block Details Output in the byte order specified by the BO command Block Details Item Number of Bytes Notes Channel number 2 1 to 440 Decimal place 1 0to4
75. function BT2 option is not in use LOG MESSAGE Creation date 2008 12 02 13 54 41 asic hold1 ALL Communication 2008 12 02 13 53 25 siat ALL Key peer hold ALL Key 2008 12 02 13 53 09 start SLL Key 2008 12 02 13 52 56 stop ALL Key AANAND Message summary example when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use release number 3 or later Displays the batch group that messages were written to LOG MESSAGE Refresh Close Creation date 2008 12 02 14 30 35 a 8 Gree 2008 12 02 14 30 33 start Key 2008 12 02 14 28 49 srant 1 T ALL Key IM 04L41B01 17E 1 38 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Displaying and Printing Report Data M1 and PM1 options release number 3 or later You can display report data in the specified format layout and print it e Procedure Set the report display layout before you carry out this operation In the layout set the report title the report channels to display and the item names From the operator or monitor page open the create web report window and select the report file and the layout to use Report layout example Daily report aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy Plant Section 50 Industrial water Daily report Start time 2007 03 01 01 00 00 Timeout time Minimum pump Maximum pump Average pump Integrated Flow rate volume k volume
76. gt Select Group gt Batch overview mode Refresh Data list Print page SCREENMODE Select the screen mode T List box Select Screen Mode gt Select Screen Mode gt Select Screen Mode gt aA DISP ZENTER DISP 53min 2 4 gt v OFF DISP 59min DISP 1hour IM 04L41B01 17E 1 35 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Switching the Screen Operator page only e Screen Mode Only when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use From the Select Screen Mode list box select Batch Overview batch overview mode or Batch Group batch single mode Trend and Historical Trend Using the Select Group list box you can switch to the trend or historical trend display for the group that you specify If you are using the multi batch function BT2 option and are displaying the batch single mode screen you can switch between the screens in the displayed batch group Other Screens From the Select Screen list box you can switch the screen by specifying digital bar graph overview or custom If you are using the multi batch function BT2 option and are displaying the batch single mode screen you can switch between the screens in the displayed batch group DISP ENTER Key Arrow Keys and Favorite Key If the DX is in operation mode you can click the DISP ENTER arrow and favorite keys to carry out the corresponding operation o
77. input data number p5 Server number 1 to 16 p6 First register number 30001 to 39999 40001 to 49999 300001 to 365536 400001 to 465536 p7 Register data type INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L When p2 is set to W write to measurement channels p3 First channel measurement channel number p4 Last channel measurement channel number p5 Server number 1 to 16 p6 First register number 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465536 p7 Register data type INT16 FLOAT_B FLOAT_L When p2 is set to W M write to computation channels p3 First channel computation channel number p4 Last channel computation channel number p5 Server number 1 to 16 p6 First register number 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465536 p7 Register data type INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L When p2 E M Communication input channel data exchange Query Example p3 First channel communication input data number p4 Last channel communication input data number p4 can only be set to the same value as p3 Only one register can be loaded per command p5 Server number 1 to 16 p6 First register number 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465536 p7 Register data type INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L YR p1 For command number 5 set the command type to W the first channel to 01 the last channel to 04 the server number to 1 the first register
78. is i Command from the DX dropped is shorter than the specified interval The status lamp condition is an example when Response from the server device connection retry is configured IM 04L41B01 17E App 1 Appendix 1 Data Dropout during Modbus Communication Data Dropout during Modbus Master If the response to the previous command is not complete when the DX attempts to issue a command to a slave device the DX command cannot issue the command causing a data dropout Take appropriate measures by referring to the following figures 1 When the response from the slave device takes a long time Read cycle S a a __ ___ _ Slave device 1 t t Slave device 2 Loo Lto ut Data dropout Data dropout slaves 2 and 3 slave 3 Slave device 3 2 When there is no response from the slave device Read cycle ae Slave device 1 t t t0 Timeout value Lto Hte Slave device 2 a CO t L1 t Data dropout slaves 2 and 3 Slave device 3 3 When the slave device that is not responding is disconnected retry count is set to 1 Read cycle Io o o a a Slave device 1 t t0 t i i Timeout value Timeout value i i Retry L1 Disconnect slave 2 L40 Data dropout slaves 2 and 3 Slave device 2 MEYO Slave device 3 Data dropout slaves 2 and 3 Y R Status lamp Command f
79. log display excluding the communication log and DHCP log e Error log screen Log of operation errors e Communication log screen Log of communication input output to the setting measurement server e FTP log screen Log of file transfers carried out using the FTP client function e WEB log screen Log of operations using the Web server function e Mail log screen Log of E mail transmissions Login log screen Log of login logout items related to time adjustment and calibration management operations e SNTP log screen Log of access to the SNTP server e DHCP log screen Log of access to the DHCP server e Modbus log screen Log of Modbus status access to the master or client Operation log screen Log of operations Change settings log screen Log of setting changes 1 Only on DXs without the AS1 advanced security option 2 Only on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option For the operating procedure of the log screen and the details on the displayed contents see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E For details on the Modbus status log see section 1 10 For details on the log output using communication commands see section 4 2 Fora description of the log display on the Web screen see section 1 5 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 2 Flow of Operation When Using the Ethernet Interface Follow the flowchart below to set the Ethernet communications Start of setting
80. measurement server Auser is not authorized to change the settings that would change the operation of the DX However a user can output measured and setting data e Limitations on the use of the maintenance test server A user cannot disconnect a connection between another PC and the DX A user can disconnect the connection between the PC that the user is using and the DX e Limitations on the use of the FTP server A user cannot save files to the external storage medium of the DX or delete files on it A user can load files A user can access the monitor page through the Web server function IM 04L41B01 17E 1 1 DX Features Login On DXs with the AS1 advanced security option You have to log in to use the setting measurement server and Web server functions e Fora description of the settings required to use this function see the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM 04L41B01 05EN e Fora description of the login process of the setting measurement server see appendix 2 Setting Measurement Server e User Registration You can use the DX login function to register users There are two user levels administrator and user Administrator There are two types of connections that can be made to the DX setting measurement server connections to the setting function setting connection and connections to the monitoring function monitoring connections When you connect to the setting function as an administrator you can perfo
81. of instrument A when a value write operation is performed from the custom display Normal Communication input data Register of instrument A c05 400001 16 bit signed integer When a value write operation is performed from the custom display Communication input data Register of instrument A C05 400001 16 bit signed integer Command setting E M c05 C05 1 400001 INT16 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 61 gju u 7 U19473 24 BUISN IS 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function Checking the Modbus Operating Status Displaying the Modbus Operating Status Press DISP ENTER and select INFORMATION gt MODBUS CLIENT Note To display MODBUS CLIENT on the screen selection menu you need to change the setting using the menu customize function The operation is as follows Press MENU to switch to setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Menu customize gt Display menu 1 Select INFORMATION gt MODBUS CLIENT 2 Press the View soft key Communication condition MODBUS CLIENT Foe EN oo So E S EA aa Read cycle ris 7 Conect retry 14min Comm Data No Status First Last Server name Registers m 1R Good CO1 COS pobu danat ar 30001 2 W None 1 4 192 168 1 40001 3 W None 101 105 192 168 1 80 40010 a L re ister number g Host name or IP address of the server device DX channels TARUNA ODONDUNA b
82. recording memory sampling you cannot use this command Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Sets a trip line release number 2 or earlier SL pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Display group number p2 Trip line number 1 to 4 p3 Trip line display ON OFF p4 Display position 0 to 100 p5 Display color RED GREEN BLUE B VIOLET BROWN ORANGE Y GREEN LIGHTBLUE VIOLET GRAY LIME CYAN DARKBLUE YELLOW LIGHTGRAY PURPLE BLACK PINK L BROWN L GREEN DARKGRAY OLIVE DARKCYAN S GREEN p6 Line width 1 2 3 3 24 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands Query Example Description NX Syntax Query Example Description NL Syntax SL p1 p2 Display trip line 1 in red at the 10 position of group 1 Set the line width to 1 SL1 1 ON 10 RED 1 e Set the position as percentages of the entire amplitude axis in the waveform display area e Ifyou are using the multi batch feature BT2 this command affects batch group 1 e Ifyou are using the multi batch feature BT2 and batch group 1 is recording memory sampling you cannot use this command Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Sets a display group release number 3 or later NX pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Batch group number Set the number to 1 if multi batch BT2 is not in use p2 Display group number p3 Enable or disable ON or OFF p4 Display group name up to 16 characte
83. referring to the table in section 3 3 e The selectable range for p4 and p5 varies depending on the currently specified range e When the measurement range is set to scale the selectable range for p4 and p5 is 30000 to 30000 e Set input value p4 so that the value increases as break point p3 increases When p2 is set to END Syntax EH pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Type of operation END Example Set three break points for CH2 EH002 BEGIN 3 EHO02 SET 1 0 1 EHO02 SET 2 50 49 EHO02 SET 3 100 101 EH002 END Description e First use this command with p2 set to BEGIN to specify the number of break points e Then use this command with p2 set to SET to specify the value of each break point e Finally use this command with p2 set to END to finalize the settings The command EH2 causes the DX to return the CH2 settings e The DX returns the settings in the format shown in the above example e You cannot use this command when computation is in progress BD Sets an alarm delay On DXs without the AS1 Advanced Security Option Syntax BD pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Alarm delay 1 to 3600 3 32 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands Query BD p1 Example Set the channel 001 alarm delay to 120 s BD001 120 Description e Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e The p2 unit is seconds On DXs with the AS1 Advanced
84. s siiicar v Ethernet interface specifications cccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 6 1 event level switch StatUS cccccccceceesseeeeeeeeessseeeeeeess 4 32 execution mode execution modes switching externa INPUL datak s occa cores ersesvaste ceseestnayereeaeicersest neveaseues external input Channels ccecceeeeeteeeeeeneeeteceeeeeees F FIFO data FIFO data output TUNG MIS Esga a E TUL A T A A first last client channels first last master channel numbers ssssssessesesssessressnees 2 13 fixed P addiESSinisnninaanna aranan 1 14 ITE o E eee ea E E T TAA 4 3 4 34 VAS ee e r E EE EE 3 18 flowchart FIEOdala osori App 9 floW Of operato seiersen ena SE 1 11 format details FTP client setting of f FIP CiEnt hogia roris a a A FTP connection destination setting Of s eeseeeeereeeeee 1 50 FIP SENE innana FTP server setting of FTP HEST i FTP transfer testing 0f siacni nein ion sisiiintieasia FIP transfer files Setting Of ccceccsccieg sate arteeee 1 49 FUNG KOS b2svscenetieis cece etine NE v H MAM GASMAKIUNG asm smarenn oE header somna E E header SUM is sateen ces sates ca satsecncsptrsileesaczensensea conseeannthsnenernais hold Register 00 hold registers extended host name register NOSE ACCOUNG seoan RN host device COMMECHION 1O c eccscrsensereerecseeresceteeteners host information setting of
85. separate window Automatically refresh the screen Turn this ON to automatically refresh the screen Report M1 and PM1 options Display and prints reports Zoom Change the zoom rate of the screen DX1000 100 200 DX2000 75 100 Refresh Alarm sound OFF Auto Refresh ON Zoom Data list Print x Print page Print the DX screen by attaching a title and comment Data list Connect to the DX FTP server and download files from its internal memory and external medium Does not appear when the login function is being used DX screen image Refreshing the page The monitor page can be refreshed automatically or manually e Auto Refresh ON Refreshes the monitor page once approximately every 10 seconds e Auto Refresh OFF Does not automatically refresh the monitor page If is refreshed when you click Refresh You cannot refresh the page within approximately 10 seconds of the previous refreshing of the page even if you click Refresh Zoom Select the zoom factor from the list box to zoom into or out of the DX screen 1 32 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Sounding and Stopping Alarm Sounds When an alarm occurs on the DX the alarm sound popup window appears and an alarm is sounded The alarm can be sounded on a PC that can produce sound The popup blocking settings of your browser may prevent the alarm sound window from appearing ALARM SOUND Windows I
86. serial ALL 3 44 communication KE Performs key operations OSsb 3 44 BP Supports login AS1 advanced security option O 3 44 Dedicated Serial Communication Commands LL Logs in through serial communication AS1 ALL 3 44 advanced security option Operations are limited by the user privilege settings IM 04L41B01 17E 3 13 spuewwog el 3 2 AList of Commands Basic Setting Commands AS1 To apply settings that you have changed using the basic setting commands you need to save the settings using the YE command e The settings that are returned in response to a query in basic setting mode contain the new settings even if they are not saved However the new settings are not activated unless you save them e To configure login items use the following commands RN RP EK and EL Note The connection is closed when you execute the YE command Commands listed after the YE command are ignored Command Function Execution Setting Connection Monitor Page Name Mode Administrator User Connection WU Sets the environment B Yes No No 3 45 WE Sets calibration management B Yes No No 3 47 BI Configures signature settings B Yes No No 3 47 WwO Sets alarm and DO settings B Yes No No 3 48 WH Sets alarm hysteresis B Yes No No 3 48 XV Sets the s
87. switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Environment tab gt Communication gt POP3 Details Basic Setting Node POP3 Details POP Before SMTP Send delay second ay POP3 Login PLAIN Send delay seconds Enter the delay between a POPS server authentication and the transmission in the range of 0 to 10 seconds POP3 Login To encrypt the password when logging into the POP3 server select APOP To send it in plain text select PLAIN E mail Test Press FUNC and select E mail test gt Recipient1 or Recipient2 You can send a test e mail to check the e mail settings Starting Stopping the E mail Transmission Starting the e mail transmission Press FUNC and select E Mail START The e mail transmission function is enabled Stopping the e mail transmission Press FUNC and select E Mail STOP The e mail transmission function is disabled Unsent e mail messages are cleared E mail retransmission If the e mail transmission fails the message is retransmitted up to three times at 30 s 1 minute or 3 minute intervals If retransmission fails the e mail message is discarded IM 04L41B01 17E 1 21 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 4 Sending E mail Messages E mail Format The formats of alarm e mails scheduled e mails system e mails invalid user mails AS1 advanced security option report e mails and test e mails are given below For details on the co
88. that the Ethernet interface settings are correct For the procedure see section 1 3 Checking the results of the FTP test e When an FTP test is executed a test file named FTP_TEST TXT is transferred to the directory indicated by the initial path at the FTP destination specified in this section e The result of the FTP test can be confirmed by displaying the FTP log displayed on the DX see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual or Web screen see section 1 5 or by outputting the result using the FL command see section 3 4 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 51 aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Huish IS 1 8 Synchronizing the Time The DX time can be synchronized to the time on an SNTP server The DX can also function as an SNTP server Setting the SNTP Client Synchronize the DX time to the time on an SNTP server Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt SNTP client Basic Setting Node SNTP client settings Use Not Use Server name ntp daastation com Port number 123 Access interval 8h Access reference time 66 06 Access timeout 38s Time adjust on Start action Off Use Not e Use Not Select Use to use the SNTP client function Otherwise select Not If you select Use the SNTP client settings are displayed e SNTP server name Set the SNTP server name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Ifthe DNS is used yo
89. that the screen snapshot was executed 6 5 4 3 2 No Yes Indicates that the decimal position or unit information was changed during measurement 1 No Yes Indicates that the FIFO acquiring interval was changed with the FR command during measurement 0 No Yes Indicates that the internal process took too much time computation for example and that the measurement could not keep up at the specified scan interval The bits that have e for the flag column are not used The value is undefined 4 34 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 3 Output Format of Binary Data Special Data Values Block Member Name Binary Value Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Millisecond 0 to 999 Summer winter 0 Winter time 1 Summer time Type Channel 0x0 16 bit integer measurement channel external input channel 0x8 32 bit integer computation channel 1 to 48 101 to 160 or 201 to 440 Alarm status A1 Bit 0 to 3 A2 Bit 4 to 7 A3 Bit 0 to 3 A4 Bit 4 to 7 Measured data external input data 0to8 0 to OxFFFF Computed data 0 to OxFFFFFFFF A binary value 0 to 8 is entered in the upper and lower 4 bits of a byte 8 bits for the alarm status The binary values 0 to 8 correspond to H high limit alarm L low limit alarm h difference high limit alarm difference low limit alarm R high limit on rate of change al
90. the equation The computation channel 101 is assigned to Group1 e The measured value of channel 1 on the DX1000 server is transferred to the DX1000 client as an integer in the range of 20000 to 20000 e The DX1000 client displays the read data as 2 0000 to 2 0000 V using the computation channel 101 The following conversion is applied Value on the computation channel 101 of the DX1000 client Communication input data C01 x 0 0001 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 67 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Huisy IS 1 11 Usage Example of the Modbus Function Settings on the DX1000 Server Modbus Server Setting the Modbus Server Function Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Server gt Server modes Basic Setting Node Server FTP Not Web Use SNTP Not Modbus Use EtherNet IP Not Use Not Item Settings Modbus Use About the Port Number The port number is 502 by default Setting the Measurement Channel Press MENU to switch to setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Meas channel gt Range Alarm 2 11 35 39 ee O First CH GEIS Last CH Range Hode Range Span L _ Span_U Volt av 2 0000 2 6000 661 Alarm 1 off 2 off 3 off 4 off Input 1 il Item Settings First CH Last CH 1 Mode Volt Range 2V Span_L 2 0000 Span_U 2 0000 1 68 I
91. to 59 ffffff Requested operation SCREEN Screen change KEY Key operation MSG Message assignment write SEARCH View data by searching BATCH Batch switch eee Error code when executing the requested operation All spaces Success 001 to 999 Failure error code Parameter for each event see below e When ffffff SCREEN yy mo dd_hh mm ss ffffff eee ddddd_nnCRLF ddddd Screen type TREND Trend display DIGIT Digital display BAR Bar graph display HIST Historical trend display OV Overview display nn Group number 01 to 36 e When ffffff KEY yy mo dd_hh mm ss ffffff eee kkkkkCRLF kkkkk Type of key that was operated DISP DISP ENTER key UP Up key DOWN Down key LEFT Left key RIGHT Right key FAVOR Favorite key e When ffffff MSG yy mo dd_hh mm ss ffffff eee mmm mCRLF mmm m Message up to 32 characters 4 16 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data e When ffffff i EARCH yy mo dd_hh mm ss_ ffffff eee dddddCRLF Data search method ddddd TIME e When fffffft BATCH Time designation yy mo dd_hh mm ss ffffff eee nnCRLF Batch group number 00 to 12 nn Example EA 01 02 11 01 02 11 01 02 11 01 02 11 01 02 11 EN 12 12 12 12 12 20 30 31 40 00 01 to 12 Space 00 21 00 00 00 200 Batch overview mode screen Batch group number EN EEN 275 TREND 0
92. use and p1 is set to ALARM or MSG all other parameters are don t care All logged items are output when you omit p3 e Set parameter p3 by referring to the table in section 3 3 The setting p1 LOGIN is invalid on models with the AS1 advanced security option Fl Syntax Example Description Syntax Example The setting p1 SETTING is only valid on models with the AS1 advanced security option Outputs an operation log AS1 advanced security option FL pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl p2 p3 p4 Output format 0 Fixed length L Details attached User name You can specify multiple user names up to five by delimiting them with commas Operations You can specify multiple operations up to five by delimiting them with commas Specify operations by using the notation that is used in the operation log see appendix 1 in IM04L41B01 05EN Maximum number of items to output 1 to 100 Output up to 100 items from the log of User1 s operations FI 0 User1 100 Omitting p2 is the same as specifying all users If you specify more than five users for p2 users from the sixth user onwards are invalid If you enter five colons for p2 without specifying any user names users from the sixth user onwards are invalid Omitting p3 is the same as specifying all operations If you specify more than five items for p3 items from the sixth item onwards are invalid If you enter fiv
93. v ASCII character codes App 6 AS Cll Oates nnan iennratecr a 4 6 authenticated G2malll cccscvscsecricetscascccusevseercaneaseteatenmtness 1 19 authenticator nni ia ia i 1 78 authentication key 1 79 1 80 automatically assigning MW100 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 64 automatic transferring Of fileS 0 0 2 2 ceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 5 auto recover aiee a aera 2 12 AUTO refresh ON ssssiriseran a E E 1 32 B gt barcode dedicated commands cece 2 21 2 22 barde Mputa Dar ode readers he secreristcreseavtenesstasssereerenviercorcauerssnseneises basic setting commands basic setting commands AS f srnssrsinsiriiariia 3 14 basie setting MOQ einsnsisssirisas stee 3 4 3 9 basic settings Modbus client ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 1 56 basic settings Modbus master c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeteeees 2 12 basic specifications Dat ONO Sassena easiness dire EE REEE DAU TALE ce ccversetncantecnehs evesctaveneeceesteansne ines taweneeterees binary data binary data type binary footer binary ME AGSM ccncssiee lt sracinensenepscnceasacsnesees cendosceanseinadausneseedan binary GUU assirinassi anra sa ange bit structure block details block number C change settings log channel numbers zi GCHECKiGISK wis csvsavcesvetiudeceevevervicce cette wivinveetedsncstieeeriven R Client command NUMBER miserior a ara 1 57 command setting example cccscee
94. you are using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling TU Sets an event action When multi batch BT2 is not in use Syntax TU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 Pp7 Pp8 lt terminator gt pl Logic number 1 to 40 p2 Event type NONE REMOTE RELAY Alarm output relay SWITCH Internal switch ALARM Alarm TIMER Timer MATCHTIMETIMER Match time USERKEY USER key EVENTLEVELSWITCH Event level switch EVENTEDGESWITCH Event edge switch RELAY OFF Alarm output relay off SWITCH OFF Internal switch off ALARM OFF Alarm off EVENTLEVELSWITCH OFF Event level switch off p3 Event details p2 REMOTE Remote number p2 RELAY Relay number p2 RELAY OFF Relay number p2 SWITCH Internal switch number p2 SWITCH OFF Internal switch number p2 TIMER Timer number IM 04L41B01 17E 3 29 ainiin el 3 4 Setting Commands p2 MATCHTIMETIMER p7 Action details 4 Match time timer number p4 MESSAGE and p6 SELECT p2 EVENTLEVELSWITCH Display group number Event level switch number When multi batch BT2 is in use Syntax TU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 lt terminator gt p2 EVENTLEVELSWITCH OFF Event level switch numbe p2 EVENTEDGE SWITCH pl Same as when multi batch is not in use Event edge switch number i j p2 Same as when multi batch is not in use p2 0ther Space s R p3 Same as when multi batch is not in use p4 Action type r p4 Same as when multi batch is not in use MEMORYS
95. 0 0 0 to 400 0 0 to 4000 K 200 0 to1370 0 200 0 to1370 0 2000 to13700 RTD Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 10 0 to500 0 100 to 5000 DI LEVEL 0 tol 0 tol 0 tol IM 04L41B01 17E 3 3 Setup Parameters Measurement Range Parameters The table below shows the relationship between the input types and range parameters For a description of the selectable range see the DX1000 or DX2000 User s Manual Input Type Input Type Range Range Parameter Required Parameter Option DC Voltage VOLT 20 mV 20MV 60 mV 60MV 200 mV 200MV 2 V 2V 6 V 6V 20 V 20V 50 V 50V Thermocouple TC R R S S B B K E E J J N W W U U p vs Au7Fe KP N3 PLATINEL PLATI N3 PR40 20 PR N3 iNiMo NIMO N3 WRe WRE W WRe26 W WRE N3 TypeN AWG14 N2 N3 XK GOST XK N3 RTD RTD Pt PT JPt JPT PESO PT50 N3 Nil00 SAMA NI1 N3 Ni100 DIN NI2 N3 Ni120 NI3 N3 J263 B J263 N3 Cu53 u53 N3 Cu100 CU100 N3 Cul0 GE cul N1 Cul0 L amp N CU2 N1 Cul0 WEED CU3 N1 Cul0 BAILEY cu4 N1 Cul0 0 000392at20 Cus N1 Cul0 0 000393at20 CU6 N1 Cu25 0 00425at0 cu25 N1 Pt25 PT25 N3 Pt100 GOST Pt100G N3 Cul00 GOST Cul00G N3 Cu50 GOST Cu50G N3 Cul0 GOST Cul0G N3 Pt46 GOST Pt46G N3 Pt200W WEED Pt200W N3 Contact input DI Level LEVEL Cont CONT 1 5V voltage 1 5V 1 5V 1 5V IM 04L41B01 17E 3 17 spuewwoy
96. 007 01 0 10 10 10 GRA DISP M thour E Read cycle Is Connect retry 2min Comm Data No Status First Last Server name Registers READ Cnet 261 228 192 168 1 161 30081 1 66 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 11 Usage Example of the Modbus Function Explains the setting example for both Modbus client and server on DX1000s connected via the Ethernet This section refers to the DX1000 set to be a Modbus server as DX1000 server and the DX1000 set to be a Modbus client as DX1000 client System Configuration and Actions Uses the measurement channel computation channel and communication input data as described in the figure below Assumes other conditions are set properly I DX1000 Server Modbus server Server number 1 Command gt Measured data Measurement channel 1 Input range 2 0000 to 2 0000 V Modbus service port 502 by default Action Ethernet DX1000 Client Modbus client Reads a measured data from the server Displays the data using the computation channel M1 or PM1 option Communication input data C01 Y Computation channel 101 2 0000 to 2 0000V Y Start the computation Y Display the channel on Group 1 e The DX1000 client reads the measured value of channel 1 on the DX1000 server into the communication input data C01 C01 is displayed on a computation channel 101 by including the data in
97. 01 INTIE Inter block delay Off afw n 101 105 2 40010 INT32_6 Auto recovery 16min 4aort Off BOF aof aloft 125ms 258ms BLEUS is Next 1 2 1 8 9 16 Basic settings Read cycle Set the read cycle to 125ms 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s or 10s Timeout Set the timeout value to 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5s 10s or 1 min The timeout value is the maximum amount of time the DX waits for a response from the specified slave after the DX sends a command Retrials Set the number of retrials when there is no response from the slave Select Off 1 2 3 4 5 10 or 20 Inter block delay Set the amount of time the DX waits after receiving a response to send the next command Set the amount of time to Off 5 ms 10 ms 15 ms 45 ms or 100 ms Auto recovery Set the auto recovery time from communication halt Select Off 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min or 1h Command settings Master command number Select 1 8 or 9 16 for the command numbers to be configured Command type Set the transmitted command type to Off R R M W W M or E M R Read to the external input channel 16 bit signed integer type from the slave R M Read to the communication input data 32 bit floating point type from the slave W Write the measurement channel 16 bit signed integer type to the slave W M Write the measurement channel 32 bit signed integer type to the slave 2 12 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 6 Using the Modbus Master Functi
98. 01 to Q08 Flags DX1000 DX2000 F01 to F08 M1 PM1 Batch groups DX1000 DX2000 1 to the number of batch BT2 groups specified using the WU command Timers DX1000 DX2000 1to4 M1 PM1 1 to 12 Models with the BT2 M1 PM1 BT2 multi batch option Match time timers DX1000 DX2000 1to4 M1 PM1 1 to 12 Models with the BT2 M1 PM1 BT2 multi batch option Comment text fields DX1000 1 to 100 DX2000 1 to 200 Comment text blocks DX1000 1 to 50 DX2000 1 to 100 Report groups integral bar DX1000 1to4 M1 PM1 graph DX2000 1 to 6 Annunciator display DX1000 1 to 24 windows DX2000 1 to 80 High speed input models DX1002 DX1004 DX1002N DX1004N DX2004 DX2008 Medium speed input models DX1006 DX1012 DX1006N DX1012N DX2010 DX2020 DX2030 DX2040 DX2048 Multi batch is an option BT2 option for DXs with release number 3 or later 3 18 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands 3 4 Setting Commands SR Sets a input range When Setting Channels to Skip Syntax Query Example SR pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Setting type SKIP SR p1 Skip channel 001 SR001 SKIP Description e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling or computation is in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling e Channels set to SKIP are not measured e Set p1 by referring to the table in sec
99. 0142 080102 004127H DAR Description Parameter p3 is valid when p1 is set to GET or SIZE 3 9 Output Commands RS 422 485 Dedicated Commands ESC O Syntax Example Description ESC C Syntax Example Description Opens an instrument ESC in ASCII code is 1BH For details see appendix 3 ESC O pl lt terminator gt p1 Instrument address 01 to 99 Open the instrument at address 99 and enable all commands ESC 099 Specifies the address of the instrument that you want to communicate with e You can only open one instrument at any given time e If you execute ESC O any instrument that is already open is automatically closed e When the DX receives this command successfully the DX returns ESC O e Normally the terminator can be CR LF or LF for communication commands However you must terminate this command with CR LF Closes an instrument ESC in ASCII code is 1BH For details see appendix 3 ESC C pl lt terminator gt p1 Instrument address 01 to 99 Close the device whose address is 77 ESC C77 e This command closes the connection to the instrument you are communicating with e When the DX receives this command successfully the DX returns ESC C e Normally the terminator can be CR LF or LF for communication commands However you must terminate this command with CR LF 3 64 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 10 Output Commands
100. 060 Bit string External input ch Measured data 304001 to 304240 16 bit signed integer Alarm status 305001 to 305240 Bit string Measurement ch _ Alarm list 306001 to 306012 Bit string Computation ch _ Alarm list 306021 to 306035 Bit string External input ch Alarm list 306041 to 306100 Bit string Time 309001 to 309008 16 bit signed integer Read Data Hold register Number Data type Communication input data 400001 to 400060 16 bit signed integer 400301 to 400420 32 bit floating point Measured data on external input ch 401001 to 401240 16 bit signed integer Write in Read On Models with the PROFIBUS DP Interface CP1 option On models with the PROFIBUS DP interface CP1 option the communication input data for C01 to C24 on the DX1000 or for C01 to C32 on the DX2000 is reserved for PROFIBUS DP The client device cannot write values to this communication input data IM 04L41B01 17E 6 7 suonesyioeds al 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Input Register shared with the Modbus slave function Common Items e The client device can only read the input registers e Decimal position and unit are not included Specify them on the client device e External input channels are DX2000 option MC1 Details Input Register Data Data Type 300001 Measured data of measurement channel 00
101. 1 BAR UP RIGHT Hello Hello IM 04L41B01 17E 4 17 sasuodsay a 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data E mail Log The FL command is used to output the data e The e mail transmission log is output Up to 50 operations are retained Logs that exceed 50 are cleared from the oldest data e Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss ffffff eee n uuu uCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 ffffff E mail type ALARM Alarm mail TIME Scheduled mail REPORT Report timeout mail FAIL Power failure recovery mail FULL Memory full mail TEST Test mail ERROR Error message mail PASSWD Invalid user mail eee Error code All spaces Success 001 to 999 Error code n Recipient list 1 List 1 2 List2 List 1 and list 2 uuu u_ Series of recipient e mail addresses up to 30 characters Space e Example When list 1 is user1 daqstation com user2 daqmaster com and list 2 is adv1 daqmaster com adv2 daqstation com EA 01 05 11 12 20 00 ALARM userl user2 advl adv2 01 05 11 12 30 00 REPORT 375 1 userl user2 EN 4 18 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data SNTP Log e The FL command is used to output the data e The SNTP log is output Up to 50 accesses to the SNTP server are retained e Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_ nnn_xxxxxxxxxxCRLF
102. 1 12 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 2 A List of Commands Setting Commands AS1 To apply settings that you have changed using the setting commands you need to save the settings using the BE command Command Function Execution Setting Connection Monitor Page Name Mode Administrator User Connection SR Sets an input range S Yes No No 3 19 SO Sets a computing equation S Yes No No 3 20 ER Sets the range of an external input channel S Yes No No 3 20 TJ Sets memory sampling S Yes No No 3 21 SA Sets an alarm Ss Yes No No 3 21 SW Sets the trend interval and auto save interval S Yes No No 3 22 TI Sets the circular display offset time S Yes No No 3 22 TO Sets how the DX operates after one circular S Yes No No 3 23 display cycle TW Sets the secondary trend interval S Yes No No 3 23 TM Sets manual sampling S Yes No No 3 23 TE Sets sampling conditions for event data S Yes No No 3 23 SZ Sets a zone S Yes No No 3 23 SP Sets a partial expanded display S Yes No No 3 24 ST Sets a tag S Yes No No 3 24 SX Sets a display group release number 2 or S Yes No No 3 24 earlier SL Sets a trip line release number 2 or earlier S Yes No No 3 24 NX Sets a display group release number 3 or later S Yes No No 3 25 NL Sets a trip line release number 3 or later S Yes No No 3 25 SG Sets a message S Yes No No
103. 1 16 bit signed integer l 300048 Measured data of measurement channel 048 There is no decimal position information 301001 Alarm status of measurement channel 001 Bit string 301048 Alarm status of measurement channel 048 e Register structure and alarm status values 2 14 o o o 3 Alarm level 4 bits 4 bits 4 bits 4bits lt Alarm status 4 bits value Meaning No alarm High limit alarm Low limit alarm Difference high limit alarm Difference low limit alarm High limit on rate of change alarm Low limit on rate of change alarm Delay high limit alarm Delay low limit alarm SINITA olrm o 302001 Lower bytes of the computed data of computation channel 101 32 bit signed integer 302002 Higher bytes of the computed data of computation channel 101 302119 Lower bytes of the computed data of computation channel 160 302120 Higher bytes of the computed data of computation channel 160 e Register structure Example Channel 101 Register 302001 Register 302002 a Higher bytes Lower bytes c T oia There is no decimal position information 303001 Alarm status of computation channel 101 Bit string l 303060 Alarm status of computation channel 160 e Register structure and alarm status values Same as the alarm status of the measurement channels 304001 Measured data of external input channel 20
104. 1 16 bit signed integer l 304240 Measured data of external input channel 440 There is no decimal position information 305001 Alarm status of external input channel 201 Bit string 305240 Alarm status of external input channel 440 e Register structure and alarm status values Same as the alarm status of the measurement channels 6 8 IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Input Register Data Data Type 306001 List of alarms of measurement channels 001 to 004 Bit string 306012 List of alarms of measurement channels 045 to 048 e Register structure Level 2 rLevel 1 Level 3 Level 4 ai 4ch 3ch 2ch 1ch Indicates the alarm status of four channels in one register Set to 1 when alarm is activated The figure is an example of register 306001 measurement channels 001 to 004 306021 306035 List of alarms of computation channels 101 to 104 List of alarms of computation channels 157 to 160 Bit string e Register structure Same as the list of alarms of measurement channels 306041 306100 List of alarms of external input channels 201 to 204 List of alarms of external input channels 437 to 440 Bit string e Register structure Same as the list of alarms of measurement channels Input registers 306001 to 306100 can be accessed consecutively All unassigned register bits are read as zeroes Input Register Data Data Ty
105. 1 command and 1 log for 1 response Input Output gt Input lt Output Message up to 20 characters e The communication log contains only the error number and not the error message section e Normally the transfer data are transmitted as they are but in some cases a special message is output The special messages are shown below Reception Over length Command length exceeded Over number Number of commands exceeded Serial error Received an error character through serial communications 4 10 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Transmission ddd byte Login Logout Time out El nnn E2 ee nnn Space Advanced security AS1 option e The parameters of commands whose parameters include the user password EK EL EJ and LL are not output Disconnected Data output where ddd is the number of data values Login Logout Forced disconnection occurs when the connection was disconnected when transmitting data using Ethernet Timeout keepalive TCP retransmission etc Single negative response where nnn is the error number Multiple negative response where ee is the error position and nnn is the error number sasuodsay a e Commands performed through the barcode protocol are not logged in the communication log operations performed through the barcode protocol are logged in the operation log e Example The following example show
106. 1 on the DX1000 slave is transferred to the DX1000 master as an integer in the range of 20000 to 20000 e The DX1000 master displays the read data as 2 0000 to 2 0000 V on the computation channel 101 The following conversion is applied Value on the computation channel 101 of the DX master Communication input data C01 x 0 0001 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 15 eu zu jenas y Buisp 2 7 Usage Example of the Modbus Function Settings on the DX1000 Slave Modbus Slave Setting the Modbus Slave Function Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Serial gt Basic settings Basic Setting Node Serial Baud rate 9600 bps Data length 8 bit Parity Even Handshaking Off OFF Address 1 Protocol Normal Modbus Modbus Item Settings Address 1 Protocol Modbus Setting the Measurement Channel Press MENU to switch to setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Meas channel gt Range Alarm First CH GEIS Last CH 661 Range Hode Range Span L _ Span_U Volt 2V 2 0000 2 6008 Alarm 1 off 2 off 3 off 4 off Input 1 l Item Settings First CH Last CH 1 Mode Volt Range 2V Span_L 2 0000 Span_U 2 0000 2 16 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 7 Usage Example of the Modbus Function Setting the DX1000 Master Modbus Master Assumes the settings other than those
107. 1 option e The data type of computed values is signed 32 bit integer DX1000 DX2000 Computation channel type Number 101 to 124 DX1000 101 to 160 DX2000 gt Data type 32 bit signed integer write W M Server Register Data type 40001 to 49999 INT 16 UINT 16 400001 to 465536 INT 32_B INT 32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L When the Data Type of the Write Destination Server Is Identical INT32_B or INT32_L The values can be written directly including special data See Special Data Values in section 4 3 Perform data processing on the slave device When the Data Type of the Write Destination Server Is Different INT16 or UINT16 INT16 A value in the range of 32768 to 32767 excluding the decimal point can be written If lower than 32768 the value reverts to 32768 and if higher than 32767 it reverts to 32767 UINT16 A value in the range of 0 to 65535 excluding the decimal point can be written If lower than 0 the value reverts to 0 and if higher than 65535 it reverts to 65535 Computed value Data type of the write destination INT16 UINT16 More than 32767 32767 32768 to 32767 32768 to 32767 Less than 32767 32768 More than 65535 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 Less than 0 0 Special values Computed value Data type of the write destination INT16 UINT16 Over 32767 Burnout Up 65535 O
108. 1006 DX1012 DX2010 DX2020 240 intervals 30 s at the fastest acquisition interval of DX2030 DX2040 and DX2048 125 ms Models with the external channel input 60 intervals 60 s at the fastest acquisition interval of option 1s IM 04L41B01 17E App 9 xipueddy E Index Index Symbol COMMANG TESPONSE rnnr neninn idr SEE N 4 1 command NAME sissie Leer svccsinseececeassvestecoutevieevesseaccienegeess 3 1 1 5V voltage SERVERS ANNDAN SARNE ANRE ARPAN AA SNEEN OAREN 3 17 commands 2 20 VBASE Tersisa aarue O Tra E E EEEa 6 3 ee accessing data files from the web browset 0006 1 46 ACCESS TIMEOUb aiiiar an t iria 1 52 active alaf MS iss scesesseedscaececivec sess cveetecserseaeviernecnssustersicesser neds 1 19 addres Si arreoa ne a n eE AEE EE OE E A AASS 2 13 admin wee 1 72 1 77 administrator sie 1 6 1 7 3 10 advanced security function cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 3 9 advanced security OptlOM sssi issnin 1 7 1 72 6 1 affirmative response alarm notification emaili nissin 1 22 alarm settings ail ccccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeteeeeeeeeeeee 1 19 ALARM SOUN ds cessesscctesetisieneensstianablinndsnrasiaiabrnetnevedss alarm SUMMARY vices secitecceeziss neces teesseec E all channel display annunciator display WINdOWS sssri rinasa 3 18 applicatiomtime oUt srren E 1 3 application timeout setting of 1 17 aMOW KOV S aao eO eaae EEO a e ea R E EN
109. 12H 13H 14H 15H 16H 17H 18H 19H 20H 21H 22H 23H TI pl Set the offset time to 1 hour TI1 1H Set the offset time to a value that is lower than the time length of one cycle set by the SW command 3 22 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands ic Syntax Query Example Iw _ Syntax Query Example Description Syntax Query Example Description TE Syntax Sets how the DX operates after one circular display cycle TO pl lt terminator gt pl Operation after one cycle ALLCLEAR Clears the entire waveform display and starts drawing a new waveform DIVCLEAR Clears a section of the waveform display and starts drawing a new waveform TO Set the operation after one cycle to all clear TOALLCLEAR Sets the secondary trend interval TW pl lt terminator gt p1 Trend interval 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 4H 10H TW Set the interval to 2 minutes TW2MIN Set the trend interval p1 to a value less than the scan interval e You can only set the trend interval p3 to 5S and 10S for high speed input models DX1002 DX1002N DX1004 DX1004N DX2004 and DX2008 e You can only set the trend interval p3 on medium speed models to 15S if fast sampling mode is enabled e You cannot use this command when multi batch BT2 is enabled Sets manual sampling TM pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Manual sample number p2 Enable or disa
110. 2 Event edge switch 18 vent edge switch 19 vent edge switch 20 vent edge switch 21 vent edge switch 22 vent edge switch 23 vent edge switch 24 vent edge switch 25 10730 Event edge switch 26 10731 __ Event edge switch 27_ Execute event edge switch 1 fixed I 10732 __ Event edge switch 28 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed I 10733 10734 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed z z z 10723 10724 10725 10726 10727 10728 10729 ZIZIZ zZ Zz zZz Z Z Z i o 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Description Supplementary Information Type Simultaneous Access 410765 _ Eventlevel switch 1 _ OFF 0 ON 1 o one few 410766 _ Event level switch2 _ OFF 0 ON 1 Ne fow 410767 __ Event level switch 3 OFF 0 ON 4 Nne fow O 410768 _ Event level switch4_ _ OFF 0 ON 1 Ne fow O 410765 Event level switch _ OFF 0 ON 1 Nme faw O 410770 __ Eventlevel switch6 _ OFF 0 ON 1 INT RW 410771 _ Eventlevel switch7 _ OFF 0 0N 4 INT RW 410772 __ Eventlevel switch 8 OFF 0 ON 1 INT RW O 410773 Eventlevel switch9 OFF 0 ON 4 INTRA 410774 Eventlevel switch 10 OFF 0 ON 4 INT RW 410775 __ Eventlevel switch 11_ OFF 0 ON 4 ne RW 410776 _ Event level switch 12 OFF 0 ON 4 Nme faw O 410777 __ Event level switch 13 _ OFF 0 ON 1 INT faw O 410778 __ Eventlevel switch 14 OFF 0 ON 4 INT RW 410779 Event level switch 15 _ OFF 0 ON 1 INT RW 410780 _ Event level switch 16 __ OFF 0 ON 1 Ne f
111. 2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt p1 Computation channel number p2 Computation ON OFF p3 Computing equation up to 120 characters p4 Span lower limit 9999999 to 99999999 p5 Span upper limit 9999999 to 99999999 p6 Span decimal place 0 to 4 p7 Unit up to 6 characters SO p1 Compute the sum of channels 001 and 002 using channel 106 Set the span lower limit to 10 0000 the span upper limit to 15 0000 and the unit to V 0106 ON 001 002 100000 150000 4 V You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling or computation is in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling For details on computing equations see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 For parameters p4 and p5 enter values with seven digits or less excluding the decimal for negative numbers and with eight digits or less for positive numbers For parameters p4 p5 and p6 either set all three parameters or omit all three parameters Sets the range of an external input channel ER pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt p1 External input channel number p2 External input channel ON OFF p3 Span lower limit 30000 to 30000 p4 Span upper limit 30000 to 30000 p5 Decimal place 0 to 4 p6 Unit u
112. 3 25 TH Sets the directory on the external storage Ss Yes No No 3 25 medium for saving data TZ Sets a file header S Yes No No 3 26 TF Sets a data file name S Yes No No 3 26 SD Sets the date and time OSs Yes No No 3 26 TD Sets daylight saving time S Yes No No 3 26 TT Sets the trend display S Yes No No 3 26 SE Sets the line width and the number of grids to S Yes No No 3 27 use on the trend graph TB Sets the bar graph display S Yes No No 3 27 SB Sets the bar graph for a channel S Yes No No 3 27 TN Sets a scale S Yes No No 3 27 SV Sets a measurement channel s moving average S Yes No No 3 27 SC Sets a channel display color S Yes No No 3 27 TA Sets an alarm point mark S Yes No No 3 27 TG Sets a color scale band S Yes No No 3 28 SQ Sets the LCD brightness and the screen S Yes No No 3 28 backlight saver TC Sets the background color S Yes No No 3 28 TP Sets automatic display group switching S Yes No No 3 28 NF Sets the favorite key operation S Yes No No 3 28 TR Sets the automatic switching back to default S Yes No No 3 28 display TQ Sets a timer S Yes No No 3 28 TK Sets a match time timer S Yes No No 3 29 TU Sets an event action S Yes No No 3 29 SK Sets a constant S Yes No No 3 31 SI Sets the rolling average function of a S Yes No No 3 31 computation channel SJ Sets a TLOG timer S Yes No No 3 31 TX Sets the ancillary operation of the start key S Yes No No 3 32 BH Sets a batch text field S Yes No No 3 32 EH Sets calibration correction Ss Yes No No
113. 39999 INT 16 UINT 16 300001 to 365536 INT 32_B INT 32_L C01 to C60 DX2000 Data type 32 bit floating point 40001 0 49999 UINT 32_B UINT 32_L Read 490001 to 465536 FLOAT_B FLOAT_L When the Data Type of the Read Source Server Is Not Floating Point Type Because the data type of the communication input data is 32 bit floating point the value never overflows However if the absolute value of the data is large for INT32_B IN T32_L UINT32_B or UINT32_L a rounding error may appear This is because the mantissa of the floating point type is 24 bits IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications e Writing the Measured Values of the Measurement Channels e Writes the measured values of the measurement channels to the server registers e The data type of measured values is signed 16 bit integer e The values can be written directly including special data See Special Data Values in section 4 3 Perform data processing on the slave device DX1000 DX2000 Command Measurement channel Number 001 to 012 DX1000 001 to 048 DX2000 gt Data type 16 bit signed integer Write Server Register Data type 40001 to 49999 INT 16 400001 to 465536 FLOAT_B FLOAT_L Writing the Computed Values of the Computation Channels e Writes the computed values of the computation channels to the server registers e The computation function is an option M1 PM
114. 4 and DX2008 You can only set the trend interval p3 on medium speed models to 15S if fast sampling mode is enabled Set the trend interval p3 to a value less than the scan interval The p4 setting is valid when the saving method to the external storage medium is set to auto using the XM command with p1 set to AUTO Circular Display Query Example Description Tl Syntax Query Example Description pl 1 p2 Waveform type CIRCULAR p3 Time length of one cycle 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 6H 8H 12H 16H 1DAY 2DAY 1WEEK 2WEEK 4WEEk p4 Auto save interval 10MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 1DAY 2DAY 3DAY 5DAY 7DAY 10DAY 14DAY 31DAY SW Set the waveform type to CIRCULAR the time length of one cycle to 20 minutes and the auto save interval to 1 hour SW1 CIRCULAR 20MIN 1H You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling in progress The selectable auto save intervals p4 vary depending on the time length of one cycle p3 For details see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual The p4 setting is valid when the saving method to the external storage medium is set to auto using the XM command with p1 set to AUTO Set the time length of one cycle p3 to a value less than the scan interval Sets the circular display offset time TI pl p2 lt terminator gt pl 1 p2 Offset time OFF 1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 6H 7H 8H 9H 10H 11H
115. 410250 410251 to 410252 Reserved batch 5 Batch 6 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 410253 to 410270 Batch 6 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less 410271 to 410300 410301 to 410302 Reserved batch 6 Batch 7 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 INT32_L STR36 410303 to Batch 7 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less Reserved batch 7 Batch 8 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 INT32_L STR36 Batch 8 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less Reserved batch 8 INT32_L STR36 INT32_L STR36 IM 04L41B01 17E 6 13 suonesyioeds l 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Description Supplementary Information Batch 9 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 Batch 9 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less Reserved batch 9 Batch 10 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 Batch 10 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less Reserved batch 10 Batch 11 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 Batch 11 bat
116. 4551670EH 1 3 734930EH01 4 049394E 2 3 597750E 1 5 325290EH 1 4 208800E 01 3 964047 E102 3 023500EH 1 Please enter comments e Printing a Report Title You can edit the report title Click within the report title box and edit the text using up to 64 characters The title that you enter here does not affect the DX setting Comment You can enter two lines of comments in the comment text field Click within the comment text field and enter text Print Print the report from the browser Data list Release number 3 or later You can easily retrieve files via FTP using the data list link without having to specify the URL For operating instructions see section 1 6 a Data list Microsoft Internet Explorer Data list Memory Media 1 42 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Printing the Screen Release number 3 or later You can print a screen capture with an optional title and comment attached m Title box The default title is the IP address or host name You can overwrite the default title with your own title bdv001 0m9955 i2 2 0 wilissilisi Imin di Please enter comments Print button Comment input box Enter comments You can enter more than five lines of comments but only the first five lines will be printed Opens the print window Click Print to open the Print window
117. 51 spaces are entered If this is a directory the characters lt DIR gt are shown at the position displaying the file data size n Batch group number 0 A to H J to M 0 No multi batch Ato H Batch group number 1 to 8 J to M Batch group number 9 to 12 oo ae Data serial number 16 digit hexadecimal Space The and directories are not output The batch group number and data serial number are included only for files in the internal memory DATA directory For all other files the numbers are empty e Example 1 File list output of an external storage medium EA 05 02 24 20 07 12 1204 setting pnl 05 02 24 20 18 36 lt DIR gt DATAO EN e Example 2 Output of a file list in the DATA directory in the internal memory EA 05 02 24 20 07 12 1204 006607 050101 000402 DAD 0 1ABCDE123 05 02 24 20 07 12 1204 006608 050101 000403 DAD 0 1234567890123456 EN 4 28 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Check Disk The ME command is used to output the free space on the storage medium e Syntax EACRLF zzz Kbyte freeCRLF ENCRLF zzz Free space on the storage medium 16 digits Space e Example EA 12345678 Kbyte free EN IM 04L41B01 17E 4 29 sasuodsay gt 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Manual Sampled Report Data Information The MO command is used to output the data e Syntax EACRLF slll _yy mo dd_hh mm ss bbbb fff CRLF ENCRLF s Data flag Space Confirmed d
118. 59 28 2008 12 06 16 58 30 2008 12 06 16 58 27 All Channel Display Click All Channels to display the measured values and alarm status of all channels Click Refresh to update the data e Based on the DX settings the Channel column displays channel numbers tag comments or tag numbers and tag comments e Alarms are displayed using the specified alarm colors e If you are using the annunciator function the alarm display is based on the annunciator sequence However the indicators do not blink e Channels are not displayed in batch groups even if you are using the multi batch function BT2 option All channel display example Refresh Close Creation date 2008 12 02 13 29 32 arm status ABC 1 0 6014 aBC I aca ABC 4 m IM 04L41B01 17E 1 37 99eJ 19 U z U19477 Oy Huish IS 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Log Displays the message summary error log FTP log login log Web operation log e mail log SNTP log Modbus log operation log and change settings log in a separate window From the Log list box select the log you want to display Click Refresh to update the data 1 You can display up to 100 messages and up to 50 added messages 2 Only on DXs without the AS1 advanced security option 3 Only on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Up to 100 operation log items can be displayed Message summary example when the multi batch
119. 999 excluding the decimal point Set using an integer e External input channels 30000 to 30000 An error occurs if p7 is set to a number of a relay that is not installed e You can specify computation channels on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e For computation channels and external input channels the only alarm types that you can specify are H high limit alarm L low limit alarm T delay high limit alarm and t delay low limit alarm e For computation channels the alarm hysteresis is fixed at zero Use the XA command to set the alarm hysteresis SW Sets the trend interval and auto save interval Syntax SW pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt T Y Display pl 1 p2 Waveform type specify T Y p3 Trend interval 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 4H 10H p4 Auto save interval 10MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 1DAY 2DAY 3DAY 5DAY 7DAY 10DAY 14DAY 31DAY Query SW Description e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling The selectable auto save intervals p4 vary depending on the trend interval p3 For details see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual e You can only set the trend interval p3 to 5S and 10S for high speed input models DX1002 DX1002N DX1004 DX1004N DX200
120. Commands Available when using the maintenance test server function via Ethernet communications Command Function Administrator User Page Name close Closes another device s connection Yes No 3 65 con Outputs connection information Yes Yes 3 65 eth Outputs Ethernet statistics Yes Yes 3 65 help Outputs help Yes Yes 3 66 net Outputs network statistics Yes Yes 3 66 quit Closes the connection to the instrument that you are operating Yes Yes 3 66 Instrument Information Output Commands Available when using the instrument information server function via Ethernet communications Parameter Function Page Name serial Outputs the serial number 3 67 host Outputs the host name 3 67 ip Outputs the IP address 3 67 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 2 A List of Commands When the AS1 Advanced Security Option Is in Use DX Execution Modes The DX has five execution modes The modes that each command can be executed in are predetermined Trying to execute a command in the wrong mode results in a syntax error Before executing a command use a mode switching command to switch to the appropriate mode Queries can be executed in any mode The letters in parentheses in the titles below are the used to represent the different modes in explanations e Basic Setting Mode B Basic setting mode when recording is stopped e Basic Setting Mode during Memory Sampling b The basic setting mode that appears during recording e Setting Mode S Setting mod
121. E Appendix 4 Output Flow of the File or the File List on the External Storage Medium and Internal Memory Example in Which the File List Is Output 10 Files at a Time The figure below shows the flow in which the file list in the DATAO directory of the external storage medium is output 10 files at a time Command to send START Command description Received response data Send the command oe Output command for the first file list n i MEDIR DRVO DATAO 10 Specify the number of file lists to be output whe issuing this command ASCII see section 4 2 a EA l o EE File list settee l EN l NO When the number of output file lists is smaller than the maximum number of file lists specified by the ME DIR command 10 in this example one can conclude that there are no more file lists Are there more file lists Send the command Output the MEDIRNEXT oo subsequent file lists ASCII see section 4 2 l EA I l aes H File list DJ eee l l EN l J App 8 IM 04L41B01 17E Appendix 5 Flow Chart of the FIFO Data Output Overview of the FIFO Buffer The DX has a dedicated internal memory for outputting measured computed data This memory is structured as a FIFO First In First Out Measured computed data are constantly acquired to the internal memory
122. E No ME 33 Setup data file File PEL No ME FEA 34 Change settings log file File TXT ME 35 Report file for a report template File xm1 ME 1 Advanced security AS1 option 2 Release numbers 4 and later Yes Disclosed No Undisclosed Common format The table above shows the different types of binary data Binary data comes in two types data and file e Data Measured computed data can be output using the FD command FIFO data can be output using the FF command The data format is disclosed See section 4 3 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 3 sasuodsay 4 1 Response Syntax e File e Display data event data and setup data files can be used on the DXA120 DAQSTANDARD Software that comes with the package For details see the user s manuals of the DXA120 DAQSTANDARD IM04L41B01 63EN and IM04L41B01 64EN e Files that are in common formats can be opened using software programs that are sold commercially e Other formats are written in ASCII code A text editor can be used to open these types of files Calculating the Sum Value If you set the parameter of the CS command to 1 enabled the checksum value is output only during serial communications The check sum is the same as that used in the TCP IP and is derived according to the following algorithm Buffer on Which the Sum Value Is Calculated e For the header sum it is calculated from data length flag identifier fixed to 6
123. ER key 1 16 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 3 Connecting the DX Setting the Communication Status Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Keep alive Timeout Keep alive Application time out On Off On Time 1 min On Off Setting the keepalive To disconnect when there is no response to the test packets that are periodically sent select On Otherwise select Off Setting the application timeout e Selecting On Off To use the application timeout function select On Otherwise select Off If you select On a timeout item is displayed Time Set the timeout value between 1 and 120 minutes Checking the communication status The Ethernet communication status can be confirmed with the LED lamp that is provided on the Ethernet connector on the DX rear panel or the Ethernet link that is shown at the upper right of the basic setting screen IM 04L41B01 17E aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 4 Sending E mail Messages Settings for Sending E mail Set the server configuration and the contents of the e mail transmission Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt E Mail Basic settings Recipients Basic Setting Node Basic Setting Mode Cine Recipients Basic settings SHTP server nam
124. Err The response data from the slave device is broken communication error Space The detail code is not displayed until the status is confirmed when communication is started Resuming Command Transmission You can use the front panel keys to resume command transmission to a slave device to which communication is stopped red status lamp 1 Using the up and down arrow keys select the command corresponding to the slave device to which transmission will be resumed The message Push right arrow key to refresh appears 2 Press the right arrow key The DX starts command transmission to the specified slave Data When Communication Is Stopped and during Connection Retrials For Modbus master the communication input data and external input channel data are held at the previous values while the command is being retried If the command transmission stops such as due to a connection drop the status turns red and the communication input data and external input channel data are error data On communication channels tOVER or OVER is displayed according to the DX settings is displayed on external input channels Data Dropout Data drop occurs when the commands from 1 to 16 do not complete within the read cycle see appendix 1 When a data dropout occurs the communication input data is held at the previous value A message indicating the data dropout is also displayed on the Modbus status display If this happens take
125. FTP Use Web Use SNTP Hodbus Not EtherNet IP Not Use Not SNTP For the SNTP item under Server select Use or Not don t use When an SNTP client on the network queries the time information to the DX the DX sends the time information Port Number The default value is 123 To change the setting Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Environment tab gt Communication gt Service port For the selectable range of port numbers see section 6 1 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 53 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 9 Using the Modbus Server Function The DX is used as a Modbus server For the Modbus specifications see section 6 3 Setting the Modbus Server Carry out the steps below to enable another device to read the DX data or write data to the DX using Modbus Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Server gt Server modes Server FTP Use Web Use SNTP Modbus Not EtherNet IP Not Use Not e Modbus For the Modbus item under Server select Use or Not don t use Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Server gt Allowed Modbus clients Hodbus client connect limits Use Not Client number 1 On Off
126. LEAR ALL All screens Clears all files in the save destination directory and then saves all of the custom display a cold reset AS1 advanced security option Syntax EC pl lt terminator gt p1 The types of data to be initialized and cleared 0 to 3 0 Basic setting mode settings setting mode settings measured and computed data custom screens that is currently in use to that directory display screen setup data and log SELSECTA specific screen aata a Clear 1 on the DX Saves a specific custom display 1 Setting mode settings measured screen to a file that you specify If there is a file with the same name it is overwritten and computed data custom display screen setup data and log When p2 is set to ALL aata i p3 Name of the directory to save to up to 20 Clear 2 on the DX 2 Measured and computed data When p2 is set to SELECT custom display screen setup data p3 Custom display screen to save andl g data INTERNAL1 to INTERNAL 3 EXTERNAL1 Ceara ONERA to EXTERNAL 25 3 Basic setting mode settings p4 Name ofthe file to save to up to 32 except for login settings setting Do not specify the extension mode settings measured and e The directory to save to is fixed to the root directory computed data custom display screen setup data and log data Clear 4 on the DX Example Perform Clear 1 on the DX ECO IM 04L41B01 17E 3 43 ainiin eo 3 5 Control Commands
127. LF used in this section denotes carriage return line feed IM 04L41B01 17E 4 33 sasuodsay a 4 3 Output Format of Binary Data Measured Computed Data and FIFO Data The FD command is used to output the measured computed data e The FF command is used to output the FIFO data e You can use the CB command to specify whether to output the data of measurement channels set to skip and computation or external input channels set to OFF The ID number of the output format is 1 See ID in section 4 1 2 byte 2 byte gt lt gt lt Number of blocks Number of bytes Block 1 Binary data l The binary data section on the Conceptual diagram in Block n section 4 1 fo LL Number of Blocks This is the number of blocks Number of Bytes This is the size of one block in bytes Block gt lt 1 byte 1 byte 1byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte lt gt lt lt gt lt gt lt lt 2 bytes gt 1 byte she byte Summer winter Type Channel A2A1 A4A3 Measured data Type Channel A2A1 A4A3 Computed data Type Channel A2A1 A4A3 External input data lt lt 4 bits 12 bits e Flag The meaning of the each flag is given in the table below The flags are valid during FIFO data output The flags are undefined for other cases Bit Flag Meaning of the Flag 0 1 7 No Yes Indicates
128. M 04L41B01 17E 1 11 Usage Example of the Modbus Function Setting the DX1000 Client Modbus Client Assumes the settings other than that for the server and the command are left to default values Registering the Destination Server Register the DX1000 server to number 1 The IP address of the DX1000 server is 190 168 1 101 as an example Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Modbus client gt Modbus server settings Basic Setting Node Server number Port Hodbus server name Unit 562 192 168 1 161 Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto osanna wne af ajajajaja aa S MININ NM MO PM a nN Auto 1 8 9 16 Item Settings Port 502 Modbus server name 192 168 1 101 Unit Auto Setting Command Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Modbus client gt Command settings Basic Setting Node Client command number First Last Server Regi Type ifrR n cai co1 1 30001 INT16 ort aloft aloft Off BOF Toft aloft Item Settings Command type R M First and Last c01 Server 1 Regi 30001 Type INT16 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 69 eju u 7 U19473 24 BUISN E 1 11 Usage Example of th
129. M 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Operation Error Log The FL command is used to output the data The operation error log is output Up to 50 operation error logs are retained Logs that exceed 50 are cleared from the oldest data Other communication messages 400 to 999 and status messages 500 to 599 are not output For the meanings of the error codes see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_nnn_uuu uCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 nnn Error code 001 to 999 uuu u_ Error message _ Space Example EA 99 05 11 12 20 00 212 Range setting error 99 05 11 12 30 00 217 Media access error EN IM 04L41B01 17E 4 13 sasuodsay a 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Login Log The FL command is used to output the data A log of users that have logged in and logged out is output Up to 50 login logout logs are retained Logs that exceed 50 are cleared from the oldest data If the power goes down while logged in you will be logged out In this case however it will not be recorded as a logout Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm SS_XXXXXXXXXX_NNN uuu uCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Sec
130. M Integrated value INST Instantaneous value Report computation type 3 Same as p3 Report computation type 4 Same as p3 Creation of hourly daily daily weekly and daily monthly files COMBINE Saves reports to one file SEPARATE Saves reports to separate files SEPARATE2 Saves reports to separate files DX100 DX200 format Report template function USE NOT For parameters p2 to p5 you cannot specify the same computation type except OFF 3 46 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 6 Basic Setting Commands When p6 is set to SEPARATE2 p7 can only be set to OFF Service ports Syntax WU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Setting type SERVICEPORT p2 FTP service port 1 to 65535 p3 Web service port 1 to 65535 p4 SNTP service port 1 to 65535 p5 Modbus service port 1 to 65535 Decimal point type Syntax WU pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Setting type DECIMALPOINT p2 Decimal type POINT COMMA POINT Uses a period for the decimal point COMMA Uses a comma for the decimal point Detailed POP3 settings Syntax WU pl1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Setting type POP3 p2 Delay after accessing POP3 until transmission seconds 0 to 10 p3 POP3 login method PLAIN APOP Alarm level settings Syntax WU pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Setting type ALARM_LEVEL p2 Levels 1 2 3 4 1 4 2 3 1 4 3 2 Alarm color settings Syntax WU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Setting type ALARM_ COLOR p2 Alarm level 1 co
131. NTERNAL3 CD3 p4 Name of the file to load from up to 32 Description e An error occurs when there is no external characters storage medium CF inserted in the DX or Do not specify the extension when there is an error in the external storage e The directory to load from is fixed to the medium root directory An error does not occur even if there is not Example Load the custom display setup file named CD1 enough free space on the external storage from the root directory to INTERNAL2 medium CF LRO SELECT INTERNAL2 CD1 To check whether or not the save operation Description e An error occurs when there is no external was successful check the status byte For storage medium CF inserted in the DX or details on the status byte see section 5 2 when there is an error in the external storage menium BQ User Locked ACK AS1 An error occurs if the external storage medium CF does not contain the directory or file name that you specify advanced security option Syntax BQ pl lt terminator gt p1 Executes ACK 0 Example Execute the User Locked ACK operation LW Saves custom display screens BOO Syntax LW pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt Description This command is only valid when the user is pl Medium fixed at 0 locked 0 External CF card 2 pa Sereen range ALL CLEARTALL SELECT EC Clears setup data and executes ALL All screens Saves all of the custom display screens that is currently in use to the specified directory C
132. NW p1 Example Description NG Syntax Query Example Description NH Syntax Query Example Description ER Syntax Assign the channel 2 s alarm level 1 alarm to display window 4 and display the comment text block 3 label NW4 0N 2 1 3 e Set parameters p1 and p5 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e You cannot use this command when the annunciator mode is set to Off using the WU command Sets the Web report layout NG pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Report page number 1 to 10 p2 Creation ON OFF p3 Report title string up to 64 characters NG p1 Set the title of report page 2 to Factory 3 NG2 ON Factory 3 e You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e You cannot use this command if e The Web server function is set to Not using the WS command The operator and monitor pages are both set to Off using the WW command Sets Web report layout details NH pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Report page number 1 to 10 p2 Item number 1 to 10 p3 Creation ON OFF p4 Report channel number R01 to R60 p5 Value MIN MAX AVE SUM INST p6 Item name string up to 16 characters NH p1 p2 Assign the title Average to report page 2 item 6 and display the average of the measured values for the channel assigned to report channel R07 NH2 6 R07 AVE Average e You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e The
133. P STOP key USER USER key FAVORITE Favorite key 0 to 9 Number keys 0 to 9 MINUS The minus key DOT The decimal point key DISP The DISP ENTER key UP The up arrow key Example Description BP Syntax Example Description LL Syntax DOWN The down arrow key RIGHT The right arrow key LEFT The left arrow key Press the DISP ENTER key KEDISP e This command performs the same operations as pressing the keys on the DX When you send multiple key operations send them in the same order that you would perform them on the DX e When you perform this command it is logged on the DX as KEY This command is valid regardless of whether or not the key lock is on e On models with the AS1 advanced security option this command can only be used through the use of the serial communication barcode protocol or through a USB barcode reader Supports login AS1 advanced security option BP pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Input type 1 User name 2 User name and user ID p2 User name up to 20 characters p3 User ID up to 8 characters Set the user name to DX BP1 DX e If you execute this command when p1 1 the DX displays the user ID input window e If you execute this command when p1 2 the DX displays the password input window e p3 is valid when p1 2 e On models with the AS1 advanced security option this command can only be used through the use of the serial communication barcode protocol
134. Security Option Syntax BD pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Alarm delay 1 to 3600 p3 Unit SEC HOUR BD p1 Set the channel 001 alarm delay to 2 hours BD001 2 HUOR Description e Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e When p3 HOUR you can set p2 to a value Query Example from 1 to 24 NC Sets a comment text field Syntax NC pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Comment text field number p2 Comment string up to 32 characters Query NC p1 Example Set comment text field 30 to P1 end NC30 P1 end Description Set parameter p2 by referring to the table in section 3 3 NB Sets a comment text block Syntax NB pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Comment text block number p2 Comment text field number of line 1 p3 Comment text field number of line 2 p4 Comment text field number of line 3 p5 Comment text field number of line 4 p6 Comment text field number of line 5 Query NB p1 Example Set comment text block 5 s lines 1 2 and 3 to comment text field 10 11 and 14 respectively NB5 10 11 14 Description Set parameters p1 through p6 by referring to the table in section 3 3 NW Syntax Sets an annunciator display NW p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt p1 Display window number p2 On Off ON OFF p3 Measurement computation or external input channel number p4 Alarm level 1 to 4 ALL p5 Label comment text block number Query
135. TART STOP p5 Action details 2 MEMORYSTART Same as when multi batch is not in use MEMORYSTOP except the following TRIGGER Event trigger p4 MEMORYSTART STOP MEMORYSTART ALARMACK Alarm acknowledge MEMORYSTOP SAVEDISPLAY MATHSTART STOP SAVEEVENT MATHRESET MATHSTART ALL All batch groups MATHSTOP SELECT Aspecific batch group MATHRESET p4 MATHRESET SAVEDISPLAY Saves display data to the i ALL All computation channels external storage medium SELECT A specific batch group SAVEEVENT Saves event data to the p6 Action details 3 external storage medium p4 MESSAGE Method of specifying the MESSAGE Writes a message ON destination to write the SNAPSHOT message MANUALSAMPLE aa ALL All display groups in the batch TIMERRESET Resets the relative timer pe l group specified using p8 DISPLAYRATE1 2 Switches the trend interval R SELECT A specific display group in the DISPLAYGROUPCHANGE Switches the display group a i batch group specified by p8 FLAG Raises a flag p4 DISPLAYGROUPCHANGE TIMEADJUST Adjusts the time Batch group number PANELLOAD Loads settings p4 MEMORYSTART STOP MEMORYSTART ALARMDISPLAYRESET Resets the alarm display MEMORYSTOP SAVEDISPLAY SAVEEVENT MATHRESET and p5 SELECT Batch group number COMMENTDIS PLAY Displays the comment screen FAVORITEDISPLAY Displays the favorite screen p4 MATHRESET and p5 SELECT p5 Action details 2 Batch group number p4 TIMERRESET Timer number p7 Ac
136. TLOG timer Operation mode Yes No 3 31 TX Sets the ancillary operation of the start key Operation mode Yes No 3 32 BH Sets a batch text field Operation mode Yes No 3 32 EH Sets calibration correction Operation mode Yes No 3 32 BD Sets an alarm delay Operation mode Yes No 3 32 NC Sets a comment text field Operation mode Yes No 3 33 NB Sets a comment text block Operation mode Yes No 3 33 NW Sets an annunciator display Operation mode Yes No 3 33 NG Sets a Web report layout Operation mode Yes No 3 33 NH Sets Web report layout details Operation mode Yes No 3 33 FR Sets the interval for acquiring data to the FIFO buffer Operation mode Yes No 3 33 SY Sets a four panel display Operation mode Yes No 3 34 SM Sets the custom menu Operation mode Yes No 3 34 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 5 spuewwog el 3 2 AList of Commands Control Commands Group Command Function Name Execution Mode Administrator User Page BT gt uae Ww Doo Hoa AN w a H a lt as h YO YC IR CW LR LW Sets a batch name Sets a batch comment Writes a batch text field Switches the screen Starts or stops recording Clears alarm output acknowledge alarms Executes manual sample generates a manual trigger takes a snapshot or causes a timeout Executes manual SNTP Switches between normal and secondary trend interval Writes a message display and write Writes a free message Changes the login password Starts stops res
137. User s Manual IM04L41B01 05EN Setting the operator page Page type Select Operator On Off To display the operator page in the browser select On Otherwise select Off Access control This is the same as the setting on the monitor page Command input On DXs without the AS1 advanced security option To use message write commands select On Otherwise select Off On DXs with the AS1 advanced security option You cannot use message write commands This setting is fixed at Off IM 04L41B01 17E 1 29 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Monitoring with a Browser Setting the URL Set the URL appropriately according to the network environment that you are using You can access the DX by setting the URL as follows http host name domain name file name http Protocol used to access the server Host name domain name Host name and domain name of the DX You can also use the IP address in place of the host name and domain name File name File name of the monitor page and operator page of the DX File name of the monitor page monitor htm File name of the operator page operator htm Omitting the file name is equivalent to specifying the monitor page However if the monitor page is disabled it is equivalent to specifying the operator page Example To display the operator page on a PC in the same domain as the DX enter the URL in the Address box of the browser as follows
138. WE Sets the Modbus connection limitation Syntax WF pl lt terminator gt pl Modbus connection limitation USE NOT Query WE Example Place limitations on Modbus connections WFUSE 3 58 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 6 Basic Setting Commands WG Syntax Query Example Description WJ Syntax Query Example WQ Syntax Query Example Sets an IP address that is allowed to connect via Modbus WG pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Registration number 1 to 10 p2 Whether or not to register ON OFF p3 IP address 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 WG p1 Allow connection from 192 168 111 24 Use registration number 1 WG1 ON 192 168 111 24 This command is valid when the Modbus connection limitation is placed WF command Sets the FTP transfer wait time WJ pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Display data and event data minutes 0 to 120 p2 Reports minutes 0 to 120 WJ Set the FTP transfer wait time for report data to 30 minutes Do not set a wait time for display data and event data wWJ0 30 Sets PROFIBUS DP WQ pl lt terminator gt p1 Node address 0 to 125 WQ Set the node address to 121 WQ121 Description e You can use this command on models with the XE Syntax Example CP1 PROFIBUS DP option Activates basic settings XE pl lt terminator gt p1 Whether or not to save settings STORE ABORT Save basic settings XESTORE Description e To activate the settings you have changed using
139. X retransmits the packet at a predetermined time interval If the packet is not received after 14 retransmissions a timeout occurs and the connection is closed TCP keepdrops Total number of closed connections due to TCP keepalive timeout TCP sndtotal Total number of transmitted packets TCP sndbyte Total number of transmitted bytes TCP sndrexmitpack Total number of retransmitted packets TCP sndrexmitbyte Total number of retransmitted bytes TCP revtotal Total number of received packets TCP rcevbyte Total number of received bytes DLC 16 collisions Number of collisions A collision occurs when two or more instruments on the network attempt to transmit simultaneously The tendency for collisions to occur increases when the network is congested 16 collisions would mean 16 consecutive collisions Closes the connection to the instrument that you are operating quit lt terminator gt 3 66 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 12 Instrument Information Output Commands 3 12 Instrument Information Output Commands Available when using the instrument information server function via Ethernet The instrument information server function interprets one UDP packet to be one command and returns a single packet containing DX information in response to the command Port number 34264 udp Transfer data ASCII Receive buffer size 128 Transmit buffer size 512 Maximum number of parameters 32 In the command packet yo
140. X1000 server 1 9998 y Confirming the Communication Status DX1000 Client Showing a Menu to Switch to the Modbus Client Screen This is the operation to show INFORMATION gt MODBUS CLIENT on the display selection menu Press MENU to switch to setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Menu customize gt Display menu 1 Select INFORMATION gt MODBUS CLIENT using the arrow keys Select INFORMATION gt MODBUS MASTER when you use the Modbus master via the serial communication 2 Press the View soft key The selected item displays in white a bre I 2 View Hide soft key Toggles View and Hide each time you press the soft key ee ES wv Maz Select View 3 Press the ESC key to return to the operation screen Displaying the Modbus Client Screen Press DISP ENTER and select INFORMATION gt MODBUS CLIENT Select INFORMATION gt MODBUS MASTER when you use the Modbus master via the serial communication Comm Data No Status First Last Server name Resisters z R Good C 1 C 1 192 168 1 101 30001 TUBUNKOWOVHUAY baat ae IM 04L41B01 17E 1 71 gju u 7 U19473 24 BUISN IS 1 12 Using the Setting Measurement Server This section explains how to use the setting measurement server You can use this function to send commands to retrieve data from the DX and to control it For information about the maximum number of
141. _NT_PRINCIPAL KRB5_NT_PRINCIPAL out Destination folder name file name keytab c temp dxadv keytab Mapping Examp ktpass princ le host dxadv EXAMPL E COM pass record 1 crypto RC4 HMAC NT mapuser dxadv ptype KRB5 NT PRINCIPAL out c temp dxadv keytab Note Use the ktpass tool after you install the support tools offered by the server Be sure to make the realm name all caps You can only set crypto to All when using Windows Server 2008 Use the same encryption method for the user and host accounts ARC4 ARCFOUR is an encryption algorithm that is compatible with RC4 The out setting can be omitted ktpass Execution Example Windows Server 2003 This execution example is different from the configuration example cx Command Prompt F C po kag and Settings Administrator gt ktpass s record 1 mapuser dxady crypto RC4 HMAC NT ptype KRB5_NT_PRINCIPAL o ut cr dxadvu keytab Targeting domain controller win2003 Using legacy password setting method Successfully mapped Key created host dxaduv to dxadv Output keytab to C dxadvu keytab 2 Keytab version 0x58 keysize 63 host dxadv x17 lt RC4 HMAC gt keylength 16 Oxi 23f di 1458b79127e803h71 Bab818b4 gt C Documents and Settings Administrator gt princ host dxadvu b pe 1 KRBS_NT_PRINCIPAL vno 6 etype IM 04L41B01 17E 1 85 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy
142. above example registers 410003 to 410005 must be written using one command A zero is read when you read a write only register Lot number e Access the registers two registers at a time You can only access from the first register On models without the multi batch function BT2 option or on models with the multi batch function BT2 option but with the multi batch function disabled if you access a lot number of a batch group an error occurs Batch number Message You can only access from the first register On models without the multi batch function BT2 option or on models with the multi batch function BT2 option but with the multi batch function disabled if you access a batch number of a batch group an error occurs You can only write from the first register A message is written using one command In other words write to registers 410601 to 410603 using one command On models without the multi batch function you only have to write to registers 410601 and 410602 instead On models without the multi batch function the message write destination can be omitted write only to 410601 If you omit it the operation is the same as when all groups are specified Free message You can only write from the first register Afree message is written using one command If you omit the free message section an all space message is written On models without the multi batch function the message
143. ages of the entire amplitude axis in the waveform display area e Ifyou are using the multi batch feature BT2 this command affects batch group 1 e If you are using the multi batch feature BT2 you cannot use this command on a batch group that is recording memory sampling e Setp1 and p2 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Sets a message SG pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Message number 1 to 100 p2 Message up to 32 characters SG p1 Assign character string MESSAGE1 to message number 2 SG2 MESSAGE1 For the characters that you can use for messages see appendix 3 ASCII Character Codes Note that you cannot use semicolons or commas Sets the directory on the external storage medium for saving data TH pl lt terminator gt pl Directory name up to 20 characters TH Select the DATA folder on the external storage medium for saving data THDATA1 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 25 ginning e 3 4 Setting Commands Iz Syntax Query Example Description IE Syntax Query Example Description SD Syntax Query Example Description Sets a file header TZ pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Batch group number Set the number to 1 if multi batch BT2 is not in use p2 File header up to 50 characters TZ p1 Set the batch group 2 s header to DX1000DATA TZ2 DX1000DATA Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Sets a data file name TF pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Ba
144. ail lite 3 16 SA Setting COMMANGS sisson ana a aoaia aaia aeia Taa ataa 3 19 3 0 Co ntrolCommandS moaie a aa ai Aik a a eek 3 37 3 6 Basic Setting Commands c sccccsssececsccscavavenctcnterasscpecessichvecceasaecyeant TEREE ap abiga si apa 3 45 3 7 Output Commands Control iccsc2ccawinanidndikedinike a aE 3 60 3 8 Output Commands Setting Measured and Computed Data Output eee 3 61 3 9 Output Commands RS 422 485 Dedicated Commands ccceceeceeesseeeeeeeeenneeeteneeees 3 64 3 10 Output Commands Special Response Commands cccccceeceeeseeeeseeeeeesneeeeeneeeeeeeees 3 65 3 11 Maintenance and Test Commands Available when using the maintenance test server TUNCtHION via Ethernet iiinn panne a a naaa an aeaaeai lank 3 65 3 12 Instrument Information Output Commands Available when using the instrument information server UNCON Via Ethernet ler ladies NN 3 67 vi IM 04L41B01 17E Contents Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Appendix Index Responses 44 Response SYNlaxX aviahAaveasditel dca ean Ana edt dan Maan ads 4 1 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data isteron ones iare osen ae a eiae aa e aaa 4 6 4 3 Output Format of Binary D ta raisii eiee arae N E EEEE 4 33 4 4 Output Format of Instrument Information 0 cece eee eeeeeee eine eeeeneeeeeeeeenneeeenea 4 39 Status Reports 5 1 Status Information and Filter sc sc ccssccccssceecs inania anana reae ra eE raa Ea eiriaa Eana 5 1 5 2 Bit St
145. ame registration rejected operation refused R YXDOMAIN Host name registration rejected name exists a YXRRSET Host name registration rejected RR set exists NXRRSET Host name registration rejected RR set does not exist NOTAUTH Host name registration rejection not authoritative for zone NOTZONE Host name registration rejection different from zon section NONAME Host name not entered on the DX 298 INTERNAL Host name removal failure transmission error reception timeout etc FORMERR Host name removal failure format error DNS message syntax error SERVFAIL Host name removal failure server failure DNS server processing error NXDOMAIN Host name removal rejection non existent domain NOTIMP Host name removal rejected not implemented REFUSED Host name removal rejected operation refused YXDOMAIN Host name removal rejected name exists YXRRSET Host name removal rejected RR set exists NXRRSET Host name removal rejected RR set does not exist NOTAUTH Host name removal rejection not authoritative for zone NOTZONE Host name removal rejection different from zone section NOTLINKED Physical layer was disconnected when removing the host name e Example EA 01 05 11 12 20 00 563 RENEW 01 05 11 12 20 01 564 RENEWED 01 05 11 12 20 01 565 IPCONFIG 01 05 11 12 21 02 567 UPDATE EN IM 04L41B01 17E 4 21 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Modbus Communication Log The FL command is used to output the data e The Modbus
146. an choose any of the four methods on the DX in the table below PC DX PC DX SD 3 SD SD 3 SD RD gt 2 RD RD gt 2 RD RS 7 RS RS 7 RS cs 8 CS cs 8 cs SG _ ___ 5 SG SG _ 5 SG E o 5 e XON RS XON RTS e PC DX A SD 3 SD The connection of RS on the PC and CS 77 RD gt RD i D on the DX is not necessary However we RS 7 RS a m cs g cs recommend that you wire them so that the 2 SG 5 sG cable can be used in either direction 5 or 3 D O fo Table of Handshaking Methods Yes indicates that it is supported Data transmission control Data Reception Control Control used when sending data to a computer Control used when receiving data from a computer Software Hardware Software Hardware Handshaking Handshaking Handshaking Handshaking Handshaking Stops transmission when X OFF is received Resume when X ON is received Stops sending when CS CTS is false Resumes when it is true No handshaking Sends X OFF when the receive data buffer is 3 4 full Sends X ON when the receive data buffer is 1 4th full Sets RS RTS to False when the receive data buffer is 3 4 full Sets RS RTS to True when the receive data buffer becomes 1 4 full OFF OFF cron XON e OFF OFF e Data transmission control There is no handshaking between the DX and the PC The X OFF and X ON signals received from the PC are treated as data and the CS
147. aracters such as x1b were written in batch number or free message registers e Failed to control the following operations e Writing messages e Writing free messages e Writing batch numbers and lot numbers However no response is returned for the following errors e CRC error Errors other than those shown above IM 04L41B01 17E 6 19 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Modbus Master Function Basic Operations e The DX as a Modbus master device communicates with Modbus slaves periodically by sending commands at specified intervals e The Modbus master function operates independently from the Modbus client function via the Ethernet communication e The supported functions are reading data from the input registers and hold registers on the slave and writing data into the hold registers on the slave Serial Communication Specifications Common to the Modbus Slave Function Communicate via ModbusRTU Communication media RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 Control system No flow control none only Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 Start bit 1 bit fixed Data length 8 bit fixed Parity Select odd even or none Stop bit 1 bit fixed Message termination determination Time equivalent to 48 bits Modbus Master Specifications Read cycle Select the cycle at which data is read from other devices from the following 125 250 500 ms 1 2 5 and 10s Timeout value Se
148. aratte Detail code Status lamp Cursor to select a command Used when resuming command transmission to a server device using the front panel keys e Communication Conditions The Read cycle and Connect retry settings are displayed e Communication Status The communication status is displayed using the status lamp and the detail code Status Lamp Detail Code Meaning Green Good Communication is operating normally Yellow Command is readying Orange Trying to establish a TCP connection Red Communication is stopped Common to yellow None No response from the server device orange and red Func The server device cannot execute the command from the DX Regi The server device does not have the specified register Err There is an error in the response data from the server device Link Ethernet cable is disconnected Host Unable to resolve the IP address from the host name Cnct Failed to connect to the server Send Failed to transmit the command BRKN Failed to received the response data or detected a disconnection Space The detail code is not displayed until the status is confirmed when communication is started 1 62 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function Resuming Command Transmission You can use the front panel keys to resume command transmission to a server device to which communication is stopped red status lamp 1 Using th
149. arm r low limit on rate of change alarm T delay high limit alarm and t delay low limit alarm as follows 0 no alarm 1 H 2 L 3 h 4 1 5 R 6 r 7 T and 8 t The measured computed data take on the following values under special conditions Special Data Value Measured Data Computed Data Over Over Skip Error Undefined Power failure data Burnout up setting Burnout down setting 7FFFH 8001H 8002H 8004H 8005H 7F7FH 7FFAH 8006H 7FFF7FFFH 80018001H 80028002H 80048004H 80058005H 7F7F7F7FH 7FFF7FFFH 80018001H The number of blocks number of bytes and measured computed data are output according to the byte order specified with the BO command IM 04L41B01 17E 4 35 sasuodsay a 4 3 Output Format of Binary Data Configured Channel Information Data The FE5 command is used to output the data The ID number of the output format is 25 You can use the CB command to specify whether to output the data of measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to OFF The figure below indicates the format 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte lt gt k gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Version Reserved Number of blocks Block size Reserved Reserved N Configured channel information block 1 KN z N Configured channel information block n Bes Format for Release Number 2 or
150. arms occur and when alarms clear ON Only send e mail when alarms occur Query Example p14 Whether to include tag number or channel number in the subject ON OFF YU p1 Send the status of alarm numbers 1 to 4 to recipient 1 Include instantaneous data but not the source URL Set the subject to ALM header 1 to LP2 and header 2 to DX Only send e mail when alarms occur Include the tag or channel number in the subject YUALARM ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ALM LP2 DX ON ON To send e mail at scheduled times Syntax Query Example YU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p p8 p9 p10 pll pl2 lt terminator gt p1 Information to send TIME p2 Recipient 1 ON OFF p3 Interval for sending e mail to recipient 1 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 24H p4 Time for sending e mail to recipient 1 00 00 to 23 59 p5 Recipient 2 ON OFF p6 Interval for sending e mail to recipient 2 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 24H p7 Time for sending e mail to recipient 2 00 00 to 23 59 ps Whether to include instantaneous data ON OFF p9 Whether to include source URL ON OFF p10 Subject up to 32 characters p11 Header 1 up to 64 characters p12 Header 2 up to 64 characters YU p1 Send e mail at 17 hours 15 minutes every day to recipient 1 Do not include instantaneous data but include the source URL Set the subject to GOOD and header 1 to LP2 YUTIME ON 24H 17 15 OFF OFF ON GOOD
151. at is shorter than the scan interval e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling in progress If you are using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling e You cannot set SINGLETRIGGER or REPEATTRIGGER as a sample mode when multi batch BT2 is enabled On models with the AS1 advanced security option you cannot set p3 to SINGLETRIGGER or REPEATTRIGGER Sets a zone SZ pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Lower zone boundary position 0 to 95 p3 Upper zone boundary position 5 to 100 SZ pl Display channel 002 in a zone between 30 and 50 Z002 30 50 e You can specify computation channels on models with the M1 or PM1 math option You can specify external input channels on models with the MC1 external input channel option e Set the boundary positions as percentages of the entire amplitude axis in the waveform IM 04L41B01 17E 3 23 ginning e 3 4 Setting Commands SP Syntax Query Example Description SI Syntax display area The zone size must be at least 5 Set the upper zone boundary position greater than the lower zone boundary position Sets a partial expanded display SP pl p2 p3 p4 SP Pa pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt Measurement computation or external input channel number Partial expanded display ON OFF
152. ata Data that was overwritten i Data being added 1l1 File number 10 digits yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 bbbb Number of events 4 characters fff File name up to 48 characters including the extension Space When the mode is Seprt2 an individual report file is output for each event Because of this the file numbers of the report files saved to the CF card will be different e Example EA 05 03 04 00 00 00 20 aaaa30312345 DAR 05 03 05 00 00 00 20 30400005 DAR 05 03 06 00 00 00 20 30500005 DAR 05 03 06 13 00 00 20 uuuu0005 DAR 4 30 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data User Information The FU command is used to output the data User name user level and other information are output Syntax EACRLF p_l_uuu CRLF ENCRLF p Login method E Ethernet On models with the AS1 advanced security option this indicates connection to the setting function e Ethernet On models with the AS1 advanced security option this indicates connection to the monitoring function S RS 232 or RS 422 485 K Login using keys l User level A Administrator U User uuu User name up to 20 characters n Space Example 1 When the FUO command is used information only on the user himself or herself that is logged in is output EA E A admin EN Example 2 When the FU1 command is used informatio
153. ata file event data file report data file snapshot data file setup file and change settings log file that are created in the internal memory of the DX can be automatically transferred to a remote FTP server The result of the transfer is recorded in the FTP log The FTP log can be shown on the DX s display see Log Display described later or output to a PC using commands 1 AS1 option i Data filetobe Transfer destination Transfer log FTP client transferred FTP server information FTP log DX i a a I Data file Ethernet Primary Secondary FTP server You can specify two destination FTP servers primary and secondary If the primary server is down the file is transferred to the secondary server e Fora description of the settings required to use this function see section 1 7 e FTP test e You can test whether files can be transferred by transferring a test file from the DX to a remote FTP server e The result of the FTP test can be confirmed on the FTP log display e For the procedure to use this function see section 1 7 Maintenance Test Server e This function can be used to output connection information network information and other information regarding Ethernet communications The commands that can be used with this function are maintenance test commands see section 3 10 The close command cannot be used on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option The close command closes the conne
154. ature3 FREE LOCK Query RP pl p2 Example Lock the START STOP and DISP ENTER keys RP1 KEY LOCK LOCK LOCK Description When p2 ACTION p10 is valid if calibration management CC1 option is enabled EK Configures administrator settings AS1 advanced security option Syntax EK pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Registration number 1 to 5 p2 Login method OFF KEY KEY COMM WEB p3 User name up to 20 characters p4 User ID up to 8 characters p5 Password p6 Period of password validity OFF MONTH 3MONTH 6MONTH Query EK p1 Password output in response to queries p Pe Default password Valid password specified by a user Expired password e Example Configure the settings for an administrator who can log in using the DX keys Set the user name to A the user ID to 0000 and the period of password validity to 3 months EK1 KEY A 0000 3MONTH Description e About user names e You cannot specify more than one of the same user name 3 50 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 6 Basic Setting Commands EL Syntax Query Example You cannot set the user name to quit or all spaces and you cannot use spaces inside the user name When p2 is set to KEY or KEY COMM e p95 is invalid Regardless of the setting the default password is used e When password management is enabled by the WU command p4 is invalid the DX responds to queries with a string of space
155. basic setting commands you must use the XE command to save the settings Be sure to use the XE command to save the settings before switching the execution mode back to operation If you do not save the settings and change the execution mode back to operation the DX returns to the previous settings This command is invalid on models with the AS1 advanced security option YE Activates basic settings cold reset Syntax YE pl lt terminator gt pl Whether or not to activate settings STORE Save basic settings and restart ABORT Restart without saving basic settings Example Saves basic settings and restart YESTORE Description If the settings are changed during memory sampling in basic setting mode a cold reset is not executed The login status is sustained IM 04L41B01 17E 3 59 ginning a 3 7 Output Commands Control 3 7 Output Commands Control BO Syntax Query Example Description CS Syntax Query Example Description IF Syntax Query Example Description CB Syntax Query Example Description Sets the output byte order BO pl lt terminator gt p1 Byte order 0 Outputs data MSB first 1 Outputs data LSB first BO Output data MSB first BOO This command applies to the byte order of numeric data for BINARY output Sets the check sum can only be used during serial communications CS pl lt terminator gt pl Checksum usage 0 Do not calculate value
156. below are left to default values Setting the Modbus Master Function Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Serial gt Basic settings Basic Setting Node Serial Baud rate 9600 bps Data length 8 bit Parity Even Handshaking OFF OFF Address 2 Protocol Normal Hodbus_Hodbus H Item Settings Address 2 Protocol Modbus M Setting Command Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Serial gt Modbus master gt Command settings Basic Setting Node Haster command number First Last Addr Regi Type 1 R H c01 Col 1 30001 INT16 loft aloft aloft Off BOF Toft aloft 1 8 9 16 Item Settings Command type R M First and Last C01 Addr 1 Regi 30001 Type INT16 Setting the Computation Channel See Usage Example of the Modbus Function in section 1 11 Assigning the channel to a Group See Usage Example of the Modbus Function in section 1 11 Starting the Computation See Usage Example of the Modbus Function in section 1 11 Confirming the Communication Status See Usage Example of the Modbus Function in section 1 11 IM 04L41B01 17E eu zu jenas y Buisp 2 8 Using the Setting and Measur
157. ble ON or OFF p3 Measurement computation or external input channel number TM p1 Assign measurement channel 002 to manual sample number 001 TM001 ON 002 e You can use this command on models with the MC1 external input channel option e You can specify computation channels on models with the M1 or PM1 math option Sets the sampling conditions for event data TE pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl 1 Query Example Description SZ Syntax Query Example Description p2 Sample interval 25MS 125MS 250MS 500MS 1S 2S 5S 10S 30S 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN p3 Sample mode FREE Starts data acquisition at memory start and stops data acquisition at memory stop SINGLETRIGGER Acquires data once for a specified time length after the trigger occurs and then stops REPEATTRIGGER Acquires data for a specified time length after the trigger occurs and then enters the trigger wait condition p4 Sample time length 10MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 1DAY 2DAY 3DAY 5DAY 7DAY 10DAY 14DAY 31DAY p5 Pretrigger length as percentage 0 5 25 50 75 95 100 p6 Key trigger source disable or enable OFF or ON Parameters p5 to p6 are valid when p3 is set to SINGLETRIGGER or REPEATTRIGGER TE p1 Acquire data at a sampling rate of 125 ms for 10 minutes using single trigger mode TE1 125MS SINGLETRIGGER 10MIN e You cannot choose a sample interval th
158. can interval and A D integral time B Yes No No 3 48 XB Sets burnout detection B Yes No No 3 49 XJ Sets RJC B Yes No No 3 49 XM Sets memory sampling conditions B Yes No No 3 49 XT Sets the temperature unit B Yes No No 3 49 RN Sets basic login B Yes No No 3 50 RP Sets user limitations B Yes No No 3 50 EK Configures administrator settings AS1 advanced Bb Yes No No 3 50 security option EL Configures user settings AS1 advanced security Bb Yes No No 3 51 option WD Configures authentication server settings AS1 B Yes No No 3 51 advanced security option RO Sets the type of report and when to create reports B Yes No No 3 51 RM Sets a report channel B Yes No No 3 52 XG Sets the time zone B Yes No No 3 52 XN Sets the date format B Yes No No 3 52 YB Sets host information B Yes No No 3 52 YD Sets network parameters B Yes No No 3 53 YA Sets the IP address subnet mask and default B Yes No No 3 53 gateway YK Sets keepalive B Yes No No 3 53 RU Sets DNS parameters B Yes No No 3 53 WS Sets a server B Yes No No 3 53 WW Sets Webpage parameters B Yes No No 3 53 YQ Sets communication timeout B Yes No No 3 53 YT Sets FTP transfer timing B Yes No No 3 54 YU Sets what kind of information to send using e mail B Yes No No 3 54 YV Sets an e mail recipient address B Yes No No 3 55 YW Sets the e mail sender address B Yes No No 3 55 YX Sets the e mail SMTP server name B Yes No No 3 55 YJ Sets the Modbus client s destination server B Yes No No 3 55 YP Sets basic Mo
159. cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling e Set p1 and p4 by referring to the table in section 3 3 For parameters p5 and p6 enter values with five digits or less excluding the decimal point IM 04L41B01 17E 3 19 ree el 3 4 Setting Commands e For parameters p7 p8 and p9 either set all three parameters or omit all three parameters When Setting Channels to Square Root Computation Syntax Query Example Description SR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 pl10 pll lt terminator gt p1 Measurement channel number p2 Setting type SQRT p3 Measurement range p4 Span lower limit p5 Span upper limit p6 Scaling lower limit 30000 to 30000 pP7 Scaling upper limit 30000 to 30000 p8 Scaling decimal place 0 to 4 p9 Unit up to 6 characters p10 Low cut function OFF ON p11 Low cut point 0 to 50 SR p1 Convert the DC voltage measured on channel 001 to an amount of flow using the square root computation Set the measurement range to 6 V the span lower limit to 1 V the span upper limit to 5 V the scaling lower limit to 10 0 m s and the scaling upper limit to 100 0 m s SRO01 SQRT 6V 1000 5000 100 1000 1 m3 s You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling or computation is in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling e Set p1 a
160. ccount supports Kerberos AES 256 bit encryption Be sure to select the same encryption method as the one used by the DX host account Member Of Dialin Environment Sessions Remote control Teminal Services Profile COM General Address Account Profile Telephones Organization User logon name user1 C r X User logon name pre Windows 2000 l ia user1 Logon Hours Log On To I Unlock account Account options I Use Kerberos DES encryption types for this account I This account supports Kerberos AES 128 bit encryption MTs account supports Kerberos AES 256 bit encryption T Do not require Kerberos preauthentication Account expires Never C End of z 1 84 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 14 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option About Mapping Mapping is the establishment of an association between the host principal and the host account In the example below the setting princ is associated with the setting mapuser The association is accomplished through the use of the ktpass tool e Open the command prompt and execute the ktpass command ktpass Settings Setup Item Windows Server Windows Server Example 2003 2008 princ host host principal realm name host dxadv EXAMPLE COM pass Password record 1 crypto ARC4 RC4 HMAC NT RC4 HMAC NT RC4 HMAC NT AES128 AES128 SHA1 AES256 AES256 SHA1 mapuser Host account dxadv ptype KRB5
161. ced security option Resets a relative timer IR pl lt terminator gt pl Number of the timer to reset 0 All timers 1 2 Timer number Reset timer 2 IR2 Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Resets a match time timer MA pl lt terminator gt pl Number of the timer to reset 1 2 Timer number Reset match time timer 2 MA2 e Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e This command is valid for expired match time timers whose operation is set to single Sets an event switch CW pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Type of operation LEVEL EDGE p2 Event switch number 1 to 30 p3 On off OFF ON Parameter p3 is valid when p1 is set to LEVEL Set event level switch 2 to ON CWLEVEL 2 ON Loads custom display screens LR pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Medium fixed at 0 0 External CF card p2 Screen range ALL SELECT ALL All screens Loads all of the custom display screens that are stored in the specified directory A specific screen Loads a specific custom display setup file to the screen that you specify When p2 is set to ALL p3 Name of the directory to load from up to 20 characters SELECT 3 42 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 5 Control Commands When p2 is set to SELECT Example Save the custom display setup file named p3 Custom display screen to load into INTERNALS to a file named CD3 in the root INTERNAL1 to INTERNAL3 or EXTERNAL directory 1 to EXTERNAL 25 LWO SELECT I
162. cent measured and computed data in the internal memory when the DX receives the FD command Make sure that the last channel number is greater than or equal to the first channel number e Parameters p2 and p3 are valid when p1 is set to 0 or 1 If you omit p2 or p3 all channels are specified e Set parameters p2 and p3 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Outputs FIFO data FF pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt p1 Type of operation GET Output starting with the next block RESEND Retransmit the previous output RESET Set the most recent data position block to the FIFO buffer read position block p2 First channel number measurement computation or external input channel p3 Last channel number measurement computation or external input channel p4 Maximum number of blocks to read out 1200 DX1002 DX1004 DX2004 DX2008 240 DX1006 DX1012 DX2010 DX2020 DX2030 DX2040 DX2048 60 Models with the MC1 external input channel option If the amount of measured computed and external input data is less than the specified number of blocks the DX sends all of the available data Output two blocks of FIFO data from channels 1 to 10 FFGET 001 010 2 The FIFO buffer is a cyclic buffer in which the oldest data is overwritten first Use the FR command to set the acquisition interval The DX sends the specified number of blocks p4 of FIFO data starting with the next block IM 04L41B01 17E 3 61 ainiin e 3 8 Output Commands S
163. ch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less Reserved batch 11 Batch 12 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 Batch 12 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less Reserved batch 12 410601 Preset message writing Message number 1 to 100 410602 Message write destination e When the multi batch function is not in use 0 All groups 1 to 36 Specified group number e When the multi batch function is in use 0 All groups of a specified batch number 410603 1 to 12 Specified group number Batch number designation for multi batch 1 to 12 INT16 Valid only when the multi batch function is available Any value when the multi batch function is not available Reserved Preset message 6 14 IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Simultaneous Access Write Read IM 04L41B01 17E 6 15 Description Supplementary Information Free message writing Message number 1 to 10 Message write destination e When the multi batch function is not in use 0 All groups 1 to 36 Specified group number e When the multi batch function is in use 0 All groups of a specified batch number 410613 1 to 12 Specified group number Batch number designation for multi batch 1 to 12 INT16 Valid only when the multi batch function is available An
164. cifications ccceeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeee Modbus SON El rinnan cere aeei voeteadsed Modbus server setting of Modbus server function sissies Modbus server function setting example of ae modbus s rver NAME aranse iea ieina n iis Modbus Slavei saena a Modbus slave function setting example of Modbus TC P ities cscesstteteveeeenica tenn neetiess MOJE Sireenin sasa nsii KE ATENTO EENEN E aaa i models with the PROFIBUS DP ssseesseeeeieesssesnesrennen 6 7 Monitonng CoNNeCtO ss nani a 3 10 monitoring function monitoring function COMMANDS isisisi 2 18 monitoring with a Web browSe cccesceeeeeteeeteeeeeees 1 30 IMONILOF Page aware ls Ae ee moniter page setting Ol s i es aitian acinar eeeeieess multiple negative responses MW TOO ieii E E O OFF ORF ornen are AE EEEE Operation MOW OF sosanna asa operation error log OPEratiOniK6YS infnnn arian Operat Oml Ogris esn ana eet aE Operation Mde operation when the data transfer fails operator PAGS siasessersceescarcutetatevssvarvacndes 2 operator page Setting OFf ccccceceeeeeseeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeenees output commands control output commands RS 422 485 dedicated commands 3 64 QUIDUL A E etertsctrteees edi eis output commands special response commands OUTDUL SXAMPlO ss esinin a na n eaters output flow of the file eaneeeeeneeeneeeesneesennesnnrserreesrneee outp
165. cipal is converted within the DX as shown below host host principal realm name e Cross realm authentication authentication of different domain names is not supported 1 80 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 14 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option KDC Server Configuration Example The example below shows how to configure a KDC server In the example a Windows Server 2008 KDC server that supports Active Directory management is used on an English OS Overview The necessary Active Directory management steps on Windows Server 2008 are the creation of a host account property changes mapping of the host principal to the host account and the creation of a key tab file this step can be omitted The conditions are as follows Item Description Domain name The name of the domain that you are using Realm The name of the realm that you are using Encryption method AES256 Port number 88 Preauthentication Enabled Item Registered name Password Host name dxadv record 1 1 You need to use mapping to use Active Directory to perform user registration on a non Windows device 2 The realm name is the domain name all caps Creating a DX Host Account 1 Open Server Manager and select New gt User Almlple es iain p Roles Server Manager NS KERBEROS yokogawa 5objects Filter Activa 2 t d Active Directory Domain Ser
166. cked ACK Yes No CM Sets communication input data Yes Yes IM 04L41B01 17E 2 21 2 9 Using Barcode Input AS1 option How to Use Type Command Administrator User CE Sets communication input of an external Yes Yes input channel EC Clears setup data Yes No YO Loads a setup file for basic setting mode Yes No Output commands control BO Sets the byte output order Yes Yes CS Sets the checksum Yes Yes IF Sets status filters Yes Yes CB Sets the data output format Yes Yes Output commands setting measured and computed data output FC Outputs screen image data Yes Yes FE Outputs setup data Yes Yes FD Outputs the most recent measured and Yes Yes computed data FF Outputs FIFO data Yes Yes FL Outputs a log alarm summary or message Yes Yes summary FI Outputs an operation log Yes Yes IS Outputs status information Yes Yes FU Outputs user levels Yes Yes FA Outputs internal DX information Yes Yes Dedicated commands for RS 422A 485 EscO Open Yes Yes Esc C Closed Yes Yes Dedicated barcode commands Command Function Description BV Enters a string This command is valid when on the DX screen the cursor is on an item that you need to specify a string for or when a window for entering a string appears You cannot use this command to enter passwords BP Supports login Enters the user name or the user name and user ID for logging in
167. cluded IM 04L42B01 01E DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 IM 04L41B01 03E Multi Batch BT2 User s Manual Describes how to use the multi batch function BT2 option DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 IM 04L41B01 04E Custom Display User s Manual Describes how to use the custom display function DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 IM 04L41B01 05EN Describes how to use the advanced Advanced Security Function security function AS1 option AS1 User s Manual DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 IM 04L41B01 17E Communication Interface User s Manual Explains the communication functions of the DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 using the Ethernet serial interface DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 IM 04L41B01 18E EtherNet IP Communication Interface User s Manual Describes how to use communication functions through the EtherNet IP interface DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 IM 04L41B01 19E PROFIBUS DP CP1 Communication Interface User s Manual Describes how to use communication functions through the PROFIBUS DP interface CP1 option DAQSTANDARD Manuals All manuals other than IM 04L41B01 66EN are contained in the DAQSTANDARD CD Manual Title Manual No DAQSTANDARD Viewer User s Manual IM 04L41B01 63EN DAQSTANDARD Hardware Setup User s Manual IM 04L41B01 64EN DAQSTANDARD DX100P DX200P Hardware Configurator User s Manual IM 04L41B01 65EN Installing DAQSTANDARD IM 04L41B01 66EN 7th Edition December 2010 YK All Rights Reserved Copy
168. ction between a DX other than the DX that you are operating and a PC Instrument Information Server e This function can be used to output the serial number model name and other information about the DX connected via the Ethernet network e The commands that can be used with this function are instrument information output commands see section 3 12 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 5 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 1 DX Features Login On DXs itou the AS1 advanced security option This function can be used only when using the setting measurement server maintenance test server and the FTP server functions For a description of the settings required to use this function see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E For a description of the login process of the setting measurement server and maintenance test server see appendix 2 User registration Users are registered using the login function of the DX There are two user levels administrator and user Administrator An administrator has privileges to use all the functions of the setting measurement server maintenance test server and FTP server An administrator can access the operator and monitor pages through the Web server function User A user has limited privileges to use the setting measurement server maintenance test server and FTP server For the limitation on the commands see section 3 2 e Limitations on the use of the setting
169. d Data FE See the explanation for Outputting the Most Recent Measured and Computed Data For information about status information see chapter 5 Command Function IS The status information is output in ASCII format IF A status filter is set Command Function PS PS0 memory start PS1 memory stop TE TLO computation start TL1 computation stop Command Function MS Writes a registered character string message BJ Writes the specified character string message Command Function BT Sets the batch and lot numbers IM 04L41B01 17E 1 75 aoej19 U 7 U19473 24 BUISN E 1 12 Using the Setting Measurement Server Disconnection The connection is closed when A command is sent that closes the connection The CCO command is sent A command that results in the exiting of basic setting mode has been executed If you log in to the setting function and initialize the setup data EC command load settings YO command or close system mode YE command the communication connection is closed along with other connections The DX disconnects according to its automatic logout and communication timeout settings When you are logged in if you do not send commands for the specified time indicated below the DX will automatically log out and close the connection Specified time The DX auto logout time see section 2 1 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User
170. d data can be used as communication input data of the computation function on a computation channel The data can also be handled on the external input channel The data that can be written to the internal register is measured data and computed data M1 and PM1 options DX2000 with MC1 option For details on the Modbus function codes that the DX supports see section 6 3 For a description of the settings required to use this function see section 1 10 Modbus server device Mw100 H E Ethernet DX DX client IM 04L41B01 17E gju u JOUIBYI 24 BUISN IS 1 1 DX Features Modbus Server e A Modbus client device can carry out the following operations on the DX that is operating as a Modbus server device e Load data from measurement computed and external input channels using the input register e Load communication input data using the hold register e Write communication input data using the hold register e Write to external input channels using the hold register e Start and stop recording write messages and perform other similar operations using the hold register models with release number 3 or later e Load the recording start stop condition message strings and other types of data using the hold register models with release number 3 or later M1 and PM1 options e For details on the Modbus function codes that the DX supports see section 6 3 e Fora desc
171. d data output Dedicated commands for RS 422A 485 Esc O Esc C Login commands LL 2 18 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 8 Using the Setting and Measurement Function Commands That You Can Perform after Logging In To log in a user must be registered on the DX and have permission to log in through communication commands The commands that administrators and users can execute are listed in the table below For details about the commands see chapter 3 For information about the responses to the commands see chapter 4 Group Command Administrator User Setting commands SY _ Sets a four panel display Yes Yes SD Sets the date and time Yes No FR Sets the interval for acquiring data to the Yes No FIFO buffer Control PS __ Starts or stops recording Yes Yes EV Executes manual sample takes a Yes Yes snapshot or causes a timeout MS _ Writes a message Yes Yes TL Starts stops resets computation MATH Yes Yes or clears the computation dropout status display IR Resets a relative timer Yes Yes AK _ Clears alarm output Yes Yes CV Switches between normal and secondary Yes Yes trend interval EM Starts or stops the e mail transmission Yes Yes function CU Recovers Modbus manually Yes Yes BJ Writes a free message Yes Yes EJ Changes the login password Yes Yes BT Sets a batch name Yes Yes BU _ Sets a batch comment Yes Yes MH Sets a batch text field Ye
172. data The selectable range is 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 and 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Five significant digits CM Enter 1 0000E 10 to communication input data C01 CMC01 1 0000E 10 e You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 option On models with the CP1 PROFIBUS DP interface option the communication input data for C01 to C24 on the DX1000 or for C01 to C32 on the DX2000 is reserved for PROFIBUS DP The client device cannot specify values for this communication input data Sets communication input of an external input channel CE pl1 p2 lt terminator gt p1 External input channel number p2 Data value 30000 to 30000 CE p1 Set external input channel number 440 to 12345 CE440 12345 You can use this command on models with the MC1 external input channel option Starts or stops the e mail transmission function EM pl lt terminator gt p1 Type of operation 0 Start 1 Stop IM 04L41B01 17E 3 41 ainiin e 3 5 Control Commands Example Description CU Syntax YO Syntax Example Description YC Syntax Start the e mail transmission function EMO To use the e mail transmission function you must configure the Ethernet interface set e mail addresses and enter the contents you want to transmit Recovers Modbus manually CU pl lt terminator gt pl Communication type 0 Modbus client Ethernet 1 Modbus master serial Loads a setup file for basic
173. data before the ring buffer is overwritten For details on the FIFO data output process see appendix 5 Sets a four panel display SY pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 pl10 pll lt terminator gt pl Batch group number Set this parameter to 1 when multi batch BT2 is not in use p2 Screen number 1 to 4 p3 Screen group name up to 16 characters p4 Screen 1 type TREND Trend display DIGITAL Digital value display BAR Bar graph display OVERVIEW Overview ALARM Alarm summary MESSAGE Message summary MEMORY Memory summary MODBUS M Modbus master status display MODBUS C_ Modbus client status display RELAY Relay status display REPORT Report display COLUMN_BAR Stacked bar graphs ANNUNCIATOR Annunciator display EVENT SWITCH Event switch status display p5 Number of the group to display in screen 1 p6 Screen 2 type see p4 Query Example Description SM p7 Number of the group to display in screen 2 p8 Screen 3 type see p4 p9 Number of the group to display in screen 3 p10 Screen 4 type see p4 p11 Number of the group to display in screen 4 SY p1 p2 Set screen number 1 as follows Four panel name Temperature Screen 1 Trend display group 1 Screen 2 Digital display group 3 Screen 3 Alarm summary Screen 4 Overview SY1 1 Temperature TREND 1 DIGITAL 3 A LARM 1 OVERVIEW e Parameters p5 p7 p9 and p11 are invalid when the corresponding screen types p4 p6 p8 and p10 are not set to TREND DIGITAL
174. data when the DX creates a setup file as a result of setting changes OFF ON YT Automatically transfer display and event data files Do not transfer report data files Do not transfer screen image data files Transfer a setup file when the settings change YTON OFF OFF ON e When the method to save data to the external storage medium is set to Auto the DX automatically transfers relevant data files when they are created For the procedure to save various data files to the storage medium see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual e 2 is only valid on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e p4 is only valid on models with the AS1 advanced security option Sets what kind of information to send using e mail To send changes in the alarm status Syntax YU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p71 pe po p10 p11 p12 p13 p14 lt terminator gt pl Information to send ALARM p2 Recipient 1 ON OFF p3 Recipient 2 ON OFF p4 Whether to send the alarm number 1 status ON OFF p5 Whether to send the alarm number 2 status ON OFF p6 Whether to send the alarm number 3 status ON OFF p7 Whether to send the alarm number 4 status ON OFF p8 Whether to include instantaneous data ON OFF p9 Whether to include source URL ON OFF p10 Subject up to 32 characters p11 Header 1 up to 64 characters p12 Header 2 up to 64 characters p13 Alarm transmission operation ON OFF Send e mail when al
175. dbus client settings B Yes No No 3 55 YR Sets the Modbus client s transmit command B Yes No No 3 55 WB Sets SNTP client parameters B Yes No No 3 56 WC Sets the SNTP operation when memory start is B Yes No No 3 56 executed YS Sets the serial interface B Yes No No 3 56 YL Sets the operation of the Modbus master function B Yes No No 3 57 YM Sets a transmit command of the Modbus master B Yes No No 3 57 function WR Sets the instrument information output B Yes No No 3 58 3 14 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 2 A List of Commands Command Function Execution Setting Connection Monitor Page Name Mode Connection WI Sets the relay operations B Yes No No 3 58 WF Sets the Modbus connection limitation B Yes No No 3 58 WG Sets an IP address that is allowed to connect via B Yes No No 3 59 Modbus WJ Sets the FTP transfer wait time B Yes No No 3 59 WQ Sets PROFIBUS DP B Yes No No 3 59 YE Activates basic settings cold reset Bb Yes No No 3 59 Output Commands AS1 Note Output commands except BO CS and IF cannot be placed in a command sequence Command Function Execution Setting Connection Monitor Page Name Mode Administrator User Connection Control BO Sets the byte output order ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 60 CS Sets the check sum can only be used during serial ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 60 communication IF Sets status filters ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 60 CB Sets the data output format ALL Yes Yes Y
176. during memory sampling 1 Batch group 2 memory sampling Same as above 2 Batch group 3 memory sampling Same as above 3 Batch group 4 memory sampling Same as above 4 Batch group 5 memory sampling Same as above 5 Batch group 6 memory sampling Same as above 6 Batch group 7 memory sampling Same as above 7 Batch group 8 memory sampling Same as above Status Information 6 Bit Name Description 0 Batch group 9 memory sampling Set to 1 during memory sampling 1 Batch group 10 memory sampling Same as above 2 Batch group 11 memory sampling Same as above 3 Batch group 12 memory sampling Same as above 4 Z g 5 6 7 a Status Information 7 to 8 All bits are zeroes IM 04L41B01 17E 5 3 syiodey sSn e s a Chapter6 Specifications 6 1 Ethernet Interface Specifications Basic Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE 802 3 Ethernet frames conform to the DIX specification Transmission medium type 10BASE T Protocol TCP IP UDP ICMP ARP FTP HTTP SNTP SMTP Maximum Number of Connections and Number of Simultaneous Uses The following table indicates the number of simultaneous uses number of users that can use the function simultaneously the maximum number of connections and the port number for each function Function Maximum Number of Simultaneous Uses Port Number Number o
177. e EXTERNAL p3 External RJC value 20000 to 20000 XJ p1 Set the channel 002 RJC to external and set the compensation value to 0 uV XJ002 EXTERNAL 0 Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e The unit of p3 is the pV XM Syntax Query Example Sets memory sampling conditions XM pl lt terminator gt pl Data type DISPLAY Display data EVENT Event data E D Display data and event data XM Set the memory sampling condition to display data XMDISPLAY Description You cannot specify E D when XIT e Multi batch BT2 is in use e Trend interval switching is on e You are using a DX with the AS1 advanced security option Sets the temperature unit Syntax XT p1 lt terminator gt Query Example RF pl Temperature unit C F XT Set the temperature unit to Celsius XTC Sets key lock When p1 is set to KEY Syntax RF pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt pl Type KEY p2 START key FREE LOCK p3 STOP key FREE LOCK p4 MENU key FREE LOCK p5 USER key FREE LOCK p6 DISP ENTER key FREE LOCK p7 FAVORITE key FREE LOCK When p1 set to FUNC function key Syntax RF pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 pa lt terminator gt pl Type FUNC p2 Alarm ACK FREE LOCK p3 Message batch key FREE LOCK p4 Math key FREE LOCK p5 Data save FREE LOCK p6 E mail FTP FREE LOCK p7 Time set FREE LOCK p8 Display Function FREE LOCk When p1 is set to MEDIA e
178. e a Recipient 1 EE EER Port number 25 Recipient 2 Security Auth Sender SHTP authorization User name Password Srrrccrtttt tT Sst ttt Input Clear Copy Input Clear Copy POP3 Settings Alarm settings Basic Setting Node POP3 Settings Alarm settings POP3 Server name SaaS Recipient 1 Recipient 2 Off Port number 116 Active Alarms Login name 1 off 2 off 3 off 4 off Password Trrvcrrtttt tts t ttt tT Tt Include INST a Include source URL Off Subject larm summary Header 1 Header 2 Send alarm action On Include tag ch in Subject On Input Clear Copy Scheduled settings System settings Basic Setting Mode Cink Scheduled settings System settings Recipient 1 Raa Recipient 2 off Recipient 1 aa Recipient 2 off Interval 24h Interval 24h Ref time aarag Ref time 0 00 inelage source eS ba Subject Bystem_warning Include INST Off Header 1 Include source URL Off Header 2 Subject Periodic_data Header 1 Header 2 a orf On Off Report settings Basic Setting Node Report settings Recipient 1 aa Recipient 2 off Include source URL Off Subject eport_data Header 1 Header 2 On Off 1 18 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 4 Sending E mail Messages Basic Settings Set the SMTP server and mail address e SMTP server name Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server e Port number Unless specified otherwise set the number to the default value The default value is 25 e Security release numb
179. e DX Requesting Releasing Network Information from DHCP You can manually request or release network information such as the IP address This operation applies when DHCP is set to Use Perform the request or release after displaying the network information screen Requesting Network Information 1 Display the network information screen Press FUNC and select Network info pons os 13 03 35 14 Oo MEMS IP address a 8 amp Subnet mask a 8 amp Default gateway HAC address DNS server Primary Secondary Host name dxady 00 00 64 88 26 28 a 0 0 a 8 0 2 Execute the network information request Press FUNC and select Network info gt Request Be IP address o 8 0 IP address b 8 8 g Subnet mask 4 8 Subnet mask 06000A Default gateway Default gateway HAC address 00 00 64 88 26 28 HAC address 00 00 64 88 26 28 DNS server DNS server Primary 6 8 8 A Primary 6 8 8 A Secondary 6 8 8 gt Secondary 6 8 8 Host name Host name dxady dxady avorite System Network regist info info ppe Sb 5 43 eo ETS HAC address DNS server Primary Secondary Host name dxady Domain name daqstation com IP address 18 6 233 148 Subnet mask 255 255 254 Default gateway 18 0 232 1 00 00 64 88 26 28 a 8 0 a 00 o The network information is displayed IM 04L41B01 17E 1 15
180. e Modbus Function Setting the Computation Channel Press MENU to switch to setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Math channel gt Expression Alarm First CH IGIS Last CH 101 Hath On Calculation expression G1 KO1 Span Lower Span Upper Unit 2 6608 2 0000 v Alarm 1 ort 2 orf 3 off 4 off Input 1 zl Item Settings First CH Last CH 101 Math On Calculation expression C01 K01 Span_L 2 0000 Span_U 2 0000 Unit V Press MENU to switch to setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Math channel gt Constant Number of constant Kal Value p 0001 Item Settings Number of constant K01 Value 0 0001 Assigning the channel to a Group Press MENU to switch to setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Group set Trip line ml Group number Group set OnOff on Group name Ropi ooo o CH set 101 Trip line 1 off 2 off 3 off 4 off Input 1 Item Settings Group number 1 On Off On Group name GROUP 1 CH set 101 1 70 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 11 Usage Example of the Modbus Function Starting the Computation DX1000 Client Press FUNC and select Math start The computation starts A computation icon is displayed on the status display section The value of the computation channel 101 in the GROUP 1 of the DX1000 client varies in conjunction with the measured value of the measurement channel 1 on the D
181. e as the span Scale upper limit 4 Computation and external input channels Same value as the span FIFO type 2 1 Area in the FIFO 2 Indicates the position of its own channel in the FIFO block of one sample The value starts from zero Reserved 4 0 Output in the byte order specified by the BO command 4 36 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 3 Output Format of Binary Data Format for Release Number 3 or Later Format version 2 Format Details Item Description Output Value Version Format version 2 Number of blocks Number of configured channel information blocks 348 maximum Block size Configured channel information block 176 fixed size Blocks 1 ton Configured channel information block 61248 bytes maximum e Block Details Description Bytes Description Channel number 2 Same as format version 1 Decimal place 1 Same as format version 1 Reserved 1 Same as format version 1 Channel type 4 Same as format version 1 Unit information 8 Same as format version 1 Tag information 24 You can enter up to 23 characters for the tag comment The terminator is 0 Minimum input value 4 Same as format version 1 Maximum input value 4 Span lower limit 4 Same as format version 1 Span upper limit 4 Scale lower limit 4 Same as format version 1 Scale upper limit 4 FIFO type 2 Same as format version 1 Area in the FIFO 2 Same as
182. e colons for p3 without specifying any items items from the sixth item onwards are invalid p4 cannot be omitted p3 is not case sensitive Items that start with the specified characters are output Example Error Specifies all errors Error213 Specifies error 213 If p2 and p3 are both specified the DX outputs items that match the logical AND of p2 and p3 Outputs status information IS p1 pl lt terminator gt Status information output 0 Status information 1 and 4 1 Status information 1 and 8 Output status information 1 to 4 Is 0 3 62 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 8 Output Commands Setting Measured and Computed Data Output Description You can mask the output status using status filters see the IF command For details on status information see chapter 5 FU Outputs user levels Syntax FU pl lt terminator gt p1 User information output 0 Information about the users currently logged in 1 Information about the users currently logged into a general purpose service Example Output information about the users logged into a general purpose service FUL Description This command sends information about users that are connected to the DX FA Outputs internal DX information Syntax FA pl lt terminator gt p1 Type of operation EP Address information that includes the IP address subnet mask default gateway DNS server as well as the host name and domain name ME Outputs data stored on the external storag
183. e from multiple DXs By shifting the transfer time you can avoid having too many simultaneous connections to the FTP server The time that display data files event data files and report files are transferred can be shifted e Even if anew event that requires an FTP transfer occurs while the DX is waiting to transfer the data of the previous event it does not affect the transfer wait time of the previous event When the transfer shift time passes all data files of the same type that have been created all of the files that have not been transferred are transferred via FTP The following figure is an example for display data e To avoid accumulating too many files that have not been transferred we recommend that you set the transfer wait time shorter than the interval at which events that require FTP transfers occur FTP transfer FTP transfer AIS Transfer wait time Transfer wait time 1 48 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 7 Transferring Data Files from the DX e Even if you turn the power off during FTP transfer wait time the elapsed time is recorded e If you change the FTP transfer time settings during FTP transfer wait time the data files that are being held are transferred using the previous setting Subsequent data files are sent according to the new setting e If you initialize the DX during FTP transfer wait time using Clear1 Clear2 or Clear3 Clear 4 the elapsed time is cleared e When FTP transfer at signing
184. e medium Notifies the error code and message when an error related to FTP client when a data transfer fails using the FTP client function occurs On DXs with the AS1 advanced security option this type of e mail indicates that a user has been locked Invalid user Scheduled mail Transmits an e mail message when the specified time is reached This can be used to confirm that the e mail transmission function including the network is working properly You can specify the reference time and the e mail transmission interval for each destination Report mail only on models with the computation function M1 or PM1 option Notifies the report results For the procedure to set the e mail transmission function see section 1 4 For the e mail transmission format see section 1 4 For the procedure to start stop e mail transmission see section 1 4 Example of an e mail sent at a scheduled time From DX1000 daaqstation com Date Sun 5 Oct 2003 08 00 45 0900 JST Subject Periodic_data Subject To user1 daqstation com user2 daq co jp LOOP1 Header 1 TEMPERATURE Header 2 Time Host name DX1000 Time of transmission 10 05 08 00 01 E mail test You can send a test message from the DX to the destination to check e mail transmissions You can confirm the result of the e mail test on the e mail log screen For the procedure to use this function see section 1 4 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 9 aoejJ9 U
185. e medium and internal memory ME pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Type of operation DIR File list output GET Output first time NEXT Syntax Output subsequent times This parameter is used to output the remaining data when the first output operation is not enough to output all of the data RESEND Retransmit the previous output DEL Delete DIRNEXT Output the subsequent file list after the file list is output using the DIR or LIST command The number of output lists is the p3 value specified using the DIR command If you use this command after all lists have been output the following data is output EACRLF ENCRLF CHKDSK Checks the disk Outputs information about the free space on the external storage medium p2 Path name up to 100 characters Set the path name using a full path Example Description p3 Maximum number of file lists to output 1 to 1000 If you omit this parameter the DX outputs the entire file list of the specified directory Output the entire file list of the DRVO directory MEDIR DRVO Output the DRVO directory file list for 10 files MEDIR DRVO 10 Output the data in the file 72615100 DAD in the DRVO DATAO directory MEGET DRVO DATAO 72615100 DAD Parameter p2 is valid when p1 is set to DIR GET DEL or CHKDSK Parameter p3 is valid when p1 is set to DIR If an error occurs during data transmission you can set p1 to RESEND to retransmit data The setting p1 DEL is invalid on models w
186. e some operations such as the starting and stopping of recording However users cannot perform operations that are forbidden by the user privilege settings For details see section 3 2 When you are using the multi login function you can log in to the setting function in the circumstances listed below but all commands other than the monitoring function commands will result in errors e When a user who has logged in through key operations is in setting mode or basic setting mode e There is a user who is using serial communication to execute a command to enter setting mode When you are not using the multi login function you will be unable to log in to the setting function if an administrator or user has logged in to the DX through key operations or if there is a user who is executing the LL command through serial communication DX Part of the setting function 1 72 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 12 Using the Setting Measurement Server Logging In Perform the operations that are appropriate for your PC software and network environment This section explains the operations that a user performs on the PC before he or she logs in and how the DX responds to those operations For information about the flow of login processing see appendix 2 Note Regardless of the connection types key login a setting or monitoring connection to the setting measurement server or connection through the LL command using serial commun
187. e the IP address and DNS information and automatically register the host name YDUSE USE USE Sets the IP address subnet mask and default gateway YA pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl IP address 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p2 Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p3 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 YA Set the IP address to 192 168 111 24 the subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 and the default gateway to 0 0 0 0 YA192 168 111 24 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Sets keepalive YK pl lt terminator gt pl Keepalive ON OFF YK Disable keepalive YKOFF Sets DNS parameters Server settings Syntax RU pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Setting type SERVER p2 Primary DNS server address 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p3 Secondary DNS server address 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Suffix settings Syntax Query RU pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Setting type SUFFIX p2 Domain suffix 1 up to 64 characters p3 Domain suffix 2 up to 64 characters RU p1 Example WS Syntax Query Example WW Syntax Query Example Set domain suffix 1 to rec1 daqstation com and domain suffix 2 to rec2 daqstation com RUSUFFIX recl daqstation com rec2 daqstation com Sets a server WS pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Server type FTP WEB MODBUS SNTP ETHERNETIP p2 Server on off USE NOT WS p1 Enable the Web server WSWEB USE Sets Webpage parameters WW pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Webpage type
188. e up and down arrow keys select the command corresponding to the server device to which transmission will be resumed The message Push right arrow key to refresh appears 2 Press the right arrow key The DX starts command transmission to the specified server Data When Communication Is Stopped and during Connection Retrials If the command transmission stops such as due to a connection drop the status turns orange or red and the communication input data and external input channel data are error data On communication channels tOVER or OVER is displayed according to the DX settings is displayed on external input channels Data Dropout Data drop occurs when the commands from 1 to 16 do not complete within the read cycle see appendix 1 When a data dropout occurs the communication input data is held at the previous value A message indicating the data dropout is also displayed on the Modbus operating status display If this happens take measures such as making the read cycle longer or reducing the number of commands Confirm that no data dropout occurs on the modbus status log screen IM 04L41B01 17E 1 63 aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function Function for Automatically Assigning MW100s to the Modbus Client DX2000 Only The following setup is carried out from the DX using YOKOGAWA s MW100 Data Acquisition Unit as a Modbus server If the DX2000 is a Modbus cl
189. e when recording is stopped e Setting Mode during Memory Sampling s The setting mode that appears during recording e Operation Mode O The mode in which operations are performed Switching Execution Modes The figure below indicates the commands that can make the DX switch between different modes and operation modes Operation mode while logged out Operation mode EE ENG EE ENG EE SYS EE SYS BE BE LO YE YE YO EC Setting mode Basic setting mode during memory Setting Mode during memory sampling sampling Basic setting mode Note If there is no CF card in the DX an error will occur when you change the settings and then try to switch to operation mode from basic setting mode basic setting mode during memory sampling or setting mode IM 04L41B01 17E 3 9 spuewwoy el 3 2 AList of Commands Administrators and Users The distinction between administrators and users indicates the user levels set through the DX Ethernet login function For details see section 1 2 Yes and No in the table indicate the following Yes The command can be used No The command cannot be used Connecting to the Setting Function and Connecting to the Monitoring Function There are two types of Ethernet connections that can be made to the DX setting measurement server connections to the setting function setting connection and connections to the monitoring function monitoring connections For details see section
190. easured value x scan interval 86400 The scan interval unit is seconds Sets the time zone XG pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Offset time from GMT 1300 to 1300 Upper 2 digits Hour 00 to 13 Lower 2 digits Minute 00 to 59 p2 Time deviation limit OFF 10S 20S 30S 1MIN 2MIN 3MIN 4MIN 5MIN Set the offset time from the GMT to 9 hours ahead and the deviation limit to 30 s XG0900 30S Sets the date format XN pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Date format Y M D M D Y D M Y D M Y p2 Starting day of the week on the calendar SUN MON XN Set the date format to Y M D Set the starting day of the week on the calendar to Monday XNY M D MON Sets host information YB pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Host name up to 64 characters p2 Domain name up to 64 characters YB Set the host name to dx1000 and the domain name to dxadv daqstation com YBdx1000 dxadv daqstation com 3 52 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 6 Basic Setting Commands YD Sets network parameters When not obtaining network parameters automatically Syntax YD pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Automatic retrieval NOT When obtaining network parameters automatically Syntax Query Example YA Syntax Query Example YK Syntax Query Example RU YD pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Automatic retrieval USE p2 DNS information retrieval USE NOT p3 Automatic host name registration USE NOT YD Automatically retriev
191. easurement and ASCII output sasuodsay gt control data output Binary output RS 422 485 dedicated Dedicated response No response Special resonse Dedicated response commands For the responses to the instrument information server function see section 4 4 For the responses to special commands see section 3 10 Note The CRLF used in this section denotes carriage return line feed Affirmative Response When the command is processed correctly an affirmative response is returned e Syntax EOCRLF e Example EO Single Negative Response When a command is not processed correctly a single negative response is returned e Syntax El onnn_mmm mCRLF nnn Error number 001 to 999 mmm m Message variable length one line Space e Example El 001 System error Multiple Negative Responses lf there is an error in any one of the multiple commands that are separated by sub delimiters multiple negative responses are returned e The response is generated for each erroneous command e If there are multiple commands that have errors the negative responses are separated by commas e The error position number is assigned to the series of commands in order starting with 1 assigned to the first command IM 04L41B01 17E 4 1 4 1 Response Syntax Text Output Binary Output e Syntax E2_ee nnnCRLF When there is only one error E2 ee nnn ee nnn
192. ed using the RS RTS signal on the RS 232 When instruments that support only the RS 422 interface exist in the system When using the four wire system up to 32 DXs can be connected to a single host device However this may not be true if instruments that support only the RS 422 interface exist in the system When YOKOGAWA s recorders that support only the RS 422 interface exist in the system The maximum number of connection is 16 Some of YOKOGAWA s conventional recorders HR2400 and pR for example only support the RS 422 driver In this case only up to 16 units can be connected Note In the RS 422 standard 10 is the maximum number of connections that are allowed on one port for a four wire system Terminator When using a multidrop connection including a point to point connection connect a terminator to the DX if the DX is connected to the end of the chain Do not connect a terminator to a DX in the middle of the chain In addition turn ON the terminator on the host device see the manual of the host device If a converter is being used turn ON its terminator The recommended converter is a type that has a built in terminator Select the appropriate terminator 120 Q indicated in the figure according to the characteristic impedance of the line the installation conditions of the instruments and so on IM 04L41B01 17E 2 9 eu u jenas y Buisp 2 4 Setting the Serial Communication Pres
193. ee nnnCRLF When there are multiple errors ee Error position 01 to 10 nnn Error number 001 to 999 Space e Example E2 02 001 For details on the text data types and their formats see section 4 2 e Syntax EACRLF sscsoessossooo CRLF ssoesoesosssooo CRLF eae ee ae eee a ee ee CRLF ENCRLF Conceptual Diagram 1 byte CR ASCII format Binary header length 12 bytes 29 Header sum g Binary format Binary data Binary data Binary footer 2 bytes EBCRLF Indicates that the data is binary Data Length The byte value of flag identifier header sum binary data data sum Header Sum The sum value of data length flag identifier Binary Value For the output format of various data types see section 4 3 Data Sum The sum value of the binary data Note The data length of the binary header section is output according to the byte order specified with the BO command 4 2 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 1 Response Syntax Flag Name Abbreviation Flag 0 1 Meaning of the Flag OAFANWHKUON BO CS END Middle End MSB LSB Output byte order Existence of a checksum In the middle or at the end of the continuous data ID When the BO flag is 0 the high byte is output first When the BO flag is 1 the low byte is output first If the check sum is enabled parameter 1 using the CS command parameter each s
194. eeeeeeeteeeeeeteeees 1 59 IM 04L41B01 17E Index 1 COMMANAS alisti ss cceeve eres cece cess neveeesvaecesaeyanneeaessienaess COMMaANA SettiNgS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeneeeteneeeeteeneeeteneees 2 12 commands that you can perform after logging in 2 19 commands that you can perform without logging in 2 18 commands that you can use A c mmand SYNTAX aisecresssasexidei ese eesti REENERT EN EKET NT COMIMANG YPE roisses anaa comment text block comment text field communication conditions COMMUNICATON GISTANCE 0 fe secgesseterisest Mere sities communication input data siais communication log communication status communication status checking of communication status setting Of nsssssssnsnnsassia 1 17 computation channelS 2 1 cstigse esr ane 3 18 computed data configured alarm information data ccsceeeeseeeeeees 4 38 configured channel information data ceeeeeees 4 36 CONNECCION seere e R E E TE CONNECHON COSIN issin riae n connection retrials data during i CONSTANTS kisasi neay nai eee CONLACHIN PUL siseses nna a KE EEEE control commands control commands AS1 CONVEMEN svecss EET E ree eee E Index 2 IM 04L41B01 17E data dropout ssnsdin data lengten ionn asnan en REAN dataliS tcnn EE data reception control data SUM aien a e EAN decimal point
195. egistration number 1 to 16 p2 Command type W M p3 First channel computation channel number p4 Last channel computation channel number p5 Slave device address 1 to 247 p6 First register number 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465535 p7 Type of data assigned to the registers INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L To set a command for communication input channel data exchange pl Registration number 1 to 16 p2 Command type E M p3 First channel communication input data number p4 Last channel communication input data number p4 can only be set to the same value as p3 Only one register can be loaded per command p5 Address of the slave device 1 to 247 p6 First register number 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465536 p7 Register data type INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L Query YM p1 Example Register the following command in command registration number 2 Write the computed 16 bit signed integer data of channels 101 to 105 to the first register 40003 in the slave device at address 5 YM2 W M 101 105 5 40003 INT16 Description e You can use this command on models with the C2 or C3 serial interface option e You can use this command when the serial interface protocol is set to Master For information about the serial interface settings see section 2 3 e Set p3 to a value that is less than or equal to p4 e The number of registers that are read fr
196. el number on which to report p4 Conversion of the unit of time for integration OFF Do not convert S Converts as though the physical values are integrated in units of seconds MIN Converts as though the physical values are integrated in units of minutes H Converts as though the physical values are integrated in units of hours DAY Converts as though the physical values are integrated in units of days Query RM p1 Example Use the report channel number R01 Set the channel number on which to report to 001 and convert the unit of time for integration to seconds RMO01 0N 001 S Description e You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e Set parameters p1 and p3 by referring to the table in section 3 3 XG Syntax Example XN Syntax Query Example YB Syntax Query Example About p4 Because the DX integrates sampled data over each scan interval the physical value integrated over a given unit of time may be different from the actual integrated value This occurs if the unit of time is different from the scan interval If this occurs set p4 to the same unit of time as that for the physical value that you are measuring The DX calculates the integrated value using one the following conversion formulas based on p3 OFF measured value IS measured value x scan interval MIN measured value x scan interval 60 HOUR measured value x scan interval 3600 DAY m
197. ement Function This section explains the setting and measurement function You can use this function to send commands to retrieve data from the DX and to control it Connecting to the DX Perform the operations that are appropriate for your PC software and network environment RS 232 The DX is ready to receive commands as soon as you connect it to the PC RS 422A 485 The DX is ready to receive commands after you connect it to the PC and open it with the open command ESC o RS 422A 485 Disconnection The connection is closed when e A command is sent that closes the connection The close command ESC c is sent e A connection is opened with another device Example If you open the DX at address 1 and then open the DX at address 2 the connection with the DX at address 1 is closed automatically When the AS1 Advanced Security Option Is Not in Use For the commands that you can use see section 3 2 When the AS1 Advanced Security Option Is in Use You can perform some commands without logging into the DX There are other commands that you can only use if you are logged into the DX For details about the commands see chapter 3 Commands That You Can Perform without Logging In Monitoring function commands You can execute some output and control commands Group Command Control CM CE Output commands control BO CS IF CB Output commands setting measured and FC FE FD FF FL Fl IS FU FA compute
198. ement is enabled by the WU command p4 is invalid the DX responds to queries with a string of spaces and p6 is fixed at off WD Syntax Query Example e When the user ID is disabled by the RN command p4 is invalid the DX responds to queries with a string of spaces e When p2 WEB e p4 is invalid the DX responds to queries with a string of spaces e You can set a password for p5 6 characters or more e 6 is fixed at OFF Configures authentication server settings AS1 advanced security option WD p1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Priority PRIMARY SECONDARY p2 Server name up to 64 characters p3 Port number 0 to 65535 WD p1 Set the primary server to WIN111 Use port 88 WDPRIMARY WIN111 88 Description The settings made by this command are valid RO when password management is enabled by the WU command Sets the type of report and when to create reports For creating no reports Syntax Query Example RO pl lt terminator gt pl Report type OFF RO Create no reports ROOFF Description You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option For creating hourly daily hourly daily and daily monthly reports Syntax Query Example RO pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Report type HOUR Hourly report DAY Daily report HOUR DAY Hourly and daily reports DAY MONTH Daily and monthly reports p2 Day to create reports dd fixed format dd Day 01 to 28
199. en normal and secondary trend interval LL Command Use the LL command to log in In the LL command specify the user name user ID and password After the LL command use sub delimiters to make a list of commands You log into the DX when you execute the command and you are automatically logged out after the command is executed Example Log in as user a whose user ID is aaaa and whose password is aaaaaa start computation and execute memory start LLa aaaa aaaaaa TLO PSO Login Limitations Depending on the key and Ethernet login conditions there may be limitations when you log into the setting and measurement function using the LL command You can execute the monitoring function commands regardless of other login conditions For details see section 1 3 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM 04L41B01 O5EN 2 20 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 9 Using Barcode Input AS1 option You can use barcode input to supplement the key input You can only use barcode input on models with the AS1 advanced security option Settings on the DX Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Serial gt Basic settings See section 2 4 Protocol Select Barcode to use the barcode protocol Connecting to the DX Follow the standard operating procedure for the barcode reader that you are using 1
200. en p2 is set to OFF disable the match time timer Syntax TK pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Timer number p2 Timer type OFF When p2 is set to DAY Syntax TK pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Timer number p2 Timer type DAY p3 Day 1 to 28 p4 Hour hh mm fixed format 00 00 to 23 59 p5 Timer operation SINGLE REPEAT SINGLE Executes the action once when the condition is met REPEAT Executes the action at every specified time When p2 is set to WEEK Syntax TK pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt p1 Timer number p2 Timer type WEEK p3 Day of week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT p4 Hour hh mm fixed format 00 00 to 23 59 p5 Timer operation SINGLE REPEAT When p2 is set to MONTH Syntax TK pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt p1 Timer number p2 Timer type MONTH p3 Day 1 to 28 p4 Hour hh mm fixed format 00 00 to 23 59 p5 Timer operation SINGLE REPEAT When p2 is set to YEAR Syntax TK pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt p1 Timer number p2 Timer type YEAR p3 Month JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC p4 Day 1 to 31 varies depending on the specified month p5 Hour hh mm fixed format 00 00 to 23 59 p6 Timer operation SINGLE REPEAT Query TK p1 Example Set timer number 2 to expire at hour 21 every Thursday TK2 WEEK THU 21 00 REPEAT Description Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling in progress If
201. enacneepdesceatsncnenavsacndesteeesad LOSE CMA ssiru TEXT OULD UE oon deaneastcereva pa a E NE EEREN tHEMMOCOUPIE Ss ni 2 cece raa aaa eras time manual synchronization of a time adjust on Start aCthOMncccniscnsncdseesacgaragene Time MOAN sisese ia EES timeout timers 3 tademaikS eroari a REN n e E ATE ii transferring Via FT Pesce tices denenvehan dds greece 1 48 transmitted commands setting Of c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 57 IWO Wire SYSTE Miaa Serene tiie ketenes 2 8 user invalid SCF AGCO araa a a aaa iaa aaa user information USEF PASSWOMN sissien aesuoueeareticee USOP ONIVIIEQG ieciveessrecciscencsesincnsectaceasdnarsasndiedeatdendiucateeenaeres user registration Sers SIMUIAMCOUS esstiissacendescee sasaechl iniiai 6 1 Vo Version and FUNCOMS enis nenea E ENEA EEES iii Wo web Operation Ogi sespe a 4 16 Web page setting of 1 28 Web server sassssseeen 1 8 Web server Setting Oficiri sissioni pia iaaa 1 28 Web server function sssseeessesesesesresernnsessnnsrtnsernnseenne 1 28 X AON RO serete eane iaa ara SEE SA SENEN ETE EE 2 6 XON XON aeioeaio tva eanna eaaa reae yal EE 2 6 IM 04L41B01 17E Index 5
202. ent Data File on the DX from a PC You can access data files stored on the external storage medium Setting the FTP Server Server Function Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Server gt Server modes Server FTP Web Use SNTP Not Modbus Not EtherNet IP Not Use Not e FTP For the FTP item under Server select Use or Not don t use FTP Server Directory Output Format Release number 3 or later Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Environment tab gt Communication gt FTP Server Details Basic Setting Node FTP Server Details Output Directory Format ERs MS DOS UNIX e Directory Output Format Set the directory output format to MS DOS or UNIX When Not Using the Login Function You can connect to the server using the user name admin user or anonymous You can use a PC to access the DX via FTP You can perform operations such as retrieving directory and file lists from the external storage medium of the DX and transferring and deleting files In addition you can also retrieve the directory or file list and transfer files in the internal memory Accessing Data Files from the Web Browser 1 Click Data list 2 Click Memory or Media 3 From the file list select the files you want to retrie
203. enu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt IP address Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Host settings Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt DNS settings e DX2000 Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt IP Address Host settings Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt DNS settings IP address setting Host name setting Basic Setting Node i Basic Setting Mode IP address Host settings DHCP Not Host name PES LLL Domain name Fixed IP address Haastation com IP address 16 6 23 75 Subnet mask 255 255 255 Default gateway 10 6 23 1 IRS Not Input Clear Copy DNS setting Server search order Primary OEN E B Secondary P 8 8 Domain suffix search order Primary Secondary Set the IP address to a fixed IP address or obtain it automatically DHCP Consult with your network administrator for the network parameters such as the IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS IM 04L41B01 17E 1 13 39Rj19 U JOUIBY Z y Huis
204. er 3 or later Select PbS if you want to enable POP before SMTP To enable authenticated e mail transmission Authentication SMTP select Auth release numbers 4 and later When you select Auth the SMTP authorization items appear SMTP authorization Release numbers 4 and later To enable support for authenticated e mail transmission Authentication SMTP set a user name and password to use for authentication e User name Enter the user name You can enter up to 32 characters e Password Enter the password You can enter up to 32 characters Recipients e Recipient1 and Recipient2 Enter the e mail address Multiple e mail addresses can be entered in the box of one recipient When entering multiple addresses delimit each address with a space Up to 150 characters can be entered e Sender Enter the sender e mail address You can enter up to 64 characters POP3 Settings release number 3 or later If you need to use POP before SMTP specify the POP3 server that will be used for authentication For instructions on how to set the POP3 login method see Configuring the POP3 Server Connection later in this section e POP3 Server name Enter the POP3 server host name or IP address e Port number Use the default setting unless you need to change it The default value is 110 e Login name Enter the POP3 server login name e Password Enter the POP3 server login password using up to 32 characters Alarm Settings Specify the set
205. er number Select the server number from 1 to 16 e Regi registers on the server Set the register number of the server For an input register select in the range of 30001 to 39999 and 300001 to 365536 For a hold register select in the range of 40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465536 The register numbers you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 Specifying the Register Number Specify the register number on the DX by using the reference number such as the number 40001 written above For example on the Yokogawa UT351 Digital Indicating Controller the corresponding D register numbers and reference numbers are listed use the reference number D Reg No Ref No D0001 40001 For a server device that calls the register using a relative number add 30001 300001 40001 400001 or a similar number to obtain a reference number Register Type Relative Number Reference Number Expression Hold register 1004 41005 1004 40001 14567 414568 14567 400001 Input register 0000 30001 0000 30001 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 57 eju u JOUIBYI 24 BUISN IS 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function e Type Data type Select INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B or FLOAT L The data type you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 1 58 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function Examples of Setting
206. erausnsthns enceeein 1 61 loading to external input channels 1 60 lOG niais 1 38 log displaye aek 1 10 logging in after the password has been set 1 74 IM 04L41B01 17E Index 3 Index 1 47 l gin function Standard c cceserteses esti ecaracese 1 47 1 72 login limitation Sesiinae 2 20 Kolo ny ole Sae eE E E E E reer nt 4 14 logim PFOCCOUNG ustinen ancients cies App 3 M manual sampled data manual sampled data information cccceeseeeeeeees 4 30 Mapp gensser n 1 78 1 85 mast r command NUMDEM c cccscesiscsceseesstaccecesdcerestcesscavees 2 12 match time timers measured datai a measurement channels ccsscsccseenesecencsessscsesoenerncen tensa measurement FUNCTION 0 0 eee eects memory sampling basic setting mode during memory sampling setting mode during MENU key Sie seats arian EEA NACS MESSAGE SUMMALY eeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeserenreeaeenteeas Modbus operating status of Modbus setting example of MOdbUS CONE osissa a MODBUS CLIENT display selection menu 0 8 Modbus client setting example Of cceeeeeeeetetteees Modbus client setting of aes Modbus Cent Cto ssena Modbus communication lg s MOdbUS Maste vecssis css tess ccoeterssetastecovicesccvecssasatarienersces Modbus master setting Of cccceeseceeeeeteeeeeeteeteeeeeees Modbus master function setting example of a Modbus protocol spe
207. ernal input channel number Tag comment up to 32 characters Tag number up to 16 characters Query Example Description SX Syntax Query Example Description SL Syntax ST p1 Set the channel 002 tag tag comment to TAG2 ST002 TAG2 For the characters that you can use for tags see appendix 3 ASCII Character Codes Note that you cannot use semicolons or commas e You can specify computation channels on models with the M1 or PM1 math option You can specify external input channels on models with the MC1 external input channel option e Parameter p3 is invalid when you are not using the tag number The DX returns the previous value in response to a query Sets a display group release number 2 or earlier SX pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Display group number p2 Display group ON OFF p3 Display group name up to 16 characters p4 Channel configuration SX p1 Assign channels 001 003 004 to 006 to group number 1 and name the group GROUP2 SX1 ON GROUP2 001 003 004 006 Assign channels by using periods to separate each channel or a hyphen to specify a range of channels For the characters that you can use for group names see appendix 3 ASCII Character Codes Note that you cannot use semicolons or commas Ifyou are using the multi batch feature BT2 this command affects batch group 1 Ifyou are using the multi batch feature BT2 and batch group 1 is
208. ernal memory internal memory Style number 3 suffix code 3 7 Same as edition 6 Additions and improvements to explanations IM 04L41B01 17E How to Use This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual e Unit e k Denotes 1000 Example 5 kg 100 kHz e K Denotes 1024 Example 640 KB e Markings The following markings are used in this manual Refer to corresponding location on the instrument This symbol A appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling or use The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions WARNING Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious injury or death to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences CAUTION Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Note Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument e Bold characters Bold characters are mainly characters and numbers that appear on the display The symbol indicates key and menu operations Models Covered in This Manual This manual mainly describes the operating procedures on the DX1000 When the procedures differ between the DX2000 and the DX1000 the procedures including the menu operation
209. es 3 60 cc Disconnects the Ethernet connection can only be ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 60 used for Ethernet communications Setup measurement and computed data output FC Outputs screen image data ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 61 FE Outputs setup data ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 61 FD Outputs the most recent measured and computed data OSsb Yes Yes Yes 3 61 FF Outputs FIFO data OSsb Yes Yes Yes 3 61 FL Outputs a log alarm summary or message summary ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 62 FI Outputs an operation log ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 62 IS Outputs status information ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 62 FU Outputs user levels ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 63 FA Outputs internal DX information ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 63 ME Outputs data stored on the external storage medium OSsb Yes No No 3 63 and internal memory MO Manages and outputs the data stored in the internal OSsb Yes No No 3 63 memory Dedicated commands for RS 422 485 Esc O Opens an instrument ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 64 Esc C Closes an instrument ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 64 Common commands among instruments l Outputs instrument information ALL Yes Yes Yes 3 65 Maintenance Test Commands Available when using the maintenance test server function via Ethernet communications The administrator is admin The user is user Command Name Function Administrator User Page close Closes another device s connection No No 3 65 con Outputs connection information
210. es the status information The IS command is used to output the status information Status information 3 4 7 and 8 are cleared when they are output Status information 1 2 5 and 6 are not cleared when it is output and remains at 1 while the event is occurring When multiple connections are up filters can be specified for the individual connection Therefore the status information can be held for each connection Empty bits indicated as are fixed to 0 IM 04L41B01 17E syiodey snje s a 5 2 Bit Structure of the Status Information The following four groups of status information are output in response to a status information output request using the IS command For the output format see Status Information in section 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Status Information 1 Bit Name Description 0 Basic setting Set to 1 during basic setting mode 1 Memory sampling Set to 1 during recording memory sampling On models with the multi batch BT2 option this bit is set to 1 if any batch group is recording memory sampling 2 Computing Set to 1 while computation is in progress 3 Alarm activated Set to 1 while the alarm is activated 4 Accessing medium Set to 1 while the display event manual sampled report or screen image data file are being saved to the external storage medium 5 E mail started Set to 1 while the e mail transmission is started 6 Invalid user c
211. es to saver mode to 5 minutes and the event that causes the DX to return from saver mode to pressing of a key SQ2 DIMMER 5MIN KEY Description If p2 is set to OFF do not set p3 or p4 TC Sets the background color Syntax TC pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Screen WHITE BLACK p2 Historical trend screen WHITE CREAM LIGHTGRAY BLACK Query TC Example Set the screen background to black and the historical trend screen background to cream TCBLACK CREAM TP Sets automatic display group switching Syntax TP pl lt terminator gt p1 Auto switching interval 5S 10S 20S 30S 1MIN Query TP Example Switch between display groups at 5 s intervals TPSS NF Sets the favorite key operation Syntax NF pl1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Type of operation FAVORITE Operates as a favorite key HISTORY Operates as a key for switching to the historical display p2 Display group SAVED Displays the display group that was selected when you registered the favorite key CURRENT Displays the current display group p3 Historical trend time axis zoom SAVED Displays the historical trend using the time axis zoom setting that was used when you registered the favorite key CURRENT Displays the historical trend using the current time axis zoom setting Query NF Example Set the favorite key as a key used to switch to the historical display NF HISTORY Description Parameters p2 and p3 are valid when p1 is set to FAVORITE TR Sets the automatic switc
212. essage summary error log etc e Print the DX screen with an attached title and comment e Display reports Connect to the DX via FTP and retrieve files e Make an alarm sound when an alarm occurs on the DX For screen examples see Monitoring with the Browser in this section Operator Set the operator page The following operations can be carried out in addition to the functions available on the monitor page Switch the operation screen e Control the DX s DISP ENTER key arrow keys and favorite key e Write messages this operation cannot be performed on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option e Search data by date and time For screen examples see Monitoring with the Browser in this section Setting the monitor page Page type Select Monitor Setting On Off To display the monitor page on a browser select On otherwise select Off Access control To use access control select On On DXs without the AS1 advanced security option If you set this to On you must enter a user name and password to display the monitor page Set the user name and password through the Login item For details see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E On DxXs with the AS1 advanced security option If you set this to On you must enter a user name and password to display the monitor page Set the user name and password through the Login item See the Advanced Security Function AS1
213. ets computation MATH or clears the computation dropout status display Switches the execution mode between operation and setting Loads setup data for setting mode Saves setup data Sets communication input data Sets communication input of an external input channel Starts or stops the e mail transmission function Recovers Modbus manually Enters a string can only be used during serial communications Key operation command Loads a setup file for basic setting mode Clears measured and computed data and initializes setup data Resets a relative timer Resets a match time timer Sets an event switch Loads custom display screens Saves custom display screens Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode All modes Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode All modes Operation mode Basic setting mode Basic setting mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 3 37 No 3 37 No 3 37 No 3 37 No 3 39 No 3 39 No 3 39 No 3 39 No 3 39 No 3 40 No 3 40 Yes 3 40 No 3 40 No 3 40 No 3 41 No 3 41 No 3 41 No 3 41
214. ets the e mail sender address Basic setting mode Yes No 3 55 YX Sets the e mail SNTP server name Basic setting mode Yes No 3 55 YJ Sets the Modbus client s destination server Basic setting mode Yes No 3 55 YP Sets basic Modbus client settings Basic setting mode Yes No 3 55 YR Sets the Modbus client s transmit command Basic setting mode Yes No 3 55 WB Sets SNTP client parameters Basic setting mode Yes No 3 56 WC Sets the SNTP operation when memory start is Basic setting mode Yes No 3 56 executed YS Sets the serial interface Basic setting mode Yes No 3 56 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 7 spuewwoy el 3 2 A List of Commands Group Command Function Execution Administrator User Page Name Mode Setting continued YL Sets the operation of the Modbus master function Basic setting mode Yes No 3 57 YM Sets a transmit command of the Modbus master function Basic setting mode Yes No 3 57 WR Sets the instrument information output Basic setting mode Yes No 3 58 WI Sets the relay operation Basic setting mode Yes No 3 58 WE Sets the Modbus connection limitation Basic setting mode Yes No 3 58 WG Sets an IP address that is allowed to connect via Basic setting mode Yes No 3 59 Modbus WJ Sets the FTP transfer wait time Basic setting mode Yes No 3 59 WQ Sets PROFIBUS DP Basic setting mode Yes No 3 59 XE Activates basic settings Basic setting mode Yes No 3 59 YE Activates basic settings cold reset Basic setting mode Yes No 3 59 Output Commands
215. etting Measured and Computed Data Output EL Syntax Example Description Be sure to read the data within the following buffer period to prevent data dropouts DX1004 FIFO buffer size 240 cycles scan interval Maximum buffer period 240 x acquisition interval You cannot resend data if the buffer period elapses e Parameters p2 to p4 are valid when p1 is set to GET e Ifyou omit p4 all blocks are specified e Make sure that the last channel number is greater than or equal to the first channel number e For details on the FIFO data output process see appendix 5 e Set parameters p2 and p3 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Outputs a log alarm summary or message summary FL pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Log type COM Communication F TPC FTP client ERR Operation errors LOGIN Login log WEB Web operation EMAIL E mail SNTP SNTP access log DHCP DHCP access log ALARM Alarm summary MSG Message summary MODBUS Modbus communication log SETTIN Change settings log p2 Maximum log readout length 1 to 200 When p1 is set to COM MODBUS or SETTING 1 to 1000 when p1 is set to ALARM 1 to 450 when p1 is set to MSG 1 to 50 When p1 is set to a value other than those listed above p3 Batch group number Output the 10 most recent operation error logs FLERR 10 e Outputs the log that is stored in the DX e If you omit p2 all written logs are output e Parameter p3 is valid when multi batch BT2 is in
216. etting Commands Example Description TAG PRIORITY Tag prioritized display DISP_GROUP Group number display SEPARATOR When p2 is set to LOG select from the items below LOGIN_LOG Login log ERROR_LOG Error log COMMU_LOG Communication log FTP_LOG FTP log WEB_LOG Web log MAIL_LOG E mail log SNTP_LOG SNTP log DHCP_LOG DHCP log MODBUS_LOG Modbus log OPERATE LOG Operation log SETTING LOG Change settings log DISP_ITEM Switches the displayed items SEPARATOR When p2 is set to 4PANEL select from the items below 4PANEL1 to 4PANEL4 Selects 4 panel SEPARATOR When p2 is set to CUSTOM_PANEL select from the items below INTERNAL1 to INTERNAL3 Selects one from internal 1 to 3 EXTERNAL1 to EXTERNAL25 Selects one from external 1 to 25 NEW New When p2 is set to ANNUNCIATOR select from the items below EXPAND Expand SEPARATOR Register the following items to the Trend main menu s sub menu SCALE and DIGITAL SM DISP_SUB TREND SCALE DIGITAL Items that you can set for p3 and subsequent parameters vary depending on p2 If parameter p3 and subsequent parameters are omitted all menu items are hidden A command error occurs if you specify the same menu item multiple times You can specify up to three separators If you specify more than three an error occurs You cannot specify EXPAND for log and 4 panel You cannot omit parameters using delimiters Go The SM DISP_SUB command causes the DX to return sub menu items who
217. ew mode limitations on the screens that the DX can switch to depending on the screen mode To switch the operation screen Batch overview mode Syntax UD pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 p10 Overview display Modbus master status lt terminator gt display Modbus client status display relay pl Screen type 4 status display report display stacked bar p2 Automatic display switching ON OFF graph custom display annunciator display p3 Switches between all channel display and and event switch status display group display ALL GROUP Batch single mode p4 Scale display ON OFF Trend display digital display bar graph p5 Digital display ON OFF display overview display alarm summary p6 Message display options display message summary display memory 1 Normal display summary display historical trend display and 2 List display custom display p7 Trend space ON OFF e When multi batch BT2 is in use you cannot ps Auto zone ON OFF specify a display group that does not belong p9 Fine grid ON OFF 3 38 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 5 Control Commands p10 Tag prioritized display ON OFF Example Enable automatic display switching switch to the group display turn on the scale display and turn off the digital display UD4 ON GROUP ON OFF Description e Parameter p2 is valid for the trend digital and bar graph displays Use the SE command to set the switching interval Parameters p3 to p7 are valid for the trend display
218. examples given in this manual spaces are not used e You can omit the parameters that do not need to be changed from their current settings However delimiters cannot be omitted Example SR001 2V lt terminator gt e If multiple parameters are omitted and delimiters occur at the end of the command those delimiters can be omitted Example SROO1 VOLT lt terminator gt SRO01 VOLT lt terminator gt e The number of digits of the parameters below is fixed If the number is exceeded when entering the command a syntax error results e Date yy MM DD 8 characters YY Enter the lower two digits of the year MM Month DD Day Time HH MM SS 8 characters HH Hour MM Minute SS Second e Channel number 3 characters e Relay number 3 characters IM 04L41B01 17E spuewwoy el 3 1 Command Syntax Query e A question mark is used to specify a query e By placing a query after a command or parameter the setting information of the corresponding command can be queried Some commands cannot execute queries For the query syntax of each command see sections 3 4 to 3 7 Example 1 SR pl SR or SRp1 can be executed Example 2 SA pl p2 SA SAp1 and SAp1 p2 can be executed Delimiter e A comma is used as a delimiter e Parameters are separated by delimiters Sub Delimiter e A semicolon is used as a sub delimiter e By separating each command with a sub delimiter up to 10 commands can be specified one after a
219. ey are cleared when the event clears e The status information is made up of bits that correspond to each event Each bit can be turned ON OFF with a filter e If an event occurs for a bit set to OFF by the filter status information 3 4 7 and 8 discard the event Status information 1 2 5 and 6 hold the event e The default filter setting is all ON 4 26 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Ethernet Information The FA command is used to output the data Syntax EACRLF IP Address ss XXX XXX XXX XXXCRLF Subnet_mask XXX XXX XXX XXXCRLF Default Gateway _ XXX XXX XXX XXXCRLF Primary DNS 2XXX XXX XXX XXXCRLF Secondary DNS XxXxX xxXx xxx xxxCRLF Host Yyy ores CRLF Domain SA Ay A ae CRLF ENCRLF XXX IP address number 000 to 255 yyy Host name up to 64 characters zzz Domain name up to 64 characters IM 04L41B01 17E 4 27 sasuodsay a 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data File List The ME command is used to output the data e The file sizes and a list of files from the specified directory in the external storage medium or internal memory are output e Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_ssssssss fff ee n xxxe CRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 Ss Second 00 to 59 ssssssssss Data size of the file 0 to 99999999 byte s n s File name 51 characters including the extension If itis less than
220. eyeyeyeyeyeyeyeyeyeyele eyeye yess ye 19 219 2e ON Internal switch 30 Lot number _ ON 1 Valid range 0 to 99999999 When the multi batch function BT2 option is in use this is the lot number of batch group 1 o 409506 Batch number Memory start or stop Alarm acknowledge Up to 17 registers up to 33 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less When the multi batch function BT2 option is in use this is the batch number of batch group 1 Stop 0 Start 1 When the multi batch function BT2 option is in use this register controls memory start and stop of batch group 1 Applies to all alarms lt When writing gt Execute alarm ACK 1 fixed lt When reading alarm summary gt Alarm off 0 Alarm illuminated 1 Alarm blinking occurring 2 Alarm blinking not occurring 3 Computation operation lt When writing gt Stop 0 Start 1 Reset 2 Computation dropout ACK 4 When the multi batch function BT2 option is in use this register performs computation reset of batch group 1 lt When reading gt Stop 0 Start 1 You cannot read this register when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use 6 12 IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Register Description 409512 Manual sampling start Manual aca ee a 0 Manual trigger 1 Snapshot INT16 or other action aca ee a 410001 to Batch 1 l
221. f Administrator User Connections Setting measurement 3 1 2 34260 tcp server Maintenance test server 1 1 1 34261 tcp FTP server 2 2 2 21 tcp Web server HTTP 1 80 tcp SNTP server 123 udp Modbus server 2 502 tcp Instrument information 34264 udp server EthereNet IP Explicit message 10 44818 tcp EthereNet IP 44818 udp Explicit messagee EthereNet IP 2222 udp Implicit message 1 There are user limitations For details see section 1 1 2 The port numbers are fixed 3 The default port number You can set the value in the range of 1 to 65535 Use the default port number unless there is a special reason not to do so 4 Make sure that port number settings are not duplicated 5 On models with the AS1 advanced security option connections to the setting measurement server are divided into connections to the setting function and connections to the monitoring function Function Maximum Number of Simultaneous Uses Port Number Number of Setting Monitoring Connections Connection Connection Setting measurement 3 1 2 34260 tcp server suonesyioeds l IM 04L41B01 17E 6 1 6 2 Serial Interface Specifications RS 232 Specifications Connector type D Sub 9 pin plug Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to the EIA 574 standard for the 9 pin interface of the EIA 232 RS 232 standard Connection Point to point Transmission mode Half duplex Synchronizat
222. face connect a converter Host computer i RS 422 485 or host device terminal on the DX Host device side E i RS 422 485 RS 422 485 Host computer terminal on the DX Host device side lt i Converter RS 232 RS 422 485 rr eee rT asje IM 04L41B01 17E 2 7 eu zu jenas y BursnN fy 2 3 Connecting the DX Connection example to the host device A connection can be made with a host device having a RS 232 RS422 or RS 485 port In the case of RS 232 a converter is used See the connection examples below for a typical converter terminal For details see the manual that comes with the converter RS 422 485 Port Converter SDA TD SDB TD RDA RD RDB RD SG SHIELD FG EARTH There is no problem of connecting a 220 Q terminator at either end if YOKOGAWA s PLCs or temperature controllers are also connected to the communication line Four wire system Generally a four wire system is used to connect to a host device In the case of a four wire system the transmission and reception lines need to be crossed over m Terminator external 120 Q 1 2W or greater Host device RS 422 485 side terminal on the DX SDA SDA N SDA O SDA Q SDA O W SD B SD B SDB O SDB O SDB O Y gt RD_A RD A RDA O RD A O RD A O
223. for setting mode LO pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 File name up to 32 characters p2 Medium 0 CF slot 1 USB Load setup data for setting mode from the setup file named SETFILE1 LOSETFILE1 Do not specify the extension when specifying the file name You can set p2 to 1 on models with the USB1 USB interface option Ifyou omit parameter p2 the medium is set to CF slot You cannot use this command to load setup data for basic setting mode To load setup data for both setting and basic setting modes use the YO command You cannot use this command when there is no external storage medium inserted in the DX Saves setup data LI pl lt terminator gt p1 File name up to 32 characters p2 Medium 0 CF slot 1 USB Example Description CM Syntax Query Example Description CE Syntax Query Example Description EM Syntax Saves setup data for both setting and basic setting modes to a file named SETFILE2 on the CF card LISETFILE2 e Do not specify the extension when specifying the file name e You can set p2 to 1 on models with the USB1 USB interface option e If you omit parameter p2 the medium is set to CF slot e An extension is attached to the file that you save e You cannot use this command when there is no external storage medium inserted in the DX Sets communication input data CM p1 p2 lt terminator gt p1 Communication input datal number p2 Communication input
224. function of computation channel 107 set the sampling interval to 1 minute and the number of samples to 20 SI107 ON 1MIN 20 Description e You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e Do not set p3 or p4 when p2 is set to OFF Set the sampling interval to a value greater than the scan interval to MATHRESET and p5 is set to ALL the SJ ___ Sets a TLOG timer calculated values for all computation channels Syntax SJ pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt are reset p1 Computation channel number An event that has OFF attached to it p2 Timer number responds to the logical negation of the p3 Conversion of the unit of time for TLOG corresponding event that does not have OFF SUM computation attached to it The actions and settings that OFF Do not convert the event can support are the same as those S Converts as though the physical that the corresponding event that does not values are integrated in units of have OFF attached to it can support seconds On models with the AS1 advanced security MIN Converts as though the physical option you cannot set p4 to TRIGGER or values are integrated in units of PANELLOAD minutes H Converts as though the physical SK Sets a constant values are integrated in units of Syntax SK pl p2 lt terminator gt hours p4 Reset ON OFF p5 Timer type p1 Constant number p2 Constant 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 5 significant TIMER
225. g the front panel keys For details see section 1 1 e Fora description of the settings required to use this function see section 2 4 For information about how to use the function see section 2 8 PROFIBUS DP CP1 option release number 3 or later As a PROFIBUS DP slave device the DX can e Output measured values of measurement channels e Output a portion of the computed values of computation channels Enter data to a portion of the communication input data For operating instructions see the PROFIBUS DP Communication Interface User s Manual IM04L41B01 19E 2 2 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 2 Flow of Operation When Using the Serial Interface The flow chart below shows the procedure to set the communication using RS 232 or RS 422 RS 485 The procedure varies for RS 232 and RS 422 RS 485 Start of setting Communication type RS 422 485 RS 232 Setting the handshaking Set the protocol Set the Modbus master Set the address Configuration required when Modbus master is selected in the protocol setting IM 04L41B01 17E 2 3 gj zu elas y Huis 2 3 Connecting the DX Connecting the cable Connect a cable to the serial port on the DX rear panel RS 232 Connection Procedure Connect a cable to the 9 pin D sub RS 232 connector Connector pin arrangement and signal names 123 4 5 v4 444 g T Rear panel I 6 7 8 O l
226. g mode Yes No 3 48 WH Sets alarm hysteresis Basic setting mode Yes No 3 48 XV Sets the scan interval and A D integral time Basic setting mode Yes No 3 48 XB Sets burnout detection Basic setting mode Yes No 3 49 Xd Sets RJC Basic setting mode Yes No 3 49 XM Sets memory sampling conditions Basic setting mode Yes No 3 49 XT Sets the temperature unit Basic setting mode Yes No 3 49 RF Sets key lock Basic setting mode Yes No 3 49 RN Sets basic key login Basic setting mode Yes No 3 50 RP Sets user limitations Basic setting mode Yes No 3 50 RO Sets the type of report and when to create reports Basic setting mode Yes No 3 51 RM Sets a report channel Basic setting mode Yes No 3 52 XG Sets the time zone Basic setting mode Yes No 3 52 XN Sets the date format Basic setting mode Yes No 3 52 YB Sets host information Basic setting mode Yes No 3 52 YD Sets network parameters Basic setting mode Yes No 3 53 YA Sets the IP address subnet mask and default gateway Basic setting mode Yes No 3 53 YK Sets keepalive Basic setting mode Yes No 3 53 RU Sets DNS parameters Basic setting mode Yes No 3 53 ws Sets a server Basic setting mode Yes No 3 53 ww Sets Webpage parameters Basic setting mode Yes No 3 53 YQ Sets communication timeout Basic setting mode Yes No 3 53 YT Sets FTP transfer timing Basic setting mode Yes No 3 54 YU Sets what kind of information to send using e mail Basic setting mode Yes No 3 54 YV Sets an e mail recipient address Basic setting mode Yes No 3 55 YW S
227. groups e When reading you can access the following registers simultaneously e Internal switches 1 to 30 Memory start stop for batches 1 to 12 Event level switches 1 to 30 When the Data Type in a Command Differs from the DX Data Type Every DX data value has a set data type If you access the DX using the same data type all of the data including special data are sent to the DX without any change If you access the DX using a data type that is different from the DX data type the data type is converted For details on the conversion 6 rules see Communication Considerations in the DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 EtherNet IP Communication Interface User s Manual IM04L41B01 18E 2 3 Modbus Error Response Common to Modbus server and Modbus slave Q The DX returns the following error codes to a client or master device S Code Error Description a 1 ILLEGAL FUNCTION An attempt was made to execute a function that is not Invalid function code supported 2 ILLEGAL DATAADDRESS Failed to access the register Invalid register number 3 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE When reading the specified number of registers was less Invalid number of registers than or equal to zero or greater than or equal to 126 When writing the specified number of registers was less than or equal to zero or greater than or equal to 124 7 NEGATIVE Alot number that is outside the valid range was ACKNOWLEDGE entered Invalid contents written e Invalid ch
228. h a 0 and add to the unsigned short data unsigned short s unsigned char e 21 7 tmp tmp c 1 0 tmp c 0 unsigned char p csum tmp s if csum csum amp Oxffff csum gt gt 16 amp Oxffff Oxffftf Add the overflowed digits csum csum Oxffff If the digit overflows again add a 1 return csum amp Oxffff bit inversion RS 422 485 Dedicated Responses The following table shows dedicated commands for the RS 422 RS 485 interface and their responses sasuodsay gt Command Syntax Meaning Response ESC Oxx CRLF Opens the device Response from the device with the specified address ESC Oxx CRLF No response when the device with the specified address does not exist ESC Cxx CRLF Closes the instrument Response from the device with the specified address ESC Cxx CRLF e No response when the device with the specified address does not exist Some of the possible reasons that cause the condition in which the device with the specified address cannot be found are a command error the address not matching that of the device the device is not turned ON and the device not being connected via the serial interface e The xx in the table indicates the device address Specify the address that is assigned to the instrument from 01 to 99 Only one device can be opened at any given time e When a device is opened with the ESC O command all commands
229. hannel p4 Format version see Setup Channel Information Output in Response Format an oO fF NY FP 1 Format for Release number 2 or Earlier format version 1 2 Format for Release number 3 or later format version 2 Output the setup data of setting mode for channels 001 to 005 from the DX FEO 001 005 Make sure that the last channel number is greater than or equal to the first channel number Parameters p2 and p3 are valid when p1 is set to 0 1 2 5 or 6 If you omit p2 or p3 all channels are specified Set parameters p2 and p3 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e Parameter p4 is valid when p1 is set to 5 If you omit p4 when it is valid p4 is set to 1 Outputs the most recent measured computed data FD pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Output data type 0 Most recent measured computed and external input data in ASCII format Example Description FF Syntax Example Description i Most recent measured computed and external input data in binary format 6 Relay status and internal switch status 7 Event level switch status p2 First channel number measurement computation or external input channel p3 Last channel number measurement computation or external input channel Output the most recent measured and computed data for channels 001 to 005 from the DX in ASCII format FDO 001 005 The most recent measured and computed data correspond to the most re
230. he FTP When Using the Login Function on a DX With the AS1 Advanced Security Option Port Number You can connect to the server using the user name admin user or anonymous The password is optional You can only perform the operations that can be performed when you log into a DX as anonymous You cannot delete or change the names of files on the server the DX nor can you transfer files to the server The default value is 21 To change the setting Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Environment tab gt Communication gt Service port For the selectable range of port numbers see section 6 1 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 47 aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 7 Transferring Data Files from the DX The display and event data files report data files snapshot data files setup files and change settings log files created in the internal memory of the DX can be automatically transferred using FTP at the time the files are created Files to Be Transferred via FTP Display data file The display or event data files are automatically transferred to the FTP destination described in the next section at appropriate times File Type Description Display data file Data files are automatically transferred at each file save interval Event data file Files are automatically transferred when the data length of data is
231. heck operation Set to 1 only during the period when there is an invalid user and the invalid user acknowledge operation has not finished the period during which the invalid user icon appears on the DX screen 7 1 Advanced security AS1 option Status Information 2 Bit Name Description 0 Setting function communication login Set to 1 while a user is logged in to the DX setting function through Ethernet communication 1 m 2 Memory end Set to 1 while the free space in the internal memory or external storage medium is low This is the same as the internal memory and CF card status of the device information output F1 or F2 options see section 1 9 in the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual 3 Logged in through keys Set to 1 while logged in through keys 4 Login not possible Set to 1 while the multi login function is not being used and login through key operations login to the setting function through Ethernet communication and login through the sending of the LL command through serial communication are not possible because another user is logged in 5 6 Detecting measurement error Set to 1 while error is being detected in the A D converter or a burnout is being detected 7 Detecting communication error Set to 1 if any command is stopping the communication on the Modbus master or Modbus client Advanced security AS1 option Status Information 3
232. her user is logged in This only applies to DXs with the AS1 advanced security option 410804 Individual alarm ACK Specifies the alarm released by an individual aa channel number alarm ACK operation The channel and alarm ivi level are accessed successively This only applies inal acknowledgment alarm to DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Notation used in the Access column W Writable R Readable If you read a write only W register zero is always read If you write to a read only R register an error occurs Notation used in the Simultaneous access column Blank Indicates a range of registers that can be written to or read from simultaneously You cannot simultaneously access across a solid line Not accessible IM 04L41B01 17E 6 17 suonesoads l 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications How to Use Item Description Data type STRnn Registers in which ASCII codes are entered starting with the specified register It is terminated with a NULL character 0 The number of characters that can be entered that includes the NULL character is indicated in the nn section Example of setting the batch number STR36 type of batch group 1 to ABCD denotes any value Register Value to Write Hexadecimal Notation 410003 A B 4142H 410004 C D 4344H 410005 yo 00 H 410006 to 410020 pi H Write the entire character string using one command In the
233. hile the DX is saving or loading setup data You can use this command on models with the M1 or PM1 option e When multi batch BT2 is in use p2 is valid when p1 is set to 2 reset computation If you omit p2 it is the same as setting p2 to zero If p2 is set to zero the DX resets the values of all computation channels Set parameter p2 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Switches the execution mode between operation and setting DS pl lt terminator gt 3 40 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 5 Control Commands Example Description LO Syntax Example Description LI Syntax pl Mode 0 Operation mode i Basic setting mode Set the mode to basic setting DS1 You cannot set p1 to 1 when the DX is recording memory sampling or computing is formatting an external storage medium or is storing data to an external storage medium You cannot set p1 to zero when the DX is formatting an external storage medium or is storing data to an external storage medium To activate the settings you have changed using basic setting commands you must use the XE command to save the settings Be sure to use the XE command to save the settings before switching the execution mode back to operation If you do not save the settings and change the execution mode back to operation the DX returns to the previous settings This command is invalid on models with the AS1 advanced security option Loads setup data
234. hing back to default display Syntax TR pl lt terminator gt pl Automatic return time limit OFF 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H Query TR Example Set the automatic return time limit to 5 minutes TR5MIN TQ __ Sets a timer When p2 is set to OFF no timer Syntax TQ pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Timer number p2 Timer type OFF When p2 is set to ABSOLUTE absolute timer Syntax TQ pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt p1 Timer number p2 Timer type ABSOLUTE p3 Time interval 1MIN to 6MIN 10MIN 12MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H to 4H 6H 8H 12H 24H 3 28 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands p4 Reference time hh fixed format hh Hour 00 to 23 When p2 is set to RELATIVE relative timer Syntax TQ pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt p1 Timer number p2 Timer type RELATIVE p3 Time hh mm fixed format hh Hour 00 to 24 mm Minute 00 to 59 p4 Reset at computation start OFF ON Query TQ p1 Example Set the timeout value of timer number 1 to 10 hours 30 minutes Do not reset the timer when computation is started TQ1 RELATIVE 10 30 OFF Description e Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling in progress If you are using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling e You can set up to 24 00 time when using a relative timer TK Sets a match time timer Wh
235. http dx1000 adv daqstation com operator htm or http 192 168 1 100 operator htm In the example the domain name is set to adv daqstation com the host name to dx1000 and the IP address to 192 168 1 100 Login On DXs without the AS1 advanced security option You need to configure the following settings to use the login function INo Setting Description and Reference Communication To access the DX through a communication interface you must login Security gt log in For details see section 8 2 in the DX1000 DX1000N or Communication DX2000 User s Manual 2 Login Register the users who can access the Web server For details see section 8 2 in the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual 3 Web page Set Access control to On in the operator and monitor pages Only users whose mode is set to Web Com or Key Com can access the DX Web page When you access the page you will be prompted for a user name and password Enter the user name and password that you set in item 2 in the table Connect to 10 0 23 75 2 x O The server 10 0 23 75at requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name E password I Remember my password Lio ae 1 30 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Login On DXs with the AS1 advanced security op
236. iator mode is EV Syntax Example Description CL Syntax Example CV Syntax on and the sequence is not ISA M an error occurs e If you send this command with p1 set to 2 before acknowledging the alarms nothing happens e Set p2 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e p2 and p3 are only valid when p1 1 The setting p1 1 is only valid on models with the AS1 advanced security option Executes manual sample generates a manual trigger takes a snapshot or causes a timeout EV pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Type of operation 0 Executes manual sampling 1 Generates a manual trigger 2 Takes a snapshot 3 Causes a timeout in display data 4 Causes a timeout in event data p2 Batch group number 0 All groups 1 2 Batch group number Execute manual sampling EVO ON using the event data sampling condition command TE command This command is equivalent to a key trigger e When multi batch BT2 is in use p2 is valid when p1 is set to 3 or 4 If you omit p2 it is the same as setting p2 to zero e Set parameter p2 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Executes manual SNTP CL pl lt terminator gt pl Executes manual SNTP O Synchronize the clock CLO Switches between normal and secondary trend interval CV pl lt terminator gt p1 Trend interval 0 1 0 Switches to the normal trend interval a Switches to the secondary trend interval EV1 is only valid when the key trigger is
237. ication two users cannot be logged in with the same name Ifyou try to connect to the DX from a PC when no administrators have been registered the DX returns the following response E1 402 Select username from admin or user e Selecting admin is the same as logging in to the setting function at the administrator level e Selecting user is the same as logging in to the monitoring function at the user level except that you can t use the CM or CE commands Logging In Before the Password Has Been Set Immediately after you register a user on the DX the default password is used as the login password for that user When you log in for the first time you will be prompted to change the password 1 Specify the host name or IP address of the DX that you want to connect to Or specify the port number 34260 of the setting measurement server The DX returns the following message E1 406 Select function from setting or monitor 2 Enter setting to log in to the setting function Enter monitor to log in to the monitoring function The DX returns the following message E1 400 Input username 3 Enter the user name The DX returns the following message E1 405 Input user ID 4 Enter the user ID The DX returns the following message E1 401 Input password 5 Enter the default password User Default password Administrator 1 to 5 Admin1 to Admin5 User 1 to 90 User01 to
238. ient MW100s Modbus servers on the network can be automatically assigned to the DX2000 This function can be used only on DX2000s with the external input channel function MC1 option Setup Preparation Set the MW100s so that measurements can be started IP address system construction range setting and the like of the MW100s to be automatically assigned For details see the user s manual of the MW100 Setup Procedure If the IP address of the DX is not set set it before carrying out the procedure below 1 Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Modbus client gt Auto setting 2 Carefully read the displayed precautions Select Yes to execute the auto setting Select No to return to the screen operation 3 From the list of MW100s that is displayed select the MW100s to be connected using the up and down arrow keys and press DISP ENTER The selected MW100s are assigned to the external input channel of the DX Displays the IP address or host name Displays the MW100 unit number The list displays up to 16 units from the smallest unit number Displays the status of the external input channel assignments No settings Status in which the MW100 is not assigned automatically Not Ready Status in which the MW100 cannot be connected Numeric display Displays the number of the assigned external input chan
239. input channel 30000 to 30000 it is set to the span upper limit 30000 or lower limit 30000 Specify the settings such as the alarm tag and the area display of the color scale band of each channel after the auto setting is complete Note Precautions When Assigning Channels to the External Input Channels The MW100 channels are assigned in unit of 10 channels to the external input channels If the MW100 measurement module consists of less than 10 channels OFF is assigned to the external input channels for the section without channels An error occurs if the number of MW100 channels to be automatically set is greater than the number of available external input channels If the range setting of a MW100 channel is set to SKIP the external input channel of the DX is set to OFF If a MW100 unit contains a module that cannot be set automatically only the channels that can be assigned are assigned to the external input channels of the DX If a new MW100 is added auto setting is executed again At this point all the settings are cleared Therefore you must execute the auto setting again for all MW100s If you are connecting MW100s that can be automatically set and MW100s that cannot be automatically set or other Modbus devices automatically set the MW100s that can be automatically set first and then manually set the connection of the remaining devices IM 04L41B01 17E 1 65 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1
240. ion Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 bps Start bit 1 bit fixed Data length Select 7 or 8 bits To output data in BINARY format be sure to set the data length to 8 bits Parity Select odd even or none Stop bit 1 bit fixed Hardware handshaking Select whether to fix the RS and CS signals to TRUE or to use the signal for flow control Software handshaking Select whether to use the X ON and X OFF signals to control the transmitted data only or both the transmitted and received data X ON ASCII 11H X OFF ASCII 13H Received buffer size 2047 bytes RS 422 485 Specifications Terminal block type 6 point terminal block terminal screws ISO M4 nominal length 6mm Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to EIA 422 RS 422 and EIA 485 RS 485 standards Connection Multidrop Four wire type 1 32 Two wire type 1 31 Transmission mode Half duplex Synchronization Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 bps Start bit 1 bit fixed Data length Select 7 or 8 bits Parity Select odd even or none Stop bit 1 bit fixed Received buffer size 2047 bytes Escape sequence Open and close Electrical characteristics FG SG SDB SDA RDB and RDA six points SG SDB SDA RDB and RDA terminals and the internal circuit of the DX is functionally isolated FG terminal is the frame ground Communication
241. is The of the batch groups is recording memory set values of invalid parameters are bolded sampling When the multi batch function is invalid e Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 TU MEMORYSTART STOP ALL a GROUPCHANGE 2 SI Sets the rolling average function TU MESSAGE 5 ALL 1 1 TU MESSAGE 5 SELECT 10 1 When the multi batch function is valid TU MESSAGE 5 ALL 1 3 Example Execute memory start with the remote control input terminal 1 TUREMOTE 1 MEMORYSTART Description e Set various numbers relay number internal switch number etc by referring to the table in section 3 3 You cannot select some of the p4 action type settings depending on the p2 event type setting You cannot select some of the p4 action type settings depending on other DX settings or depending on the installed options The p4 ALARMDISPLAYRESET setting is valid when the annunciator function is enabled and the annunciator sequence is set to ISA M Set the batch group number by referring to the table in section 3 3 When multi batch BT2 is in use p4 is set of a computation channel Syntax SI pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Computation channel number p2 Moving average ON OFF p3 Sampling interval 1S 2S 3S 4S 5S 6S 10S 12S 15S 20S 30S 1MIN 2MIN 3MIN 4MIN 5MIN 6MIN 10MIN 12MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H p4 Number of samples 1 to 1500 Query SI p1 Example Turn on the rolling average
242. is not in use Message Write a message Does not appear on DXs with the AS1 advanced security Refresh Alarm sound OFF Anto Refresh VATION option e Select the trend screen Data list Print page Directly select the group you want to display or Soin EA TREND i i a Select Group gt iii Select the historical screen Directly select the group you want to display Select Group gt Data Range Search Search by date and time Search data by date and time Select Screen gt Select other displays You can select the overview 4 display digital display bar raph display or custom display DISP grap play play lt 4 gt ZENTER Arrow keys and DISP ENTER key Vv Carry out the same operation as the corresponding keys on the DX Favorite key Carry out the same operation as the corresponding key on the DX 1 34 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser When the multi batch function BT2 option is in use Batch single mode Refresh Alarm Pert OFF Auto Refresh YAT ay 100 Data list Print page 0 SCREENMODE Select the screen mode Select Screen Mode gt v List box TREND SCREENMODE is lect G Select Screen Mode gt Select Croup gt Select Screen Mode gt Batch Overview Batch Group1 99eJ 19 U JUIN Oy Huish Batch Group2 Batch Group3 4 Data Range Search Batch Group Select Screen
243. ister number a number such as 400001 referred to as the reference number listed under Modbus Server Function in section 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications e If you are using a custom communication program specify the relative number in relation to the reference number Compute the relative number in the manner indicated in the examples below Examples The relative number for input register 300100 is 99 which is the difference between 300100 and 300001 300100 300001 99 The relative number for input register 400011 is 10 which is the difference between 400011 and 400001 400011 400001 10 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 55 aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function The DX is used as a Modbus client For the Modbus specifications see section 6 3 Setting the Modbus Client Carry out the steps below to enable the DX to read the data of another device or write data to another device using Modbus 0 Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Modbus client Basic settings Destination server settings hernet z z Basic Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Hodbus client basic settings Server number Read cycle Port Modbus server name Unit No Retry interval 18min 1 502 fhodbus daqstation com Auto 2 502 192 168 1 80 Fixed 3 3 502 Auto
244. it number registration AUTO Do not use the unit number FIXED Use a fixed unit number p5 Unit number 0 to 255 YJ p1 For server number 3 set the port number to 502 the host name to dx2000 the unit number registration to FIXED and the unit number to 127 YJ3 502 dx2000 FIXED 127 Sets basic Modbus client settings YP pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Read cycle 125MS 250MS 500MS 1S 2S 5S 10S p2 Retry interval OFF 10S 20S 30S 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H YP Set the read cycle to 500 ms and the retry reconnection interval to 10 min YP500MS 10MIN Sets the Modbus client s transmit command YR pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Command number 1 to 16 p2 Command type OFF R R M W W M Parameters p3 and subsequent parameters vary depending on the p2 setting as follows When p2 is set to OFF There are no parameters after p2 When p2 is set to R read external input channels p3 First channel external input channel number p4 Last channel external input channel number p5 Server number 1 to 16 p6 First register number 30001 to 39999 40001 to 49999 300001 to 365536 400001 to 465536 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 55 ginning e 3 6 Basic Setting Commands p7 Register data type INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L When p2 is set to R M read communication input data p3 First channel communication input data number p4 Last channel communication
245. ith the AS1 advanced security option Path name specifications MO Syntax The first level directories point to the following locations Path that starts with MEMO DATA Internal memory Path that starts with DRVO External storage medium Path names are case sensitive You can access files whose name is less than or equal to 48 characters that are within three directory levels Wild cards have the following limitations e Asterisks can be used in p2 when p1 is set to DIR e Ifa path ends with a slash it is equivalent to specifying for the path Example DRV0 DATAO and DRVO DATAO are equivalent For the file name and for the extension characters at the asterisk and subsequent characters can be any characters Example Let us assume that there are five files ab001 ef1 ab002 ef1 ab001 ef2 ab002 ef2 and ab001 yyy If you specify ab 01 ef1 ab001 efi and ab002 ef1 are selected If you specify ab001 e 1 ab001 ef1 and ab001 ef2 are selected Outputs the data stored in the internal memory MO pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Type of operation DIR Data list output GET Data output SIZE Data size output IM 04L41B01 17E 3 63 ceases eo 3 8 Output Commands Setting 3 9 Output Commands RS 422 485 Example p2 Output data type MANUAL Manual sampled data REPORT Report p3 Specified file name Output report data 000142 080102 004127 H_ DAR from the DX MOGET REPORT 00
246. k volume k pump volume k m3 03 02 1 00 00 03 03 1 00 00 03 04 1 00 00 03 05 1 00 00 03 06 1 00 00 03 07 1 00 00 03 08 1 00 00 03 09 1 00 00 03 10 1 00 00 03 11 1 00 00 03 12 1 00 00 03 13 1 00 00 03 14 1 00 00 03 15 1 00 00 03 16 1 00 00 03 17 1 00 00 03 18 1 00 00 03 19 1 00 00 03 20 1 00 00 03 21 1 00 00 03 22 1 00 00 03 23 1 00 00 03 24 1 00 00 03 25 1 00 00 03 26 1 00 00 03 27 1 00 00 03 28 1 00 00 03 29 1 00 00 03 30 1 00 00 03 31 1 00 00 04 01 1 00 00 Please enter comments IM 04L41B01 17E 1 39 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Daily and monthly reports Plant Section 50 Industrial water Daily report Start time 2007 03 01 01 00 00 Timeout time Minimum pump Maximum pump Average pump Integrated volume k volume k volume k pump volume k Flow rate m3 03 02 1 00 00 03 03 1 00 00 03 31 1 00 00 04 01 1 00 00 Monthly report Start time 2007 03 01 01 00 00 Timeout time Minimum pump Maximum pump Average pump Integrated Flow rate volume k volume k volume k pump volume k m3 04 01 1 00 00 Please enter comments e Setting the Report Layout This item only appears on models with the computation function M1 or PM1 option when the basic setting items are set as
247. lay Digital display Message display Trend space Auto switching Expand Fine grid Auto zone display or normal display Tag prioritized display When p2 is set to DIGITAL select from the items below GROUP1 to GROUP36 AUTO EXPAND TAG_PRIORITY SEPARATOR Display group Auto switching Expand Tag prioritized display When p2 is set to BAR select from the items below GROUP1 to GROUP36 AUTO EXPAND TAG_PRIORITY SEPARATOR Display group Auto switching Expand Tag prioritized display MODBUS_CLIENT MODBUS_ MASTER RELAY EVENT SWITCH REPORT TO_HISTORY TO HISTORY _D TO HISTORY E TO_OVERVIEW SORT_KEY SORT_ORDER DISP_ITEM DATA_KIND DATE FILE SELECT SAVE REPORT_CHANNEL ALL SAVE MANUAL_SAVE REPORT SAVE EXPAND DATA _SAVE_MODE COLUMN_BAR COLUMN BAR _DISP ModbusTCP status display ModbusRTU status display Relay status display Event switch status display Report display To the historical display To historical display data To historical event data To the overview display Sort key switching Sort order switching Date user name switching Data type switching Date file name switching Select save Report channel display switching All save Save manual samples Save reports Expand Data save mode Stacked bar graph Single graph or dual graph COLUMN BAR SELECT Selects bar or group REPORT_GROUP1 to REPORT _GROUP6 Selects the report group IM 04L41B01 17E 3 35 3 4 S
248. le Description IN Syntax TT Display waveform horizontally set the message direction to vertical and display waveforms by clearing the current waveforms at memory start TTHORIZONTAL ON VERTICAL When using the BT2 multi batch option p2 is fixed at ON Sets the line width and the number of grids to use on the trend graph SE pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Trend line width 1 to 3 dots p2 Number of grids 4 to 12 AUTO SE Set the trend waveform line width to 1 dot and the number of grids to 10 SE1 10 Sets the bar graph display TB pl lt terminator gt p1 Bar graph display direction HORIZONTAL VERTICAL TB Display the bar graph horizontally TBHORIZONTAL Sets the bar graph for a channel SB pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Bar graph base position NORMAL Normal lower limit CENTER Center LOWER Lower limit UPPER Upper limit p3 Number of scale divisions 4 to 12 SB p1 Set the number of scale divisions on the bar graph for channel 002 to five and display the bar graph from the span lower limit the scale lower limit if scale is enabled SB002 NORMAL 5 You can specify computation channels on models with the M1 or PM1 math option You can specify external input channels on models with the MC1 external input channel option Sets a scale TN pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Measurement computation or external input channel numbe
249. lect the timeout value when there is no response from the specified slave after sending a command from the DX from the following 125 250 500ms 1 2 5 10 s and 1 min Retry count Select the retry count when there is no response for a command sent from the DX to the specified slave OFF 1 2 3 4 5 10 and 20 Auto recovery cycle Select the cycle for automatically recovering from the following OFF 1 2 5 10 20 30 min and 1h Wait between commands Select the wait time after receiving a response of a command until sending the next command from the following OFF 5 10 15 45 and 100 ms When communicating using an RS 485 two wire system the signals may collide because the master and slave devices driving the communication switch in half duplex mode If the communication does not work increase the wait time Command type R R M W W M Command setting Set up to 16 commands Command items Read channel 201 to 440 C01 to C60 Write channel 001 to 048 101 to 160 varies depending on the model Address 1 to 247 Input register 30001 to 39999 300001 to 365535 Hold register 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465535 Access method Same as the Modbus client Supported functions Same as the Modbus client Data type Same as the Modbus client 6 20 IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Modbus Slave Function Serial Communication Specifications Same as the Modbus Master Function Slave address 1 t
250. lor RED ORANGE YELLOW PINK p3 Alarm level 2 color RED ORANGE YELLOW PINK p4 Alarm level 3 color RED ORANGE YELLOW PINK p5 Alarm level 4 color RED ORANGE YELLOW PINK Tag basic setting Syntax WU pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Setting type TAG p2 Tag number usage USE NOT Basic setting mode menu display settings Syntax WU pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Setting type MENU p2 Basic setting mode menu display ON OFF Remote contact input operation Syntax WU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 lt terminator gt pl Setting type REMOTE p2 Remote contact 1 input N O N C N O Normally opened N C Normally closed p3 Remote contact 2 input N O N C p4 Remote contact 3 input N O N C p5 Remote contact 4 input N O N C p6 Remote contact 5 input N O N C p7 Remote contact 6 input N O N C p8 Remote contact 7 input N O N C p9 Remote contact 8 input N O N C Description e Use this command on models with the remote control option e On models with the pulse input option if you use the remote control input terminal as a pulse input terminal the DX counts the rising pulse edges independent of the remote control input settings Detailed FTP server settings Syntax WU pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Setting type FTPSERVER p2 Directory output format MS DOS UNIX MS DOS UNIX Query WU p1 Example This is an example for general environment settings Display tags display in English and turn remote contr
251. measures such as making the read cycle longer or reducing the number of commands Confirm that no data dropout occurs on the modbus status log screen 2 14 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 7 Usage Example of the Modbus Function Explains the setting example for both Modbus master and slave on DX1000s connected via the serial communication This section refers to the DX1000 set to be a Modbus master as DX1000 master and the DX1000 set to be a Modbus slave as DX1000 slave System Configuration and Actions Uses the measurement channel computation channel and communication input data as described in the figure below Assumes other conditions are set properly Serial communication Command a Measured data Address 1 Address 2 0 DX1000 slave DX1000 master Modbus slave Modbus master Reads a measured data from the slave Displays the data using the computation channel M1 or PM1 option Measurement channel 1 Communication input data C01 Input range 2 0000 to 2 0000 V y Computation channel 101 2 0000 to 2 0000V Yy Start the computation Yy Display the channel on Group 1 Action e The DX1000 master reads the measured value of channel 1 on the DX1000 slave into the communication input data C01 C01 is displayed on a computation channel 101 by including the data in the equation The computation channel 101 is assigned to Group1 e The measured value of channel
252. mmand prompt and then press ENTER to start Telnet If you enter display the Telnet settings are displayed Configure the settings as indicated below e Use local echo set localecho e Send CR and LF by pressing ENTER set crlf Connect to the DX using the open command open the DX IP address or host name 34261 Put a space between the DX IP address or host name and 34261 34261 is the port number of the maintenance test server The DX returns the following message E1 402 Select username from admin or user Access the server using the user name admin or user Sending Commands For information about commands see section 3 2 Disconnection The connection is closed when e Acommand is sent that closes the connection The quit command is sent e Acommunication timeout occurs The DX automatically closes the connection of clients with whom no communication has taken place for 15 minutes e There is a communication error The connection is closed when there is a transfer error a reception error or when the keepalive function times out see Other Functions in section 1 1 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 77 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 14 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option Overview System Configuration The following figure shows the configuration of the authentication system KDC Server Host account Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2003
253. mmon display items see Common Display Items for All Formats in this section Alarm Notification E mail Format e Subject Subject Alarm Summary tag number or channel number The tag number or channel number enclosed in parentheses is used only when they are configured to be included in the subject on models with release number 3 or later e Syntax header1lCRLF header2CRLF CRLF Alarm_summary CRLF lt Host_name gt CRLF hostCRLF CRLF lt CH gt ccc CcCRLF lt Type gt lqCRLF lt aaa gt mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF CRLF lt Inst value gt CRLF mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF ccc c ddd dCRLF CRLF Access the following URL in order to look at_a_screen CRLF http host domain CRLF CRLF ccc c Channel number tag comment or tag number Up to 16 characters Channels set to Skip or Off are not output For the channel number see section 3 3 Alarm level 1 to 4 q Alarm type H L h 1 R or r H high limit alarm L low limit alarm h difference high limit alarm 1 difference low limit alarm R high limit on rate of change alarm r low limit on rate of change alarm aaa Alarm status of or on ddd d Measured Computed value up to 10 digits including the sign and decimal point unit up to 6 characters OVER Positive overrange OVER Negative overrange Burnout Burnout data KT ROR Error data The DX transmits channel numbers alarm types and alarm statuses for up to 10 events in a single e mail If
254. mote operation ACT Event action SYS System operation uuu eeu User name 20 characters ddde ed Detailed information See Appendix 1 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM04L41B01 05EN _ Space e Example EA 1 99 05 11 12 20 00 AlarmACK KEY yoshino 2 99 05 11 12 30 00 ChgPasswd KEY tsuchiya 3 01 06 11 10 00 00 TimeAdj REM tsuchiya 4 01 06 12 12 30 00 MathStart KEY uchiyama 5 01 06 13 12 30 00 MathStop KEY uchiyama 6 01 06 14 12 30 00 Message KEY uchiyama 7 01 06 15 12 30 00 MathStart KEY tsuchiya 8 01 06 16 12 30 00 MathStop KEY tsuchiya EN In response to the command FI0 yoshino tsuchiya 10 1 2 3 7 and 8 are output In response to the command FI0 MathStart MathStop 10 4 5 7 and 8 are output In response to the command FI0 MathStart MathStop 2 7 and 8 are output In response to the command FI0 uchiyama MathStart 10 4 is output In response to the command FI0 MathStart 1 7 is output IM 04L41B01 17E 4 15 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Web Operation Log The FL command is used to output the data The log of operations on the Web screen is output Up to 50 operations are retained Logs that exceed 50 are cleared from the oldest data Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss ffffff eee CRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00
255. n a E3 http 10 0 23 75 cgi bin moni alm_popup c z An alarm has occurred Close this window to stop the alarm sound Close F E Intemet Protected Mode Or 4 100 7 The alarm sound stops when you click Close Note Alarm Sound Output e Alarm detection occurs when the screen is refreshed The screen can be refreshed through manual refreshing automatic refreshing menu operations and screen operations We recommend that you enable automatic refreshing when you use the alarm sound e An alarm is sounded when the alarm status in the status display section is red blinking red or blinking green for the meanings of the different alarm statuses see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual e Even if you release the alarm on the DX so that no alarm status is displayed the alarm will continue to sound on the PC until you stop it e Alarm Sound Off The DX is not affected when you stop the alarm sound Stopping the alarm is not equivalent to performing the alarm ACK operation on the DX e Alarm Sound Specifications The alarm sound is stored in a WAV file on the DX It cannot be changed When the pages of multiple DXs are being displayed If they are being displayed by the same browser they all share one alarm sound window IM 04L41B01 17E 1 33 aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy E 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Contents of the Operator Page When the multi batch function BT2 option
256. n 1 4 Sets an e mail recipient address YV pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Recipient i Recipient 1 2 Recipient 2 p2 Recipient address up to 150 alphanumeric characters YV p1 Set recipient 1 to dxuser1 daqstation com and dxuser2 daqstation com YV1 dxuserl daqstation com dxuser2 daqstation com To specify multiple recipients separate each recipient with a space e For details on e mail settings see section 1 4 Sets the e mail sender address YW pl lt terminator gt pl Sender address up to 64 alphanumeric characters YW Set the sender address to dxadv YWdxadv For details on e mail settings see section 1 4 Sets the e mail SMTP server name YX pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl SMTP server name up to 64 characters p2 Port number 0 to 65535 p3 Authentication OFF POPBEFORESMTP AUTH OFF Authentication is not used POPBEFORESMTP POP before SMTP is used AUTH SMTP authentication is used YX Example Description YJ Syntax Query Example YP Syntax Query Example YR Syntax Description Set the SMTP server to smtp daqstation com and port number to 25 Use POP3 authentication YX smtp daqstation com 25 POPBEFORESMTP For details on e mail settings see section 1 4 Sets the Modbus client s destination server YJ pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Server number 1 to 16 p2 Port number 0 to 65535 p3 Host name up to 64 characters p4 Un
257. n Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 a ee 410698 Batch 6 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 a eee reset 410700 Batch 8 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 ee E 410701 Batch 9 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 fe ee ee t 410702 Batch 10 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 reset 410703 Batch 11 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 reset 410704 Batch 12 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed rese 10705 10706 Event edge switch 2 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed INT16 10707 ___ Event edge switch 3 10708 Event edge switch 4 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed INT16 Event edge switch 5 Event edge switch 6 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed JINT16 Event edge switch 7 Event edge switch 8 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed JINT16 Event edge switch 9 Event edge switch 10 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed INT16 Event edge switch 11 10716 Event edge switch 12 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed INT16 10717 ___ Event edge switch 13 10718 Event edge switch 14 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed INT16 10719 Event edge switch 15 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed INT16 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E Zz 10709 10710 10711 10712 10713 10714 10715 ZIZ Z Z ZZZ Zz Zz zZz 10720 __ Event edge switch 16 10721 vent edge switch 17 Execute event edge switch 1 fixed 1072
258. n on all users logged in through a general purpose service or using keys is output EA K admin abc admin_def user0033 user0452 Gap P 3 ee G IM 04L41B01 17E 4 31 sasuodsay gt 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Event Level Switch Status Release number 3 or later The FD command is used to output the event level switch status e Syntax EACRLF aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaCRLF ENCRLF aaa Event level switch status in ascending numerical order 1 0ON 0 O0FF e Example EA 111111111100000000001111111111 EN 4 32 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 3 Output Format of Binary Data This section describes the output format of the binary data For information on other binary data see section 4 1 Instantaneous data measured computed external input and FIFO data The measured data and computed data are output using signed 16 bit integer and Configured channel information data Configured alarm information data Manual sample file Report sample file signed 32 bit integer respectively These integers can be understood as physical values by adding the decimal point and the unit The decimal point position can be determined using the FE command Typical Examples to Obtain Physical Values from Binary Data Binary Value Decimal Position Code Physical Value Measured Value 10000 0 10000 10000 1 1000 0 10000 2 100 00 10000 3 10 000 10000 4 1 0000 Note The CR
259. n the DX On DXs with the AS1 advanced security option you cannot switch the screen when There is a user who has logged in to the DX through key operations There is a user who is connected to the DX setting function through an Ethernet connection There is a user who is executing the LL command through serial communication 1 36 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Alarm Summary Click Alarm Summary to display the alarm summary Click Refresh to update the data e You can display information for up to 400 alarms e Based on the DX settings the Channel column displays channel numbers tag comments or tag numbers and tag comments e Alarms are displayed using the specified alarm colors e When individual alarm acknowledgment is enabled the channels and alarm levels are displayed Alarm summary example when the multi batch function BT2 option is not in use Refresh Close Creation date 2008 12 06 16 51 03 ETEEN 1L 2008 12 06 16 50 41 1H 2008 12 06 16 49 45 2H 2008 12 06 16 47 43 2008 12 06 16 42 14 2H 2008 12 06 16 39 41 1H 2008 12 06 16 39 33 Alarm summary example when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use release number 3 or later Select the batch group from the list box If you select All the alarm information for every batch group is displayed Batch Group1 x Refresh Close Creation date 2008 12 06 16 59 52 2008 12 06 16
260. nced security option changes to the FTP transfer time settings are invalid See section 2 1 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual e Report Set the time to delay the data transfer to the FTP server in the range of 0 to 120 minutes IM 04L41B01 17E 1 49 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 7 Transferring Data Files from the DX Setting the FTP connection destination Consult your network administrator when setting parameters such as the primary secondary FTP servers port number login name password account and availability of the PASV mode e FTP connection You can specify two destination FTP servers Primary and Secondary If the primary FTP server is down the file is transferred to the secondary FTP server e FTP server name Enter the name of the file transfer destination FTP server using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Ifthe DNS is used you can set the host name as a server name For details on setting the DNS see section 1 3 e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required e Port number Enter the port number of the file transfer destination FTP server in the range of 1 to 65535 The default value is 21 e Login name Enter the login name for accessing the FTP server using up to 32 alphanumeric characters e Password Enter the password for accessing the FTP server using up to 32 alphanumeric characters e Account Enter the account ID for accessing the FTP server using up t
261. nd p3 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e For parameters p4 and p5 enter values with five digits or less excluding the decimal point e For parameters p6 p7 and p8 either set all three parameters or omit all three parameters For 1 5V DC Voltage Input Syntax Query Example SR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 pl0 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Input type 1 5V p3 Measurement range 1 5V p4 Span lower limit 800 to 5200 p5 Span upper limit 800 to 5200 p6 Scaling lower limit 30000 to 30000 p7 Scaling upper limit 30000 to 30000 p8 Scaling decimal place 0 to 4 p9 Unit up to 6 characters p10 Low cut function ON OFF SR p1 Set the channel 005 input type to 1 5V the span lower limit to 1 V the span upper limit to 5 V and turn the 1 5V low cut function ON SRO05 1 5V 1 5V 1000 5000 ON Description SO Syntax Query Example Description ER Syntax Query e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling or computation is in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling e Setp1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e For parameters p4 and p5 enter values with four digits or less excluding the decimal point e For parameters p6 p7 and p8 either set all three parameters or omit all three parameters Sets a computing equation SO pl p
262. ndix 2 Login Procedure When Not Using the Login Function of the DX Login as admin or user e The user name admin can be used to login to the DX as an administrator e The user name user can be used to access the DX as a user No Within the number of connections No Within 2 minutes User name ME hal Yes Entered quit Increment retry count ene Disconnect No erification match Within the number of simultaneous uses Login complete Within 3 retries o No Cin 3 rrey gt O App 4 IM 04L41B01 17E Appendix 2 Login Procedure When Using the Login Function on a DX With the AS1 Advanced Security Option The following is the flow of the setting measurement server login operation Connect Number of connections 4 lt gt Down Yes Left or right No C Client input DX response L Code see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual Operation to leave in the operation log E1 420 or E1 404 Disconnect User name User ID Password C E1406 2 Function name lt Kppropriate gt gt E1400 a User name lt Reot qui gt C E1405 a User 10 C E1401 a Password Split into A B C D Function name 2 a E1 407 a mnor p E Appropriate character type and number E1 408 C S ime Disconnect New password second time Appropriate Pa
263. need be specified in commands External input channel Register of instrument C 202 IKK 32001 higher bytes 32 bit unsigned integer 32002 lower bytes Command setting R 202 202 lt 3 32001 UINT32 _ B Writing Measured Values to the Server e Example Write the measured value 16 bit signed integer from channel 1 to register 40001 of instrument A Measurement channel Register of instrument A 001 gt 40001 16 bit signed integer Command setting WwW 001 001 gt 1 40001 INT16 Writing Computed Values to the Server e Example Write the computed values 32 bit signed integers from channel 101 to registers 40001 and 40002 of instrument A in the order lower 16 bits higher 16 bits Only the smallest register number need be specified in commands Computation channel Register of instrument A gt l byt i 40001 esate 32 bit signed integer gt 40002 higher bytes Command setting W R 101 101 gt 1 40001 INT32_L 1 60 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function Loading to Communication Input Data and Direct Writing of Values to the Server e Example Load the value of the signed 16 bit integer assigned to the hold register 400001 of instrument A to C05 The value of C05 is only written to the hold register 400001
264. nels Example If a MW100 is assigned to external input channels 201 Ext 1 0 name or IP Unit No Status to 220 the status displays 192 168 1 181 Ba 201 220 201 220 192 168 1 182 For the corrective action see the DX1000 or DX2000 User s Manual E Pressing the Call soft key causes to blink on the 7 segment LED display of the selected MW100 for 2 seconds This allows you to check which MW100 is selected if multiple MW100s are connected 1 64 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 10 Using the Modbus Client Function Setup Items The MW100 channels are assigned to the external input channels of the DX as follows e Channel Number The channels of the MW100 selected first are assigned consecutively from external input channel 201 The channels of the MW100 selected next are assigned to the available external input channels from the smallest number You cannot select the external input channels to be assigned DX DX external MW100 meas MW100 Order of automatic input channels channels assignment CH201 F Meas channels 1 CH001 to CHO20 CH220 J CH221 Meas channels i i ea CH001 to CH004 2 CH011 to CH014 CH240 J CH241 5 Meas channels 3 CH001 to CH030 CH270 j e Range Settings The range settings of the MW100 including the span and unit are set automatically to the external input channels If the span setting of the MW100 range exceeds the span setting range of the DX external
265. ngs Syntax WU pl p2 to ON Display settings Syntax WU pl p2 T p3 Partial to T Y Message settings Syntax WU pl p2 INPUT ALARM REPORT SERVICEPORT POP3 ALARM LEVEL ALARM COLOR TAG MENU REMOTE and FTPSERVER WU Sets the environment BATCH DISPLAY MESSAGE General environment settings p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Setting type GENERAL p2 Selects tag or channel number Tag EL Channel number p3 Language ENGLISH ESE CHINESE GERMAN H p4 Remote control ID OFF 0 to 31 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Setting type BATCH p2 Batch function OFF ON MULTIBATCH Enables the multi batch function p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Setting type DISPLAY p2 Trend type T Y display CIRCULAR Circular display expansion OFF ON p4 Trend interval switching OFF ON Description e Parameters p3 and p4 are valid when p2 is set p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Setting type MESSAGE 3 6 Basic Setting Commands SECURITY MEDIA MATH DECIMALPOINT OFF Disables the batch function ON Enables the batch function MULTIBATCH p3 Number of lot number digits OFF 4 6 8 p4 Auto increment ON OFF p5 Number of batch groups DX1000 2 to 6 DX2000 2 to 12 Description e Parameters p3 and p4 are valid when p2 is set e Parameters p3 p4 and p5 are valid when p2 is set to MULTIBATCH e When multi batch is in use p4 is fixed at OFF IM 04L41B01 17E 3 45 ainiin
266. nication input data or external input channel 4 Read the input register The DX reads the input register of the server 3XXXX 3XXXXX device into the communication input data or external input channel 16 Write to the hold register The DX writes the measured or computed data to 4XXXX 4XXXXX the hold register of the server device On Models with the PROFIBUS DP Interface CP1 option On models with the PROFIBUS DP interface CP1 option the communication input data for C01 to C24 on the DX1000 or for C01 to C32 on the DX2000 is reserved for PROFIBUS DP The DX cannot load values into this received data IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 suonesyoads l 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Command Command type R R M W W M E M Number of commands Set up to 16 commands Data type See the table below Symbol Description INT16 16 bit signed integer UINT16 16 bit unsigned integer INT32_B 32 bit signed integer higher and lower order INT32_L 32 bit signed integer lower and higher order UINT32_B 32 bit unsigned integer higher and lower order UINT32_L 32 bit unsigned integer lower and higher order FLOAT_B 32 bit floating point higher and lower order FLOAT_L 32 bit floating point lower and higher order e Reading Values into the External Input Channels DX2000 Only External input channel Register Data type Number 201 to 440 30001 to 39999 INT 16 UINT 16 External input channels are an o
267. nother However the following commands and queries cannot be specified one after another Use them independently e Output commands other than BO CS IF or CB e YO command e Query If there are consecutive sub delimiters they are considered to be single In addition sub delimiters at the front and at the end are ignored Example SR001 VOLT SRO02 VOLT lt terminator gt is taken to be SR001 VOLT SRO02 VOLT lt terminator gt Terminator Use either of the following two characters for the terminator e CR LF 0DH OAH in ASCII code e LF OAH in ASCII code Note ___ Do not specify a channel or relay number that is not available on the DX If you do an error will occur The total data length from the first character to the terminator must be less than 2047 bytes e Commands are not case sensitive with the exception of user specified character strings All the commands that are listed using sub delimiters are executed even if one of the commands is erroneous e Spaces that are inserted before and after a parameter are ignored However if spaces are inserted before a command after a sub delimiter or after a query an error occurs IM 04L41B01 17E 3 1 Command Syntax Response The DX returns a response affirmative negative response to a command that is delimited by a single terminator The controller should follow the one command to one response format When the command response rule is not f
268. nterface option You can use this command when the serial interface protocol is set to Master For information about the serial interface settings see section 2 3 Sets a transmit command of the Modbus master function To not set a command Syntax Query Example YM pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Registration number 1 to 16 p2 Computation usage OFF YM p1 Do not set command registration number 1 YM1 OFF To set a command that reads external input channels Syntax YM pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p lt terminator gt pl Registration number 1 to 16 p2 Command type R p3 First channel external input channel number p4 Last channel external input channel number p5 Slave device address 1 to 247 Query Example p6 First register number 30001 to 39999 40001 to 49999 300001 to 365535 400001 to 465535 p7 Type of data assigned to the registers INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L YM p1 Register the following command in command registration number 2 Read the 32 bit signed integer data that is assigned to registers 30002 upper 16 bits and 30004 lower 16 bits in the slave device at address 5 into the DX channels 201 to 203 YM2 R 201 203 5 30002 INT32 B To set a command that reads communication input data Syntax Query Example YM pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p lt terminator gt pl Registration number 1 to 16 p2 Command type R M p3 First channel communication inp
269. ntering a character string you can still enter a character string with the barcode reader 2 Use the barcode reader to enter BV0 process sampleCRLF The Header box is set to process sample IM 04L41B01 17E 2 23 soepE U jenas y Buisy Chapter 3 3 1 Commands Command Syntax Command Syntax The syntax of the setting basic setting output commands see sections 3 4 to 3 9 of the DX is given below ASCII codes see appendix 1 are used for the character codes For the syntax of the maintenance test commands see section 3 10 and instrument information output commands see section 3 11 see the corresponding sections or the examples for each command Command name Parameter Delimiter Sub delimiter Terminator Command example SRO02 SKIP SRO03 VOLT 2V 1500 1800 l Parameter Delimiter Command name SR Sub delimiter Command Name Defined using two alphabet characters Parameters e Command parameters e Set using alphabet characters or numeric values e Parameters are separated by delimiters commas All numeric values are specified using integers When the parameter is a numeric value the valid range of the value varies depending on the command e Spaces around the parameter are discarded However spaces are valid for parameters units specified using an ASCII character string In the
270. nual IM04L41B01 05EN Configuring the KDC Server An example of how to configure a KDC server is provided in this section Configuring the DX e Set the SNTP Client For the password management function to work the times on the KDC server and the DX must be synchronized Configure the DX to always synchronize itself with an SNTP server on the network For the setup procedure see section 1 8 Note Be sure to set DST daylight saving time and the time zone correctly For the setup procedures for DST and the time zone see sections 2 1 and 2 2 in the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual e Set the IP Address and DNS See section 1 3 for information about the IP address and DNS settings e Turn the Password Management Function On See section 2 1 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM04L41B01 05EN e Register Users Specify operation modes user names and restrictions for each user See section 2 1 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM04L41B01 05EN e Set the Root User Password See section 2 1 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM04L41B01 05EN e Set the KDC Server to Connect to and the Authentication Key Set the server information the encryption method etc This section will explain how to do this IM 04L41B01 17E 1 79 aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 14 Using the Password Management Function AS1 option DX Settings KDC server to connect to
271. o Enter a fixed unit number in the range of 0 to 255 Setting the transmitted commands e Client command number Select 1 to 16 for the transmitted command numbers to be configured e Command type Set the command type to Off R R M W W M or E M If you select a command type other than Off the client channel server number register and data type items are displayed R Read to the external input channel 16 bit signed integer type from the server R M Read to the communication input data 32 bit floating point type from the server W Write the measurement channel 16 bit signed integer type to the server W M Write the measurement channel 32 bit signed integer type to the server E M Read to the communication input data 32 bit floating point type from the server write the custom display value to the server release numbers 4 and later R can be selected on DX2000s with the external input channel MC1 option installed R M W M and E M can be selected on models with the computation function M1 or PM1 option installed e First Last client channels Enter the first and last channel numbers of input output The range of channels that you can enter varies depending on the command type as follows R 201 to 440 R M C01 to C60 W 1 to 48 W M 101 to 160 E M C01 to C60 Only specify one communication input data item in the E M command An error will occur if you specify multiple items e g CO1 C03 e Server serv
272. o 32 alphanumeric characters e PASV mode Select On when using the DX behind a firewall that requires the passive mode The default setting is Off e Initial path Enter the directory of the file transfer destination using up to 64 alphanumeric characters The delimiter for directories varies depending on the implementation of the destination FTP server Example When transferring files to the data directory in the home directory of an FTP server on a UNIX file system home data When There Is a File with the Same Name at the Transfer Destination Under all circumstances when there is a file with the same name at the transfer destination it is overwritten Operation When the Data Transfer Fails If the DX fails to transfer files to both the primary and secondary FTP servers the DX aborts the file transfer operation If the connection to the destination recovers the DX transfers new data files along with the files that the DX failed to transfer Note that because the DX transfers data from its internal memory if the data that the DX failed to transfer is overwritten it is lost 1 50 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 7 Transferring Data Files from the DX Testing the FTP Transfer You can test whether a test file can be transferred from the DX to an FTP server Press FUNC and select FTPtest Items to check before performing this test Connect the Ethernet cable correctly For the connection procedure see section 1 3 e Check
273. o 99 Supported functions Same as the Modbus server Register assignments Same as the Modbus server Modbus error response Same as the Modbus server IM 04L41B01 17E 6 21 suonesyioeds l Appendix Appendix 1 Data Dropout during Modbus Communication Data Dropout during Modbus Client If the response to the previous command is not complete when the DX attempts to issue a command to a server device the DX command cannot issue the command causing a data dropout Take appropriate measures by referring to the following figures 1 When the response from the server device takes a long time Read cycle SS ee Server device 1 t Server device 2 to 1 t TEO Data dropout Data dropout Servers 2 and 3 Server 3 Server device 3 2 When the connection is dropped because there is no response from the server device Read cycle Connection dropped LIO xipueddy E Server device 1 t j Timeout value LIO a O Server device 3 E f Data dropout Servers 2 and 3 Server device 2 LTO 3 When the communication recovers by connection retry Read cycle Connection dropped Connection recovered Server device 1 Li 1 L Timeout value i Connection retry time i Retry JO LI L10 L10 L10 Data dropout Servers 2 and 3 Server device 2 Server device 3 Status lamp The first connection retry after the connection
274. o KEY p3 START key FREE LOCK p4 STOP key FREE LOCK p5 MENU key FREE LOCK p6 USER key FREE LOCK p7 DISP ENTER key FREE LOCK p8 FAVORITE key FREE LOCk When p2 set to FUNC function key p3 Alarm ACK FREE LOCk p4 Message batch key FREE LOCK p5 Math key FREE LOCK p6 Data save FREE LOCK p7 E mail FTP FREE LOCK p8 Time set FREE LOCK p9 Display Function FREE LOCK When p2 is set to MEDIA external storage media p3 External storage media operation FREE LOCk p4 Setup loading operation FREE LOCK On DXs with the AS1 Advanced Security Option Syntax RP p1 p2 lt terminator gt pl Authority of user number 1 to 10 p2 Authority of user item KEY ACTION MEDIA SIGNIN The parameters after p3 vary depending on how p2 is set as indicated below p2 KEY p3 START key FREE LOCK p4 STOP key FREE LOCK p5 MENU key FREE LOCK p6 USER key FREE LOCK p7 DISP ENTER key FREE LOCK p8 FAVORITE key FREE LOCK p2 ACTION Functions p3 Alarm ACK FREE LOCK p4 Message and batch FREE LOCK p5 Computation FREE LOCK p6 Data save FREE LOCK p7 E mail FTP FREE LOCK ps Time operations FREE LOCK p9 Display operations FREE LOCK p10 Calibration settings FREE LOCK p2 MEDIA External media p3 External media operations FREE LOCK p4 Setting load operations FREE LOCK p2 SIGNIN Signature permissions p3 Signature1 FREE LOCK p4 Signature2 FREE LOCK p5 Sign
275. ocedure see sections 2 4 2 6 and 2 7 DX master DX Serial communication wD 2B o Ho lo m Modbus slave device IM 04L41B01 17E 2 1 eu zu jenas y BursnN 2 1 DX Features Modbus Slave e A Modbus master device can carry out the following operations on the DX that is operating as a Modbus slave device e Load data from measurement computed and external input channels using the input register e Load communication input data using the hold register e Write communication input data using the hold register e Write to external input channels using the hold register e Start and stop recording write messages and perform other similar operations using the hold register models with release number 3 or later e Load the recording start stop condition message strings and other types of data using the hold register models with release number 3 or later M1 and PM1 options DX2000 with MC1 option e For details on the settings required to use this function and the Modbus function codes that the DX supports see section 6 3 e For the setting procedure see sections 2 4 2 5 and 2 7 Modbus master device MW100 B fe fe fe a 0 gg oo Serial communication DX D DX slave Setting Measurement Function e This function can be used to set almost all of the settings that can be configured usin
276. ol off WUGENERAL TAG ENGLISH OFF WE Sets calibration management Syntax WE pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Whether or not to use calibration management USE NOT p2 Alarm days 1 to 10 This setting determines how many days before the specified calibration due date to start displaying notifications p3 Renotification interval 10min 30min 1h 8h 24h Query WE Example Use the calibration management function Start notifications a day before the calibration due date and continue producing notifications every 8 hours afterwards WEUSE 1 8h Description e p2 and p3 are valid when p1 is set to USE e You can make settings with this command on models with the CC1 input calibration option BI Configures signature settings AS1 advanced security option Syntax BI pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt p1 Process type BATCH CONTINUE p2 Signature on the DX OFF SIGNIN1 SIGNIN1 2 SIGNIN1 2 3 p3 Signature at batch stop ON OFF p4 FTP transfer at signing ON OFF Query BI Example Set the command so that the process type is BATCH only signatures 1 and 2 are used on the IM 04L41B01 17E 3 47 ginning e 3 6 Basic Setting Commands DX the DX switches to the signature window at memory stop and there is no FTP transfer at signing BIBATCH SIGNIN1 2 ON OFF Description p3 and p4 are valid when p2 is set to SIGNIN1 SIGNIN1 2 or SIGNIN1 2 3 W Sets alarm and DO settings Alarm and DO settings Syntax WO
277. ollowed the operation is not guaranteed For the response syntax see section 4 1 Commands dedicated to RS 422 485 see section 3 9 and instrument information output commands section 3 11 are exceptions IM 04L41B01 17E 3 3 spuewwoy el 3 2 A List of Commands When the AS1 Advanced Security Option Is Not in Use DX Execution Modes There are two execution modes on the DX If you attempt to execute a command ina mode that is different from the specification a syntax error occurs Use the DS command to switch to the appropriate execution mode and then execute the command Query commands can be executed in either mode e Basic setting mode Measurement and computation are stopped and settings are changed in this mode Operation mode As a general rule commands other than those for the basic setting mode described above are used in this mode Administrator and User The administrator and user specifications in the table indicate the user level that is specified using the login function for Ethernet communications Yes and No in the table indicate the following Yes Command usable No Command not usable Setting Commands Note If the multi batch function BT2 option is enabled you cannot use the SR SO SK TJ SW TE SJ ER TQ and TK commands unless all batch recording operations are stopped Group Command Function Name SR SO ER TJ SA SW 4 J H Fd 0 g 3
278. om or written to is determined by the values that you set for p3 p4 and p7 An error occurs if the specified number of registers exceeds the number of registers that actually follow the first register p6 WR_ Sets the instrument information output Syntax WR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Memory and media status OFF ON p2 Self diagnosis OFF ON p3 Communication errors OFF ON p4 Memory stop OFF ON p5 Alarms OFF ON Query WR Example Set the DX to transmit various types of information WRON ON ON ON ON WI Sets the relay operations On DXs without the AS1 Advanced Security Option Syntax WI pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 FAIL relay Fail Status p2 Status relay Fail Status Fail FAIL Status Instrument information Query WI Example Output FAIL to the FAIL relay and the instrument information to the status relay WIFail Status Description This command is valid on models with the F1 or F2 option On DXs with the AS1 Advanced Security Option Syntax WI pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 FAIL relay Fail Status MemorySample UserLocked Login p2 Status relay Fail Status MemorySample UserLocked Login Fail FAIL Status Instrument information MemorySsmple Memory sampling UserLocked Invalid user Login Login Query WI Example Output FAIL to the FAIL relay and login information to the status relay WIFail Login Description This command is valid on models with the F1 or F2 option
279. on E M Read to the communication input data 32 bit floating point type from the server write the custom display value to the server release numbers 4 and later R can be selected on DX2000s with the external input channel MC71 installed R M W M and E M can be selected on models with the computation function M1 or PM1 option installed e First Last DX s channel numbers Enter the first and last channel numbers of input output The range of channels that you can enter varies depending on the command type as follows R 201 to 440 R M C01 to C60 W 1 to 48 W M 101 to 160 E M C01 to C60 e Address Enter the address of the slave device in the range of 1 to 247 e Regi Set the register number of the slave For an input register select in the range of 30001 to 39999 and 300001 to 365536 For a hold register select in the range of 40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465536 The register numbers you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 e Type Select INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT_L FLOAT_B or FLOAT_L The register numbers you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 Examples of Setting Commands See page 1 36 Checking the Modbus Operating Status Displaying the Modbus Operating Status Press DISP ENTER and select INFORMATION gt MODBUS MASTER Note To display the MODBUS MASTER on the screen selection menu you need to change the setting using
280. on the DX2000 are also given High Speed and Medium Speed Model Groupings This manual uses the terms high speed input model and medium speed input model to distinguish between DX models as follows Model Type Model High speed input model DX1002 DX1004 DX1002N DX1004N DX2004 and MV2008 Medium speed input model DX1006 DX1012 DX1006N DX1012N DX2010 DX2020 DX2030 DX2040 and DX2048 IM 04L41B01 17E Names and Uses of Parts and the Setup Procedures Using the Operation Keys Front Panel Rear Panel DX1 Soft Press these keys to select the menu displayed on the screen DX1 000 ESC key Press this key to return to the previous screen or cancel the LCD new settings Arrow keys Press these keys to move between setup items X AS displayed on the screen COC OD DISP ENTER key Oc dC Press this key when confirming the setting or when closing the entry box MENU and FUNC keys Press the MENU key and then hold down the FUNC key for approximately 3 s The basic setting menu is displayed from which you can to enter the communication setup menus keys 000 m Ethernet interface connector A connector used for standard equipped Ethernet communications RS 422 485 interface terminal option A serial communication terminal that comes with the C3 option gt
281. on the device become active e When a device is opened with the ESC O command any other device that is open is automatically closed e Normally either CR LF or LF can be used as a terminator for communication commands However the terminator for these commands must be set to CR LF Note The ASCII code of ESC is 1BH See appendix 3 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 5 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data The following types of ASCII data are available The format for each type is described in this section The table below indicates the data types and the corresponding output commands Data Type Corresponding Output Command Setting data basic setting data FEO FE2 Decimal position unit information FEL Measured computed and external input data FDO Relay status and internal switch status ED6 Communication log ELCOM FTP client log FLFTPC Operation error log FE LERR Login log FLLOGIN Operation log AS1 option F Web operation log FLWEB E mail log FLEMAIL SNTP access log FLSNTP DHCP access log FLDHCP Modbus communication log FLMODBUS Alarm summary FLALARM Message summary FLMSG Change settings log AS1 option FLSETTING Status information Isod 1IS1 Ethernet information FAIP File list MEDIR Check disk MECHKDSK Manual sampled report data information MODIR User information FUO FUL Event level switch status Release number 3 or later FD7 Setting Data Basic Note The CRLF used in this section denotes carriage
282. ond 00 to 59 XXXXXXXXXX Login history is output left justified Login Login Logout Logout NewTime New time TimeChg Time change PowerOff Power Off PowerOn Power On TRevStart Start of gradual time adjustment TRevEnd End of gradual time adjustment TimeDST Switching of the daylight savings time SNTPtimset Time change by SNTP CCSetEnd Completion of calibration correction CCExpire Passing of the calibration due date nnn Operation property KEY Key operation COM Communication REM Remote ACT Event action SYS System uuu u User name up to 20 characters Space Example EA 99 05 11 12 20 00 Login KEY administrator 99 05 11 12 30 00 Logout KEY administrator 99 05 11 12 20 00 Login COM user 99 05 11 12 30 00 Logout COM user EN 4 14 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Operation Log AS1 option e The operation log is output by the Fl command e An operation history is output Up to the most recent 100 log items can be output e Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_xXxxxxxxxXxx_nnn_uuu u_ddd dCRLF ENCRLEF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 1 to 31 4 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 a SS Second 00 to 59 8 XXXXXXXXXX The operation It is left justified See Appendix 1 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM04L41B01 05EN nnn Operation type KEY Key operation COM Communication operation includes serial and Modbus communication REM Re
283. op computation reset computation dropout ACK and computation reset for each batch group when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use Manual sampling event data sampling start trigger and snapshot Message and free message writing or message and free message writing for each batch group when the multi batch function BT2 option is in use Event edge switch Event level switch IM 04L41B01 17E suoneoyioeds l 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications List of Registers Description Internal switch 1 Supplementary Information ON Simultaneous Access Internal switch 2 ON Internal switch 3 ON Internal switch 4 ON Internal switch 5 ON Internal switch 6 ON Internal switch 7 ON Internal switch 8 ON Internal switch 9 ON Internal switch 10 ON Internal switch 11 ON Internal switch 12 ON Internal switch 13 ON Internal switch 14 ON Internal switch 15 ON Internal switch 16 ON Internal switch 17 ON Internal switch 18 ON Internal switch 19 ON Internal switch 20 ON Internal switch 21 ON Internal switch 22 ON Internal switch 23 ON Internal switch 24 ON Internal switch 25 ON Internal switch 26 ON Internal switch 27 ON Internal switch 28 ON Internal switch 29 PSPS POyeyey
284. or BAR e The setting pa MODBUS M is only valid if the serial interface protocol is set to MODBUS M e The setting pa REPORT or COLUMN_BAR is only valid on models with the math option e When multi batch BT2 is in use the four panel display can only be displayed in batch single mode Therefore you cannot specify the following screens Modbus master status display Modbus client status display relay status display report display stacked bar graph annunciator display and event switch status display e Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Sets the custom menu Setting the main menu Syntax SM pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 lt terminator gt pl Type DISP_MAIN p2 to p9 Menu items to display The DX displays the menu items in the specified order The DX does not display menu items that are not specified TREND DIGITAL BAR OVERVIEW INFORMATION TRENDHISTORY LOG 4PANEL ES EXPAND C A S Q USTOM_PANEL NNUNCIATOR EPARATOR 3 34 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands Example Set the first menu item to TREND and the second menu item to TRENDHISTORY SMDISP_MAIN TREND TRENDHISTORY Description e If parameter p2 and subsequent parameters are omitted all menus are hidden A command error occurs if you specify the same menu item multiple times e You can specify up to three separators If you specify more than three an error occurs e You cannot omit parameters using delimiters 6o
285. or through a USB barcode reader Logs in through serial communication AS1 advanced security option LL pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt p1 Username up to 20 characters p2 User ID up to 8 characters This parameter is meaningless if you are not using a user ID p3 Password up to 20 characters p4 The new password to use if the current one has expired up to 20 characters This parameter is meaningless if the current password has not yet expired This parameter can be omitted 3 44 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 5 Control Commands 3 6 Basic Setting Commands p5 Reconfirmation of the new password to use if the current one has expired up to 20 characters This parameter is meaningless if the current password has not yet expired This parameter can be omitted Example Log in as user a whose user ID is aaaa and whose password is aaaaaa start computation and execute memory start LLa aaaa aaaaaa TLO PSO Description e This command can be used if the login function has been enabled by an administrator After the LL command use sub delimiters to make a list of commands to execute You log into the DX when you execute this command and you are automatically logged out after the command is executed The LL command communication responses including those for errors are the same as those for other commands Settings GENERAL Syntax WU pl p2 TAG CHANN JAPAN FRENC Batch setti
286. ot number 410002 Supplementary Information Valid range 0 to 99999999 Type Simultaneous Access Write 410003 to 410020 Batch 1 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less 410021 to 410050 410051 to 410052 Reserved batch 1 Batch 2 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 INT32_L R W STR36 410053 to 410070 Batch 2 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less 410071 to 410100 410101 to 410102 Reserved batch 2 Batch 3 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 INT32_L STR36 410103 to 410120 Batch 3 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less 410121 to 410150 410151 to 410152 Reserved batch 3 Batch 4 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 INT32_L STR36 410153 to 410170 Batch 4 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less 410171 to 410200 410201 to 410202 Reserved batch 4 Batch 5 lot number Valid range 0 to 99999999 INT32_L STR36 410203 to 410220 Batch 5 batch number Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The batch number must be 32 characters or less 410221 to
287. ow 410781 _ Event level switch 17 __ OFF 0 ON 1 Nme faw O 410782 __ Event level switch 18 OFF 0 ON 1 Nne fow O 410783 Event level switch 19 OFF 0 ON 1 Nne Raw O 410784 Eventlevel switch20 OFF 0 ON 4 Nne faw O 410785 Event level switch21 OFF 0 ON 1 _ Nwe few O 410786 __ Event level switch 22 OFF 0 ON 4 Inne fow O 410787 __ Event level switch23 OFF 0 ON 1 Nne fow O 410788 _ _ Event level switch 24 OFF 0 ON 4 Nne faw O 410789 Event level switch25 OFF 0 ON 1 Nne fow O 410790 Event level switch26 OFF 0 ON 1 Nme Raw O 410791 Event level switch 27 OFF 0 ON 4 Nne fow O 410792 Event level switch28 OFF 0 ON 1 Nme faw O 410793 Event level switch 29 OFF 0 ON 1 NTI RW O 410794 Eventlevel switch30 __ OFF 0 ON 1 nwe fow O The value is 1 only when a user has logged INT16 communication login into the DX setting function through Ethernet communication This only applies to DXs with the AS1 advanced security option 410802 Key login The value is 1 when a user has logged into the INT16 DX through key operations This only applies to DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Setting function Login not possible Individual alarm level The value is 1 when login through key operations INT16 login to the setting function through Ethernet communication and login through the sending of the LL command through serial communication are not possible because anot
288. p number Using message number 3 write the string ALARM to all groups BJ3 ALARM ALL e Ifyou omit p3 the message is written to all display groups e Parameter p5 is only valid when multi batch BT2 is in use When multi batch BT2 is in use you cannot omit p5 EJ Syntax Example Description TL Syntax Example Description DS Syntax e Set parameters p3 p4 and p5 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Changes the login password EJ pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Old password see the description p2 New password see the description p3 New password see the description Change the password from PASS001 to WORDOO5 EJPASS001 WORDO05 WORDOOS5 The password character lengths are indicated below Release numbers 3 and earlier Up to 8 characters Release numbers 4 and later Up to 20 characters On models with the AS1 advanced security option Between 6 and 20 characters e When you use password management the WU command on models with the AS1 advanced security option this command is invalid Starts stops resets computation MATH or clears the computation dropout status display TL pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Type of operation 0 Start computation 1 Stop computation 2 Reset computation 3 Clear the computation data dropout display p2 Batch group number 0 All computation channels 1 2 Batch group number Start computation TLO You cannot use this command w
289. p to 6 characters ER p1 3 20 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands Example Set the external input channel 201 span to 150 00 to 150 00 201 ON 15000 15000 2 Description e You can use this command on models with the MC1 external input channel option e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling TJ Sets memory sampling Syntax TJ pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Memory sampling OFF ON Query TJ p1 Example Perform memory sampling on channel 002 TJ002 ON Description You can specify computation channels on models with the M1 or PM1 math option You can specify external input channels on models with the MC1 external input channel option e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling or computation is in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling SA Sets an alarm When Not Using Alarms Syntax SA pl1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Alarm number 1 to 4 p3 Alarm on off OFF SA p1 p2 Turn Off alarm number 1 of channel 010 SA010 1 O0FF Description You can specify computation channels on models with the
290. pe 309001 309002 309003 309004 309005 309006 309007 309008 Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Millisecond DST 16 bit signed integer IM 04L41B01 17E 6 9 suonesyioeds l 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Hold Register shared with the Modbus slave function Common Items e The client device can read and write to the hold registers e Communication input data is an option M1 PM1 e External input channels are DX2000 option MC1 When Writing e Communication input data can be handled on a computation channel by including the data in the equation of a DX computation channel External input channel data can be handled on an external input channel e Details Details Hold Register Data Data Type 400001 Communication input data C01 16 bit signed integer l 400060 Communication input data C60 e Precautions to be taken when the client device reads the data The communication input data of the DX is floating point type but the data is converted to signed 16 bit integer when the data is read e Precautions to be taken when the client device writes the data Only data in signed 16 bit integer type can be written Floating point values cannot be written 400301 Lower bytes of communication input data C01 32 bit floating point 400302 Higher bytes of communication input data C01 l 400419 Lower bytes of communication input data C60 400420 Higher bytes of communication input data C60
291. pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt p1 Alarm setting ALARM p2 Reflash operation ON OFF ON 1S ON 2S p3 Interval for the low limit on the rate of change 1 to 32 p4 Interval for the high limit on the rate of change 1 to 32 p5 Hold Not hold the alarm status display HOLD NONHOLD Description If annunciator is set to ON in the alarm environment settings using WU ALARM p2 and p5 are fixed to the following values based on the annunciator sequence Sequence p2 p5 ISA A 4 OFF NONHOLD ISA A OFF HOLD ISA M OFF HOLD The meanings of the different p2 options are indicated below p2 Duration for which the Reflash Relays Are Deactivated ON 500 ms ON 1S 1s ON 2S 2s Internal switch settings Syntax WO pl p2 lt terminator gt pl DO type SWITCH p2 AND switch number NONE No AND setting s01 Only specify S01 S01 Sxx Specify S01 to Sxx where xx 02 to 30 Output relay settings Syntax WO pl1 p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt p1 DO type RLY p2 Relay number NONE No AND setting T01 Only specify 101 I01 Ixx Specify 101 to Ixx where xx 02 to 36 p3 Energize De energize the relay DE_ENERGIZE ENERGIZE p4 Hold Not hold the relay NONHOLD HOLD p5 Relay Action on ACK NORMAL RESET Description Set parameter p2 by referring to the table in section 3 3 If annunciator is set to ON in the alarm environment settings using WU ALARM p4 and p5 are fixed to the following values
292. position unit information 0 ee 4 7 default Gateway secs cdniiateeen esa anes default paSSwOrd sensign delimiter srci scevectuseesevecdeseeacsceasbs erer SATEN NiE destination server settings DHOP goiit enean na an E Ra DAG Piles ciituccscensvascetieeceuces e aE E OEE DHCP log oe DISP ENTER KEY iiciin dn acontanse EEEN NENAS display groups airosa arr hole iSi i 3 18 displaying the measured data at the specified date and DNS accession domain NaMe ressens devse sess cotexees tyseetecie causes sta e n e a domain suffix search order ccccccccececeesseceeeeeceessseeeeeeees 1 14 DX exe CUtiON MOES cccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 4 3 9 DX features Ethernet interface eerren 1 1 DX features serial interface ccccesseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteeee 2 1 E e mail TOMMAL saceesicenceavevscesseneaneescaveuasesasavesscadesnceasanciseneeexanaes 1 22 e MailllOG xe Ee eee aaa a ating 4 18 e mail retransmission cccceeeeeceeeceesteeeeeeeesessaaeeeeeees 1 21 e mail test E Mail ranS MISSM sr isiin 1 9 e mail transmission starting Of seeeeeeeeeeeeeen eeren 1 21 e mail transmission stopping Of seeeeseeesieeeeeeerr nerne 1 21 EBGREP gninnan aiar a NRE EENES encryption method ENDA A Gii eap Mesa N ENE ESC KOV re e e E E E E eae eeteenese v EthereNet IP EtherNet IP server Ethernet information a Ethernet interface CONNE CHOP
293. ption MC1 Reads values from the server register into the external input channels of the DX The data type of external input channels is signed 16 bit integer The measurement range and unit are set using the external input channels The decimal point position is determined by the Span_L settings DX2000 Server Data type 16 bit signed integer 300001 to 365536 INT 32_B INT 32_L 40001 to 49999 UINT 32_B UINT 32_L Read 490001 to 465536 External Input Channel Values The range of external input channel values is 30000 to 30000 excluding the decimal If this range is exceeded the value is set to Over or Over Value in the register on the server Value on the external input channel More than 30000 Over 7FFFH 30000 to 30000 30000 to 30000 Less than 30000 Over 8001H Cc Reading Values into Communication Input Data Reads values from the server register into the communication input data of the DX Communication input data is an option M1 PM1 option The data type of the communication input data is 32 bit floating point Communication input data can be displayed on a computation channel by including the data in the equation of a DX computation channel M1 PM1 option The measurement range and unit are also set using the computation channel DX1000 DX2000 Server ommand Communication input data Register Data type Number C01 to C24 DX1000 30001 to
294. r p2 Display position OFF 1 to 10 p3 Number of divisions 4 to 12 C10 Query Example SV Syntax Query Example SC Syntax Query Example Description JA Syntax Query Example TN p1 Set the scale position for channel 003 to 2 and the number of divisions to 10 TNO03 2 10 Sets a measurement channel s moving average SV pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Moving average OFF ON p3 Number of moving average samples 2 to 400 SV p1 Set the number of moving average samples for channel 002 to 12 SVv002 0ON 12 Sets a channel display color SC pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Display color see SL sets a trip line SC p1 Set the channel 002 display color to blue SC002 BLUE You can specify computation channels on models with the M1 or PM1 math option You can specify external input channels on models with the MC1 external input channel option Sets an alarm point mark TA pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt pl Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Mark type ALARM FIXED Fixed mark p3 Scale board ON OFF p4 Alarm level 1 color AUTO or 24 colors see NL sets a trip line AUTO The same color as the alarm color arm level 2 color AUTO or 24 colors see L sets a trip line UTO The same color as the alarm color arm level 3 color AUTO or 24 colors
295. r 10 characters Space Example EA 09 08 12 11 07 00 81211079 KEY Admin678901234567890 1234567890 09 08 12 11 07 00 81211069 KEY Admin678901234567890 123 EN IM 04L41B01 17E 4 25 sasuodsay a 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Status Information The IS command is used to output the data The output format varies between ISO and IS1 The operation status of the recorder is output e For details on the status information see section 5 2 The Bit Structure of the Status Information Output for the ISO command e Syntax EACRLF aaa bbb ccc dddCRLF ENCRLF aaa Status information 1 000 to 255 bbb Status information 2 000 to 255 ccc Status information 3 000 to 255 ddd Status information 4 000 to 255 Ye wo wo SD e Example EA 000 000 032 000 EN Output for the IS1 Command e Syntax EACRLF aaa bbb ccc ddd eee fff ggg hhhCRLF ENCRLF aaa Status information 1 000 to 255 bbb Status information 2 000 to 255 geg Status information 3 000 to 255 ddd Status information 4 000 to 255 eee Status information 5 000 to 255 fff Status information 6 000 to 255 ggg Status information 7 000 to 255 hhh Status information 8 000 to 255 e Example EA 000 000 032 000 000 000 000 000 EN e Status information 3 4 7 and 8 are edge operation They are cleared when read by the IS command e Status information 1 2 5 and 6 are level operation They are not cleared when read Th
296. r Off to not send e mail Interval Select the interval for sending e mail to Recipient1 and Recipient2 from 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 and 24 hours Ref time Enter the time used as a reference for sending the e mail at the specified interval to Recipient1 and Recipient2 Include instantaneous value Include source URL Subject and Header These items are the same as the e mail that is sent when an alarm occurs The default subject is Periodic_data System Settings Specify the settings for sending e mail when the DX recovers from a power failure at memory end and when an error occurs Recipient1 and Recipient2 Set the e mail recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select On to send e mail or Off to not send e mail Include source URL Subject and Header These items are the same as the e mail that is sent when an alarm occurs The default subject is System_warning Report Settings Specify the settings for sending e mail when reports are created Recipient1 and Recipient2 Set the recipients For Recipient and Recipient2 select On to send e mail or Off to not send e mail Include source URL Subject and Header These items are the same as the e mail that is sent when an alarm occurs The default subject is Report_data 1 20 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 4 Sending E mail Messages Configuring the POP3 Server Connection Release number 3 or later Specify how the DX operates when it connects to a POP server Press MENU to
297. r page You can switch the DX screen You can also modify and write messages e You can set access control user name and password specified with the login function on each page e The screen can be updated at a constant period approximately 10 s Refresh Alarm sound JOFF gt Auto Refresh VATE 200 v Data list Print page TREND Select Group gt J Select Group gt x Data Range Search Select Screen gt x For the procedure to set the Web server function see section 1 5 For operations on the monitor page and operator page see section 1 5 1 8 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 1 DX Features E mail Transmission Transmitting e mail messages The available types of e mails are listed below E mail can be automatically transmitted for each item You can specify two groups of destinations and specify the destination for each item In addition you can set a header string for each item Alarm mail Reports alarm information when an alarm occurs or clears Alternatively reports alarm information only when an alarm occurs System mail Notifies the time of the power failure and the time of recovery when the DX recovers from a power failure Notifies the detection of memory end when it is detected Notifies the error code and message when a media related error occurs an error on the external storage medium or when the data cannot be stored due to insufficient free space on the external storag
298. return line feed Setting Data The FE command is used to output the data The setting basic setting data is output in the order of the listed commands in the table in section 3 2 A List of Commands However the setting information for the following commands is not output Setting commands setting SD FR command Setting commands control All commands from BT to IR e Basic setting commands XE YO YE and YC commands The output format of the setting basic setting data conforms to the syntax of each command Some commands are output in multiple lines Example Commands that are specified for each channel Syntax sa two character command name and the subsequent parameters are output in the following syntax EACRLF ttsss sCRLF 4 6 IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data CE Command name SR SA XA XI sss s Setting basic setting data variable length one line Example EA SR001 VOLT 20mV 0 20 SR002 VOLT 20mV 0 20 Decimal Point Position Unit Information The FE command is used to output the data You can use the CB command to specify whether to output the data of measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to OFF Syntax The data is output for each channel in the following syntax EACRLF s_cccuuuuuu ppCRLF s Data status N D or S N Normal D Differential input S Skip When the measurement range is set to SKIP for
299. right 2005 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 04L41B01 17E How to Use This Manual Notes Trademarks Revisions The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the Regents of the University of California This manual follows the guidelines of Microsoft Corporation for displaying screen captures vigilantplant DAQSTATION Daqstation and DXAdvanced are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology MIT Compan
300. ription of the settings required to use this function see section 1 9 DX server DX I Ethernet 220 H fe fe co a Modbus client device 1 2 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 1 DX Features Setting Measurement Server This function can be used to set almost all of the settings that can be configured using the front panel keys However you cannot turn the power on and off or configure the following settings User registration the root password and authentication key of the password management function the key lock password the connection destination of the FTP client function SMTP authentication and POP3 settings 1 Can be configured on DXs with the AS1 option 2 AS1 option The following types of data can be output e Measured computed and external input data e Files in the internal memory or files on the external storage medium e Setup information and status byte e A log of operation errors and communications e Alarm summary and message summary e Relay status information The measured computed and external input data can be output to a PC in BINARY or ASCII format Other types of data are output in ASCII format Fora description of the data output format see chapter 4 3 M1 or PM1 option 4 DX2000 with MC1 option For details on how to use this function see section 1 12 The commands that can be used with this function are setting commands see section
301. rm all the commands When you connect to the monitoring function you can only produce measurement and setup data and execute input commands for communication input data and external input channels For information about what commands can be sent see section 3 2 User If you log in to the monitoring function as a user you can perform the same commands that you can perform when you log in as an administrator When you connect to the setting function in addition to the monitoring function commands you can also perform some control commands The commands that you can perform are those that have been enabled by the user privileges See section 3 2 Web Server e User Registration You can use the DX login function to register Web server users There are two user levels administrator and user Administrator An administrator can access the operator and monitor pages through the Web server function See section 1 5 User A user can access the monitor page through the Web server function Note Accessing the Maintenance Test Server Log in with the user name admin or user Accessing the FTP Server Log in with the user name admin user or anonymous IM 04L41B01 17E 1 7 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy 5 1 1 DX Features Web Server Microsoft Internet Explorer can be used to display the DX screen on the PC The following two pages are available e Monitor page Screen dedicated for monitoring e Operato
302. rnet Explorer 0ft E B X Create Web Report Select Layout SECTIONxx Select Report Data 2008 12 02 14 00 42 TimeUp Hourly Status oOn O off Font Size 2 Select the layout and report data Select Layout Select the layout title from the list box Select Report Data Select the report data from the list box The report data is the data in the DX internal memory The report data is displayed using the date when the report was created and the report value Status To display the report data status select On Status Indication Description A burnout occurred during the reporting period A measurement or computation error occurred during the reporting period Over range or computation overflow occurred during the reporting period A power failure occurred during the reporting period The time was changed during the reporting period OE OR Font Size Select a display font size from 6 points to 12 points IM 04L41B01 17E 1 41 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser 3 Click Create The report data appears in a separate window PLANT xx Hourly Start Tirne 2008 12i06 19 04 55 Time Up 12 06 20 00 00 6 211100E 00 12 06 21 00 00 9 986400E 00 12106 gla 2 719522E 02 1206 3 777920E 01 PUMP T a P T a AP A a AP S 2 147660E 01 2 073220E 01 3 405181E 02 3 988270E 1 1 1958 1 3666 1 8375 1 9634
303. rom the DX Response from the slave device App 2 IM 04L41B01 17E Appendix 2 Login Procedure You log into the DX from your PC to use the functionality of the setting measurement server and the maintenance test server via the Ethernet interface If you complete the procedure successfully up to login complete in the following figure the commands in chapter 3 become functional When Using the Login Function Standard Security Function of the DX Within the number of connections No No Within 2 minutes User name Entered quit Within 2 minutes Password No erification match Within the number of simultaneous uses 3 i Mh Login complete CT stant lt __ gt sudge Z End C D Transit E User entry Response from the DX message omitted For a description of the response format see section 6 1 Code for a description of codes and messages see page App 17 l 1 Connections cannot exceed the maximum number of connections see section 2 1 2 If you try to log in using a wrong password four consecutive times the communication is dropped the number of retries for login is three 3 If you try to log in causing the number of simultaneous uses at the administrator or user level to be exceeded see section 2 1 four consecutive times the communication is dropped even if the password is correct IM 04L41B01 17E App 3 xipueddy E Appe
304. rs p5 Channel configuration NX p1 p2 Assign channels 001 003 004 to 006 to batch group 3 s group number 1 and name the group GROUP2 NX3 1 ON GROUP2 001 003 004 006 Assign channels by using periods to separate each channel or a hyphen to specify a range of channels e For the characters that you can use for group names see appendix 3 ASCII Character Codes Note that you cannot use semicolons or commas e Ifyou are using the multi batch feature BT2 you cannot use this command on a batch group that is recording memory sampling Set p1 and p2 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Sets a trip line release number 3 or later NL pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt p1 Batch group number Set the number to 1 if multi batch BT2 is not in use Query Example Description SG Syntax Query Example Description TH Syntax Query Example p2 Display group number p3 Trip line number 1 to 4 p4 Trip line display ON OFF p5 Display position 0 to 100 p6 Display color RED GREEN BLUE B VIOLET BROWN ORANGE Y GREEN LIGHTBLUE VIOLET GRAY LIME CYAN DARKBLUE YELLOW LIGHTGRAY PURPLE BLACK PINK L BROWN L GREEN DARKGRAY OLIVE DARKCYAN S GREEN p7 Line width 1 2 3 NL p1 p2 p3 Display trip line 2 in red at the 10 position of batch group 3 s display group 1 Set the line width to 1 NL3 1 2 ON 10 RED 1 e Set the position as percent
305. ructure of the Status Information ee iint ieir ocrais sai araea paa raaraa iisi 5 2 Specifications 6 1 Ethernet Interface Specifications 2 0 ccccecccecceceeeeeeeee cece ceeenaeceeseeeaeceeeeeseaeeeeeeensenaeeeeees 6 1 6 2 Serial Interface Specifications 2 0 ccc cecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseseeseseseeeeseeessaeaes 6 2 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications cccca cucsssecessnessassasereoseecesceeenvscaeeesenespideesevednasevenentuereese 6 3 Appendix 1 Data Dropout during Modbus Communication 00 0 ceecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeaes App 1 Appendix 2 Login ProCe Quire sisne a dha a a a ein sein E E sana as App 3 Appendix 3 ASCII Character Codes ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeceeeeeeseseaeeeeeeeee App 6 Appendix 4 Output Flow of the File or the File List on the External Storage Medium and Internal MEMON arae set cgacteg sect stesencetecs a iets teateceetiaeatersetesieeees Meecaecas App 7 Appendix 5 Flow Chart of the FIFO Data Output 000 cece ee ceeee ce eeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeees App 9 IM 04L41B01 17E vii Chapter 1 Using the Ethernet Interface 1 1 DX Features Modbus Client This section gives an overview of the communication functions that the DX can control when it is connected to a network via the Ethernet interface The DX acting as a Modbus client device can connect to a Modbus server device and read or write to the internal register The rea
306. rved Space Data status N D S O E or B N Normal D Differential input S Skip O Over E Error B Burnout Channel number 3 digits 001 to 048 Measurement channel 101 to 160 Computation channel 201 to 440 External input channel a Alarm status level 1 a2 Alarm status level 2 a3 Alarm status level 3 aa Alarm status level 4 Each status is set to H L h 1 R r T t or space H high limit alarm L low limit alarm h difference high limit alarm 1 difference low limit alarm R high limit on rate of change alarm r low limit on rate of change alarm T delay high limit alarm t delay low limit alarm space no alarm Unit information 6 characters left justified Ye oa YS HY mV mV Vo i V ge C XXXXKK User defined character string Sign IM 04L41B01 17E 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data ddddd Mantissa 00000 to 99999 5 digits e Eight digits for computed data e For abnormal data data status is E or data of which the mantissa or the exponent exceeds the range data status is O the mantissa is set to 99999 99999999 for computed data pp Exponent 00 to 04 Space e Example EA DATE 99 02 23 TIME 19 56 32 500 N 001h mv 12345E 03 N 002 mV 67890E 01 S 003 EN sasuodsay a Note Data for non existing channels are not output not even the channel number e For channels set to skip output values from alarm status to
307. s Note In this section CRLF is used to indicate a terminator For information about terminators see page 3 2 Operation Example 1 Logging in with a User Name of ABC2001 and a User ID of 5555 While logged out enter the command BP2 ABC2001 5555CRLF using barcodes The user name and user ID are entered and a window for entering the password appears you have to use the keys to enter the password Note When you enter commands using bar codes you can enter them separated or all at once You can separate commands however you want to For instance in example 1 you could scan the data as indicated below BP2 gt ABC2001 5555 CRLF If you use a barcode reader that automatically attaches a footer and a header to every transmission set the header to BP2 the footer to CRLF and scan ABC2001 5555 Operation Example 2 Entering into a Measurement Ready State with a Batch Number of Process1 and a Lot Number of 0031 When recording has not been started scan the command BT1 Process1 0031 KESTAR TCRLF with the barcode reader The batch and lot number are set and the start window appears Operation Example 3 In setting mode set the file header to process sample 1 In the screen for setting the file header in setting mode move the cursor to the box for entering a character string After this if you press the Input soft key and display the window for e
308. s Settings specified using the BO CS IF and CB commands are reset to the following default values when you reset the DX when you turn the DX off and then back on or when you exit from basic setting mode Output byte order checksum output format 0 e Status filter 255 255 255 255 If you reset the DX you must set these values again Ethernet communications Settings specified using the BO IF and CB commands are reset to their default values when you disconnect the connection to the DX After reconnecting to the DX set these values again 3 60 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 8 Output Commands Setting Measured and Computed Data Output 3 8 Output Commands Setting Measured and Computed Data Output Fo Syntax Example Outputs screen image data FC pl lt terminator gt pl GET Output screen image data Output screen image data from the DX FCGET Description The DX captures the currently displayed screen FE Syntax Example Description ED Syntax and outputs the data in PNG format Outputs setup data FE pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt p1 Output data type 0 Setup data of setting mode Decimal place and unit information Setup data of basic setting mode Setup data file Setup channel information output Configured alarm information output p2 First channel number measurement computation or external input channel p3 Last channel number measurement computation or external input c
309. s and p6 is fixed at off e When the user ID is disabled by the RN command p4 is invalid the DX responds to queries with a string of spaces When p2 WEB e p4 is invalid the DX responds to queries with a string of spaces You can set a password for p5 6 characters or more 6 is fixed at OFF Configures user settings AS1 advanced security option EL pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p lt terminator gt pl Registration number 1 to 90 p2 Login method OFF KEY COMM KEY COMM WEB p3 User name up to 20 characters p4 User ID up to 8 characters p5 Password p6 Period of password validity OFF 1MONTH 3MONTH 6MONTH p7 User privilege setting OFF or 1 to 10 EL p1 Password output in response to queries Default password Valid password specified by a user Expired password Configure the settings for a user who can log in using the DX keys and communication commands Set the user name to User the user ID to 1234 and the period of password validity to 3 months Use user privilege setting 1 EL1 KEY COMM User 1234 3MONTH 1 Description e About user names e You cannot specify more than one of the same user name e You cannot set the user name to quit or all spaces and you cannot use spaces inside the user name When p2 is set to KEY KEY COMM or COMM e p95 is invalid Regardless of the setting the default password is used e When password manag
310. s 3 4 and 3 5 basic setting commands see section 3 6 and output commands see sections 3 7 and 3 8 This function can be used when communicating via the Ethernet interface or the serial interface option For information about the settings and operations for using this function through serial commands see chapter 2 Application timeout This function closes the connection with the PC if there is no data transfer for a given time For example this function prevents a PC from being connected to the DX indefinitely without transferring data and prohibiting other users from making new connections for data transfer IM 04L41B01 17E aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 1 DX Features FTP Server e You can use a PC to access the DX via FTP You can perform operations such as retrieving directory and file lists from the external storage medium of the DX and transferring and deleting files In addition you can also retrieve the directory or file list and transfer files in the internal memory e On DxXs with the AS1 advanced security option you cannot create or delete files on the external storage media connected to the DX e Fora description of the settings required to use this function see section 1 6 PC aJ Ga o o Files on the external storage medium Ethernet FTP server DX IM 04L41B01 17E 1 1 DX Features FTP Client Automatic transferring of files e The display d
311. s MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Serial gt Basic settings Basic Setting Node Serial basic settings Baud rate s00 bp Data length 8 bit Parity Even Handshaking Off OFF Address 1 Protocol Standard 1200 2400 4800 9600 For RS 232 e Baud rate Select 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps e Data length Select 7 or 8 bits To output the data in binary format select 8 e Parity Set the parity check method to Odd Even or None Handshaking Select Off Off XON XON XON RS or CS RS Address For Modbus protocol enter a value in the range of 1 to 99 For a general purpose communication protocol this value is not set Protocol Select Standard for a general purpose communication protocol Modbus for Modbus slave and Master M for Modbus master On DXs with the AS1 advanced security option you can select Barcode to use the barcode protocol If Modbus master is selected Modbus master settings must be entered For RS 422 485 Baud rate Select 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Data length Select 7 or 8 bits To output the data in binary format select 8 Parity Set the parity check method to Odd Even or None Handshaking Not specified Address Select a number from 1 to 99 Protocol This is the same as with the RS 232 2 10 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 5 Using the Modbus Slave F
312. s Yes CL Executes manual SNTP Yes Yes LO Loads setup data for setting mode Yes Yes MA Resets a match time timer Yes Yes UD Switches the screen Yes Yes BQ Locked ACK Yes No CW Sets an event switch Yes No IM 04L41B01 17E 2 19 soeLE U jenas y Buisn 2 8 Using the Setting and Measurement Function Users cannot execute operations commands that are not allowed under their user privileges The correspondence between the commands that can be used and the user privilege settings are indicated in the table below For information about how to configure the settings using key operations see section 2 1 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM 04L41B01 05EN User Privilege Settings Command Key operations START PSO Memory start STOP PS1 Memory stop External storage Setup loading LO Loads a setup file operations Function Alarm ACK AK _ Alarm acknowledge Message and MS __ Writes a message batch BJ Writes a free message BT Sets a batch name BU Sets a batch comment MH Sets a batch text field Math TL Starts or stops computation Data save EV _ Executes manual sampling or causes a timeout IR Resets a relative timer MA Resets a match time timer LI Saves a setup file E mail FTP EM Starts or stops e mail CU Recovers Modbus manually Time settings CL Executes manual SNTP Screen SY Sets a four panel display operations CV Switches betwe
313. s a combination of the sign mantissa E sign and exponent such as in 3 8000000E 02 OVER Positive overrange OVER Negative overrange Burnout Burnout data Empty data Error data uuu u_ Unit up to 6 characters 1 26 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 4 Sending E mail Messages Test E mail Format e Subject Subject Test Syntax Test_mail CRLF lt Host_name gt CRLF hostCRLF CRLF lt Time gt CRLF mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF CRLF lt Message gt CRLF x msCRLF CRLF x Message number 1 to 10 ms Message content only specified messages are output Common Display Items for All Formats Time information mo dd hh mi ss Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 The month day hour minute and second of the time information are output in the order specified by the date format in the basic setting mode Host name domain name and header information headerl Header 1 displayed only when it is set header2 Header 2 displayed only when it is set host domain Host name or IP address IP address when the host name is not assigned In the case of an IP address the lt Host gt section is set to lt IP address gt Domain name Space IM 04L41B01 17E 1 27 aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Setting the Web Server Function From the basic setting mode menu set the server function and Web page of Communication
314. s aniran akanai ainai eiaa 4 1 resuming command transmission 1 63 2 14 FeAl Sinningia i iaie 2 12 retry interval crevice seni Raia 1 56 revisions ii RS 232 connection procedure cccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeee 2 4 RS 232 interface CONNECHOF eee cece eeeeeeeeeeseteneeeeeeteaees v RS 232 settings 2 10 RS 232 specifications 0 06 6 2 RS 422 485 connection procedure eects 2 7 Index 4 IM 04L41B01 17E RS 422 485 dedicated responses cceceseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 4 5 RS 422 485 interface terminal 0 0 cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeees v RS 422 485 settings 2a RS 422 485 specifications eee eee eeeeeeeeteeeeneees 6 2 PRMD esse ge ces cea R angles AE T E sacs 3 17 S sample programsat a et scheduled e mail HA scheduled settings mail cccccecseeeteeteeeteeneeeeeees 1 20 sendalarm ACUO sinrin 1 20 SONGS I cess scrvcrnaniesatesecnaciiersevecaecivent oesnsannanereresseterucersdineds 1 19 serial communication setting Of cceeeeeeee 2 10 2 11 serial interface specifications Server Server NUMBET ssinsnsrsiin Ta s rv r NUMDET tasinan aani Tia 1 56 setting measurement function cceeeeteeeeeeeeees 2 2 2 18 setting measurement server setting COMMANAS s es aae AEA a 3 4 setting commands AS1 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneee 3 11 setting commands setting 23 19 setting connection
315. s the data transmission The X OFF and X ON signals are treated as data e Data reception control The operation is the same as with XON RS Not mmm The PC program must be designed so that the received buffers of both the DX and the PC do not become full If you select XON XON send the data in ASCII format 2 6 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 3 Connecting the DX RS 422 485 Connection Procedure Terminal arrangement and signal names Connect a cable to the clamp terminal DIDADO re rear panel FG SDB RDB SG SDA RDA Each terminal corresponds to the signal indicated below Signal Name Meaning FG Frame ground of the DX SG Signal ground SDB Send data B SDA Send data A RDB Receive data B RDA Receive data A Connection e Connecting the Cable As shown in the figure below remove approximately 5 mm of the covering from the end of the cable to expose the conductor Keep the exposed section from the end of the shield within 5 cm e Connection of a four wire system Fc spp gt ARpB gt Electric potential of the shield Shield Connecting to the host device The figure below illustrates the connection of the DX to a host device If the port on the host device is an RS 232 inter
316. s the log when multiple commands separated by sub delimiters BO1 PSO are transmitted The commands are separated and output in order with the multiple command flags EA 99 05 11 99 05 11 99 05 11 99 05 11 99 05 11 99 05 11 EN 128 12 12 12 12 123 SLs 1 SL 31 11 BLET Sale 31g PRP PPP PR 12345678901234567890 gt BOl 12345678901234567890 lt EO 12345678901234567890 gt 2 12345678901234567890 lt E2 01 124 12345678901234567890 gt PSO 12345678901234567890 lt EO IM 04L41B01 17E 4 11 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data FTP Client Log The FL command is used to output the data The FTP client log is output Up to 50 file transfer logs are retained Logs that exceed 50 are cleared from the oldest data For the meanings of the error codes see the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_ nnn xxxxxxxxx_k ffffffff_ CRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 nnn Error code 001 to 999 XXXXXXXXX Detailed code 9 characters k Server type P S P Primary S Secondary fff File name up to 51 characters including the extension Space Example EA 99 07 26 10 00 00 P display dsp 99 07 27 10 00 00 P setting pnl 99 07 28 10 00 00 123 HOSTADDR P trend png EN E 4 12 I
317. scaling display includes changing the decimal place e The channel is a computation channel and the channel is turned on or off or an expression or a span value is changed e The h and settings of p4 are valid only when the measurement range is set to differential computation between channels e Ifp4 is set to R or r set the interval for the high low limit on the rate of change using the XA command e Ifp4is set to T ort set the alarm delay for the delay high low limit alarm using the BD command e Set the p5 alarm value in the following range based on the p4 alarm type or the target channel e Upper Lower Delay Upper and Delay Lower alarms DC voltage thermocouple or RTD input Within in the measurable range of the selected range Contact input Oor1 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 21 eee el 3 4 Setting Commands Scaling input 1 5V scaling and square root 5 to 105 of span except within 30000 to 30000 Difference high limit and difference low limit alarms Within the measurable range e High limit on rate of change and low limit on rate of change alarms A value that consists of at least one non zero digit For example 0 0001 for the 2 V range The maximum value is within the measurable range except within 30000 to 30000 For example 3 0000 for the 2 V range For contact input only the value of 1 can be specified e Computation channels For computation channels 9999999 to 99999
318. screen 2 HISTRICAL Historical trend display group 3 to screen 3 group 4 to screen 4 and set COLUMN_BAR the screen type of all screens to trend Stacked bar graph UD2 TREND 1 TREND 2 TREND 3 TREND 4 INTERNAL1 to INTERNAL3 Description e You can use this command on the DX2000 Custom display e When multi batch BT2 is in use you cannot internal 1 to 3 specify a display group that does not belong EXTERNAL1 to EXTERNAL25 to the currently displayed batch group You Custom display cannot use this command in batch overview external 1 to 25 mode ANNUNCIATOR To display a specific four panel display Syntax UD pl1 p2 lt terminator gt pl Display type 3 p2 Four panel configuration number Annunciator display EVENT SWITCH Event switch status display p3 Display group number 0 Displays the four panel Example Set the display to one screen trend and set the j configuration that you specify number of the group to display in the screen to 4 direct i y UD1 TREND 4 Description e The setting p2 MODBUS M is only valid if the serial interface protocol is set to MODBUS M The setting p2 REPORT is only valid on models with the M1 or PM1 math option e When multi batch BT2 is in use there are 1 to 4 Displays a four panel configuration that you set using SY sets a screen group Description e You can use this command on the DX2000 e When multi batch BT2 is in use you cannot ee use this command in batch overvi
319. se display is turned off You cannot set the first menu item to SEPARATOR The display group parameter GROUP 1 to GROUP36 and the auto switching parameter AUTO on off setting apply to the trend digital bar graph and historical trend menus For example if you set AUTO to off for the trend menu and then set AUTO to on for the digital menu AUTO is turned on for the trend digital bar graph and historical trend menus e When p2 is set to ANNUNCIATOR the DX1000 does not have submenus e When p2 is set to INFORMATION you can only set p3 to DISP_GROUP on the DX1000 e When p2 is set to OVERVIEW you can only set p3 to ALARMACK on models with the AS1 advanced security option e When p2 is set to LOG you can only set p3 to OPERATE_LOG SETTING_LOG or DISP_ITEM on models with the AS1 advanced security option LOGIN _LOG cannot be specified on models with the AS1 advanced security option Setting the function menu pl Type FUNC p2 2 Menu items to display The DX displays the functions that you select from below in the menu in the specified order The DX does not display menu items that are not specified ALARMACK Alarm acknowledge ALARM RESET Alarm display reset MESSAGE FREE MESSAGE MEDIA EJECT SNAPSHOT MANUAL SAMPLE TRIGGER Event trigger SAVE DISPLAY SAVE_EVENT SAVE_STOP MATH _START STOP MATH RESET MATH ACK Computed data dropout acknowledge EDGE_SWITCH Presses event edge swi
320. see sets a trip line UTO The same color as the alarm color larm level 4 color AUTO or 24 colors see L sets a trip line UTO The same color as the alarm color TA p1 Display alarm marks on the channel 004 scale TA004 ALARM ON Alarm mark ps p6 p7 rz b gt Pb z gt Zo IM 04L41B01 17E 3 27 aniio el 3 4 Setting Commands TG Sets a color scale band Syntax TG pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Measurement computation or external input channel number p2 Area OFF IN OUT p3 Color AUTO or 24 colors see NL sets a trip line p4 Lower display position limit p5 Upper display position limit Query TG p1 Example Set the channel 005 color scale band to the range from 1 0000 to 0 5000 V 2 V range and set the color to green TG005 IN GREEN 10000 5000 SQ Sets the LCD brightness and the screen backlight saver Syntax SQ pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt p1 LCD brightness 1 to 8 DX1000 1 to 6 DX2000 p2 Screen backlight saver type OFF Disables the saver function DIMMER Dims the backlight TIMEOFF Turns off the backlight p3 Amount of time until the DX switches to saver mode 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN 30MIN 1H p4 Event that causes the DX to return from saver mode KEY Pressing of a key KEY ALM Pressing of a key or an alarm occurrence Query SQ Example Set the LCD brightness to 2 and the screen backlight saver type to dimmer Set the amount time of until the DX switch
321. selectable values for p4 varies depending on the model e You cannot use this command if e The Web server function is set to Not using the WS command The operator and monitor pages are both set to Off using the WW command Sets the interval for acquiring data to the FIFO buffer FR pl lt terminator gt pl 1 fixed p1 FIFO acquisition interval 25MS 125MS 250MS 500MS 1S 2S 5S IM 04L41B01 17E 3 33 ainiin eo 3 4 Setting Commands Query Example Description SY Syntax FR Set the FIFO acquisition interval to 1 s FR1 1S Set the acquisition interval to a value greater than the scan interval e Ifyou set the scan interval to a value greater than the acquisition interval using the XV command or from the screen the acquisition interval is automatically set equal to the scan interval e The DX has a circular FIFO First In First Out buffer The DX acquires measured computed values to the internal memory at predetermined time intervals from the time the power is turned on The DX outputs the data when you send an FF command The DX remembers the previous output position for each connection and updates the position when the DX outputs the next set of data when you send another FF command This scheme compensates for the differences in the processing power of the measurement PCs and the communication delay It enables data to be retrieved without any dropouts if the measurement PC reads the
322. set to IM 04L41B01 17E 3 39 ainiin eo 3 5 Control Commands Example MS Syntax Example Description BJ Syntax Example Description Set the trend interval to the secondary trend interval CUL Writes a message display and write MS pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt p1 Message number 1 to 100 p2 Message write destination GROUP A specified display group ALL All display groups All display groups in the specified batch group number p4 when multi batch BT2 is in use p3 Display group number The display group number when p2 is set to GROUP Carries no meaning when p2 is set to ALL p4 Message write destination batch group number Write the message in message number 8 to display group 1 MS8 GROUP 1 e Ifyou omit p2 the message is written to all display groups e Parameter p4 is only valid when multi batch BT2 is in use When multi batch BT2 is in use you cannot omit p4 e Set parameters p3 and p4 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Write a free message BJ pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt p1 Message number 1 to 10 p2 Message up to 32 characters p3 Message write destination GROUP A specified display group ALL All display groups All display groups in the specified batch group number p5 when multi batch BT2 is in use p4 Display group number The display group number when p2 is set to GROUP Carries no meaning when p2 is set to ALL p5 Message write destination batch grou
323. setting mode YO pl1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Name of the file to load up to 32 characters p2 Medium 0 CF slot Al USB p3 What to load 0 to 2 0 Basic setting mode and setting mode settings 1 Basic setting mode settings except for login settings and setting mode settings 2 Login settings Only load the CONFIG1 login settings from the CF card YOCONFIG1 0 2 e Do not include the extension when specifying the file name e You can set p2 to 1 on models with the USB1 USB interface option e Ifyou omit parameter p2 the medium is set to CF slot e p3 is only valid on models with the AS1 advanced security option Omitting p3 is the same as setting it to 0 Clears measured and computed data and initializes setup data YC pl lt terminator gt p1 The types of data to be initialized and cleared 0 Basic setting mode settings setting mode settings measured and computed data custom display screen setup data and log data Clear 1 on the DX 1 Setting mode settings measured and computed data custom display screen setup data and log data Clear 2 on the DX Example Description IR Syntax Example Description MA Syntax Example Description CW Syntax Example LR Syntax 2 Measured and computed data custom display screen setup data and log data Clear 3 on the DX Perform Clear 3 on the DX C2 This command is invalid on models with the AS1 advan
324. signal is ignored Data reception control There is no handshaking between the DX and the PC When the received buffer becomes full all of the data that overflows are discarded RS True fixed IM 04L41B01 17E 2 5 2 3 Connecting the DX e XON XON e Data transmission control Software handshaking is performed between the DX and the PC When an X OFF code is received while sending data to the PC the DX stops the data transmission When the DX receives the next X ON code the DX resumes the data transmission The CS signal received from the PC is ignored e Data reception control Software handshaking is performed between the DX and the PC When the free area of the received buffer decreases to 1537 bytes the DX sends an X OFF code When the free area increases to 511 bytes the DX sends an X ON code RS True fixed e XON RS e Data transmission control The operation is the same as with XON XON e Data reception control Hardware handshaking is performed between the DX and the PC When the free area of the received buffer decreases to 1537 bytes the DX sets RS False When the free area increases to 511 bytes the DX sets RS True e CS RS e Data transmission control Hardware handshaking is performed between the DX and the PC When the CS signal becomes False while sending data to the PC the DX stops the data transmission When the CS signal becomes True the DX resume
325. simultaneous connections see section 6 1 When Not Using the Login Function Access the server using the user name admin or user Of the commands in chapter 3 you can use either the administrator admin or user commands depending on which name you used to log in When Using the Login Function Standard Log in as a administrator or user who has been registered on the DX Of the commands in chapter 3 you can use either the administrator or user commands depending on which name you used to log in On DXs with the AS1 Advanced Security Option When Not Using the Login Function Access the server using the user name user You can use the monitoring function commands You cannot access the server using the user name admin When Using the Login Function Connect log in to the monitoring function or the setting function as a administrator or user who has been registered on the DX Administrator User eae e Monitoring Function You can produce measurement and setup data and execute input commands for communication input data and external input channels Administrators and users can connect to the monitoring function Users can connect regardless of whether they log in through key operations or serial communication e Setting Function Administrators and users can connect to the setting function Administrators can execute all the commands In addition to the monitoring function commands users can execut
326. ssword change 4 For information about the maximum number of simultaneous connections see section 6 1 2 Function name Enter setting to select the setting function and monitor to select the monitoring function 3 The user ID is requested even for settings that do not use it but for these settings you can enter anything you want to 4 If using the password management function AS1 option the following error code is also output 006 110 114 764 765 766 767 768 769 771 772 773 774 775 For information on login conditions see section 1 12 For error codes see chapter 10 DX1000 DX1000N or chapter 11 DX2000 in the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E IM 04L41B01 17E App 5 xipueddy E Appendix 3 ASCII Character Codes Upper 4 bits N O O Sr T le O Or Lower 4 bits 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NI lt xX S lt co leln a jalo Sc e m N lt lt S lt C aln W O vlan O lt S S oizizir x e irlo lnimioio w DAO e m m mmo A gt Sla gt l gt O a Iv lt IC C cCA 0 0 Ozo o fe JD D gt Ds D o B D v ax w v w ITT nimio S olalNiola Alw rm o 0 3513 x se ajo Qlaolo a e The delimiter sub delimiter query symbol and terminator CR
327. summary is output Up to 1000 alarm events are retained Alarm events that exceed 1000 are cleared from the oldest data e Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_kkk ccc _1s_nnnnnnnnnnCRLF ENCRLF yy mo dd hh mm ss Time when the alarm occurred yy Year 00 to 99 eal mo Month 01 to 12 m dd Day 01 to 31 P hh Hour 00 to 23 8 mm Minute 00 to 59 a ss Second 00 to 59 A kkk Alarm cause OFF Alarm release ON Alarm occurrence ACK Alarm acknowledge ccc Measurement computation or external input channel number l Alarm level 1 to 4 s Alarm type H h L 1 R r T or t nnnnnnnnnn Alarm sequence Space For all channel alarms the channel number alarm level and alarm status items are all set to asterisk The channel numbers and alarm levels of individual alarm acknowledgments are logged e Example EA 01 05 11 01 05 11 01 05 11 01 05 11 EN 12 2 12 12 20 30 31 32 00 ON 001 1L 00 OFF 131 3t 200 ORE FA 00 ACK BP HO DDH IM 04L41B01 17E 4 23 4 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Message Summary The FL command is used to output the data The message summary is output Up to 100 messages are retained Messages that exceed 100 are cleared from the oldest log e Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_mmm ggg zzz uuu nnn CRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 mmm
328. t pl Enable or disable USE or NOT p2 Daylight saving time start month JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC p3 Daylight saving time start week 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH LAST p4 Daylight saving time start day SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT p5 Daylight saving time start hour 0 to 23 p6 Daylight saving time end month JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC p7 Daylight saving time end week 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH LAST p8 Daylight saving time end day SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT p9 Daylight saving time end hour 0 to 23 TD Switch to daylight saving summer time on the first Sunday of June and switch out of it on the first Sunday in December TDUSE JUN 1ST SUN 0 DEC 1ST SUN 0 Sets the trend display TT pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt p1 Graph display direction HORIZONTAL Horizontal display VERTICAL Vertical display WIDE Horizontal wide display SPLIT Horizontal split display p2 Clear waveform at start ON or OFF p3 Message display direction HORIZONTAL VERTICAL p4 Scale digits NORMAL FINE 3 digit display 4 digit display p5 Current value display MARK Displays using a mark BARGRAPH Display using a bar graph For the circular display only p1 HORIZONTAL is valid 3 26 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands Query Example Description SE Syntax Query Example IB_ Syntax Query Example SB Syntax Query Examp
329. t amp Write Cancel Command Response 1 44 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Displaying the Measured Data at the Specified Date and Time Operator page only release number 3 or later You can search for measured data at the specified date and time and display the results You can search the display data or event data in the DX internal memory Notee This function uses the DX function that displays the measured data at the specified date and time e You can search the last 10 years of data excluding the data before year 2000 e For details on the display conditions see section 4 3 in the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy 1 Click Data Range Search to open the ENTER DATE amp TIME RANGE window 2 Set the date and time of the data recording and the data type E SEARCH MENU 10 0 23 75 Microsoft Internet Explorer Q E f JT Y DER ENTER DATE amp TIME RANGE DISP DATA EVENT DATA Historical Display 3 Click Historical Display The DX screen switches and the data at the specified date and time appears Refresh to EAA OFF v VA 100 Data list Print page TREND Select Group gt x Select Group gt Data Range Search Select Screen gt v A DISP lt ZENTER gt v IM 04L41B01 17E 1 45 1 6 Accessing the Measurem
330. t sTT o T Each pin corresponds to the signal indicated below The following table shows the signal name RS 232 standard JIS and ITU T standard signals Pin Signal Name Name Meaning JIS ITU T RS 232 2 RD 104 BB RXD Received data Input signal to the DX 3 SD 103 BA TXD Transmitted data Output signal from the DX 5 SG 102 AB GND Signal ground Signal ground 7 RS 105 CA RTS Request to send Handshaking signal when receiving data from the PC Output signal from the DX 8 CS 106 CB CTS Clear to send Handshaking signal when receiving data from the PC Input signal to the DX Pins 1 4 6 and 9 are not used Connection e Signal direction lt lt RS Request to send Ready to receive CS Clear to send Ready gt lt lt SD Send data PC RD Received data _ gt 2 4 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 3 Connecting the DX e Connection example e OFF OFF XON XON e CS RS CTS RTS Handshaking When using the RS 232 interface for transferring data it is necessary for equipment on both sides to agree on a set of rules to ensure the proper transfer of data The set of rules is called handshaking Because there are various handshaking methods that can be used between the DX and the PC you must make sure that the same method is chosen by both the DX and the PC You c
331. tch TIMER RESET MATCH_T_RESET Resets single match time timer KEYLOCK Enables or disables key lock LOGOUT PASSWORD _CHANGE RATE CHANGE Display rate 1 or display rate 2 BATCH TEXT FIELD FAVORITE REGIST Registers as favorite 4PANEL JUMP_DISPLAY Registers the screen to return to 3 36 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands 3 5 Control Commands Example SYSTEM INFO NETWORK_INFO SNTP EMAIL START STOP EMAIL TEST FTP_TEST BUILDER Custom display builder USRLOCKACK User locked ACK Display FREE MESSAGE and SNAPSHOT in the function menu SM Description Query SM SM SM SM SM FUNC FREE_MESSAGE SNAPSHOT A command error occurs if you specify the same menu item multiple times You cannot specify SEPARATOR You cannot omit parameters using delimiters 6o You cannot hide LOGOUT If you do not include it in the parameters it is displayed as the last item You can only set p2 to USRLOCKACK on models with the AS1 advanced security option You cannot set p2 to TRIGGER or KEYLOCK on models with the AS1 advanced security option 2 When querying all menus DISP_MAIN When querying all main menu items DISP_SUB When querying all submenu items DISP_SUB TREND When querying the trend submenu FUNC When querying all function menu items 3 5 Control Commands BT Syntax Query Example Description BU Syntax Query Example Description MH Syntax
332. tch group number Set the number to 1 if multi batch BT2 is not in use p2 Configuration BATCH File name based on the batch name DATE User assigned character string date SERIAL User assigned character string serial number p3 User assigned name up to 16 characters valid when p2 is set to DATE or SERIAL TF pl Set the batch group 2 s file name configuration to BATCH and set the user assigned string to DX1DATA TF2 BATCH DX1DATA Set p1 by referring to the table in section 3 3 Sets the date and time SD pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 Date in the YY MM DD format fixed YY Year 00 to 79 MM Month 01 to 12 DD Day 01 to 31 p2 Time in the HH MM SS format fixed HH Hour 00 to 23 MM Minute 00 to 59 Ss Second 00 to 59 SD Set the internal clock to 13 00 00 on October 1 2005 D05 10 01 13 00 00 e The p1 and p2 format is fixed at eight characters Use the format below Do not insert spaces If you do an error will occur p1 YY MM DD lower two digits of the year month day p2 HH MM SS hour minute second TD Syntax Query Example TT Syntax On a DX whose release number is 3 or earlier When you send an SD command the DX switches to setting mode and sets the date and time Ona DX whose release number is 4 or later When you send an SD command the DX sets the date and time without switching to setting mode Sets daylight saving time TD pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 lt terminator g
333. the DX is configured to include a tag number or a channel number in the e mail subject one e mail is sent for each event 1 22 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 4 Sending E mail Messages Scheduled E mail Format e Subject Subject Periodic Data e Syntax header1lCRLF header2CRLF CRLF Periodic data CRLF lt Host_name gt CRLF hostCRLF CRLF lt Time gt CRLF mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF CRLF E mail message s did not_reach_intended_recipient s CRLF CGG a Count nnCRLF mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF aoej19 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy CRLF lt Time gt CRLF mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF cec scaddd gt dGREE CRLF Access the following URL in order to look at_a_screen CRLF http host domain CRLF CRLF ccc c Channel number tag comment or tag number Up to 16 characters Channels set to Skip or Off are not output For the channel number see section 3 3 ttt t Type of discarded e mail Alarm summary Alarm mail Periodic data Scheduled mail System warning System mail Report data Report mail nn Number of discarded e mails ddd d Measured Computed value up to 10 digits including the sign and decimal point unit up to 6 characters OVER Positive overrange OVER Negative overrange Burnout Burnout data Eaka Error data The time that follows the type and count of discarded e mails is the time when the e mail is discarded last IM 04L41B01 17E 1 23 1 4 Sending E mail Messages System Mail Power Failure Format e Subject
334. the menu cutomize function Operate as follows Press MENU to switch to setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Menu customize gt Display menu 1 Select INFORMATION gt MODBUS MASTER 2 Press the View soft key Read cycle Ss Inter block delay Off za Time out ris Auto recovery i 2min Communication condition Retrials pa a Comm Data Slave No Status First Last Address Resisters 1 R Good C91 Cat 1 30001 214 O None 1i 14 1 40001 W None 101 101 1 40003 e Register number g Address for a slave device DX channels DUBUNKOWOVHUEY baramaen Detail code Status lamp Cursor to select a command Used when resuming command transmission to a slave device using the front panel keys IM 04L41B01 17E 2 13 eu zu jenas y BursnN fy 2 6 Using the Modbus Master Function Communication conditions The read cycle Inter block delay Time out Auto recovery and Retrials settings are displayed e Communication Status The communication status is displayed using the status lamp and the detail code Status Lamp Detail Code Meaning Green Good Communication is operating normally Yellow Command is readying Red Communication is stopped Common to yellow None No response from the slave device and red Func The slave device cannot execute the command from the DX Regi The slave device does not have the specified register
335. tic saving OFF ON Media FIFO OFF ON Use media FIFO WUMEDIA ON ON Description Parameter p3 is valid when p2 is set to ON Computation settings Syntax WU pl pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt Setting type MATH p2 p3 p4 Display on error OVER Positive overflow OVER Negative overflow Data when the SUM or AVE value overflows ERROR Sets the computed result to computation error SKIP Discards the data that overflowed and continues the computation LIMIT Process the data as follows For measurement channels that do not have linear scaling specified the DX sets the data to the upper or lower limit of the measurement range For measurement channels that have linear scaling specified the DX sets the data to the specified scan upper or lower limit e For computation channels the DX sets the data to the specified span upper or lower limit Data when the MAX MIN or P P value overflows OVER Computes using the overflow data SKIP Discards the data that overflowed and continues the computation Report settings Syntax pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 Description WU p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt Setting type REPORT Report computation type 1 MAX Maximum value MIN Minimum value AVE Average value SUM Integrated value INST Instantaneous value Report computation type 2 OFF Disables report computation MAX Maximum value MIN Minimum value AVE Average value SU
336. tings for sending e mail when alarms occur or release e Recipient1 and Recipient2 Set the e mail recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select On to send e mail or Off to not send e mail e Active alarms Sends an e mail when an alarm occurs or releases You can select On send e mail or Off not send e mail for alarms 1 to 4 e Include instantaneous value Select On to attach instantaneous value data The data that is attached is the instantaneous value that is measured at the time the e mail is transmitted IM 04L41B01 17E 1 19 aoejJ9 U JOUIBYI 24 Buisy IS 1 4 Sending E mail Messages Include source URL Select On to attach the source URL Attach the URL when the Web server is enabled Subject Enter the subject of the e mail using up to 32 alphanumeric characters The default setting is Alarm_summary Header1 and Header2 Enter header 1 and header 2 using up to 64 characters Send alarm action Release number 3 or later To send e mail when an alarm occurs and when it is cleared select On Off To only send e mail when an alarm occurs select On Include tag ch in Subject Release number 3 or later Select On to include a tag number in the subject If the tag number is not set the corresponding channel number is included Scheduled Settings Specify the settings for sending e mail at scheduled times Recipient1 and Recipient2 Set the e mail recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select On to send e mail o
337. tion You need to configure the following settings to use the login function INo Setting Description and Reference Communication To access the DX through a communication interface you must login Security gt log in See section 1 3 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 Communication User s Manual 2 Login Register users whose mode is Web See section 1 3 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual 3 Web page Set Access control to On in the operator and monitor pages Only users whose mode is set to Web can access the DX Web page When you access the page you will be prompted for a user name and password Enter the user name and password that you set in item 2 in the table IM 04L41B01 17E 1 31 aoej19 U JOUIBYIW 24 Buisp IS 1 5 Monitoring the DX on a PC Browser Contents of the Monitor Page Note If the DX is in setting mode or basic setting mode you cannot display the monitor page or the operator page If you try to do so an error message appears For details on the different modes see the Operation Guide IM04L41B01 02E or IM04L42B01 02E r Refresh the screen Display the alarm summary Displays the alarm summary in a separate window All channel display Displays the measured values and alarm statuses of all channels in a separate window Alarm sound Select On to produce an alarm sound when an alarm occurs on the DX Log Displays various logs in a
338. tion 3 3 When Setting the Channels to Voltage TC RTD or ON OFF Input Syntax Query Example SR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Input type VOLT DC voltage TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance temperature detector DI ON OFF input p3 Measurement range p4 Span lower limit p5 Span upper limit SR p1 Set the channel 001 input type to TC type R the span lower limit to 0 C and the span upper limit to 1760 0 C SR001 TC R 0 17600 Description e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling or computation is in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling Set p1 and p3 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e For parameters p4 and p5 enter values with five digits or less excluding the decimal point When Computing the Difference between Channels Syntax SR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Setting type DELTA p3 Input type VOLT DC voltage TE Thermocouple RTD Resistance temperature detector DI ON OFF input p4 Measurement range Query Example p5 Span lower limit p6 Span upper limit p7 Reference channel number measurement channel number SR p1 Set the channel 010 setting type to differential computation between channels with the reference channel set to 001 and set the input type to TC Set the meas
339. tion details 4 p4 DISPLAYGROUPCHANGE p4 MESSAGE and p6 SELECT Display group number i Display group number p4 FLAG Flag number p4 MESSAGE and p6 ALL p4 MESSAGE Message number 1 to 100 i You can specify any value p4 PANELLOAD Setup file number 1 to 3 The DX returns 1 in response p4 COMMENTDISPLAY to this query Comment text block number p8 Action details 5 p4 MESSAGE p4 FAVORITEDISPLAY KEY Presses the favorite key Batch group number SELECT Specifies a registered screen Query TU p1 If there is a parameter whose setting is invalid the DX responds to queries for that parameter with a fixed value If p4 MEMORYSTART STOP MEMORYSTART MEMORYSTOP SAVEDISPLAY SAVEEVENT or MATHRESET and p5 is invalid the DX returns ALL If p4 DISPLAYGROUPCHANGE and p6 is p6 Action details 3 p4 MES SAGE Method of specifying the destination to write the message ALL All display groups SELECT A specific display group p4 FAVORITEDISPLAY and p5 SELECT Number of the screen registered to the favorite key 1 to 8 3 30 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 4 Setting Commands invalid the DX returns 1 e You cannot use this command while recording If p4 MESSAGE and p7 or p8 is invalid the memory sampling or computation is in DX returns p7 1 or p8 1 progress When using the BT2 multi batch Examples are given below option you cannot use this command if any p1 through p3 are indicated by an ellips
340. to enter a new password after the current one expires Follow the directions that appear to enter the new password Invalid User If a user tries to log in with the wrong password consecutively for the number of times specified by the password retry frequency setting that user is made invalid and he or she will be unable to log in e Releasing the Invalid User Status The administrator can release the invalid user status For instructions on how to do this see the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM04L41B01 05EN Error Messages and Dealing with Them If an error message appears while you are logging in see chapter 10 in the DX1000 DX1000N User s Manual or chapter 11 in the DX2000 User s Manual 1 74 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 12 Using the Setting Measurement Server e Outputting Status Information e Starting and Stopping Measurement and Computation e Writing Messages e Setting the Batch Name Sending Commands Use the dedicated DX commands The commands that you can use are listed below For details about the commands see chapter 3 For information about the responses to the commands see chapter 4 Connected Administrator User Function Setting function All the commands are available All the output commands except for ME and MO and some of the control commands are available operations that are forbidden by the user privilege settings are not available Monitoring function All the output commands
341. ts the serial interface YS pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 p2 Data length 7 8 p3 Parity check NONE ODD EVEN p4 Handshaking OFF OFF XON XON XON RS CS RS p5 RS 422 485 address 01 to 99 p6 Protocol NORMAL MODBUS MODBUS M 3 56 IM 04L41B01 17E 3 6 Basic Setting Commands Query Example Description YL Syntax Query Example Description YM YS Set the baud rate to 9600 the data length to 8 the parity check to ODD handshaking to OFF OFF the RS 422 485 address to 02 and the protocol to NORMAL YS9600 8 ODD OFF OFF 02 NORMAL You can use this command on models with the C2 or C3 serial interface option The setting p6 BARCODE is only valid on models with the AS1 advanced security option Sets the operation of the Modbus master function YL pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Read cycle 125MS 250MS 500MS 1S 2S 5S 10S p2 Timeout 125MS 250MS 500MS 1S 2S 5S 10S 17MIN p3 Retrials OFF 1 to 5 10 20 p4 Command wait time OFF 5MS 10MS 15MS 45MS 100MS p5 Auto recovery OFF 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H YL Set the read cycle to 500 ms the timeout to 250 ms the number of retrials to 2 the command wait time to 10 ms and the automatic return time limit to 5 min YL500MS 250MS 2 10MS 5MIN You can use this command on models with the C2 or C3 serial i
342. u arrange the parameters that correspond to information you want to receive Parameter Description serial Outputs the serial number host Outputs the host name host name that you specified in section 1 3 ip Outputs the IP address the IP address that you specified in section 1 3 Example Query the IP address and host name The first frame below contains the command packet The second frame contains the response packet ip host EA ip 192 168 111 24 host DX1000 1 EN Description Separate each parameter with one or more spaces space tab carriage return or line feed Parameters are not case sensitive Undefined parameters are ignored Parameters after the 32nd parameter are ignored IM 04L41B01 17E 3 67 spuewwog fs Chapter4 Responses 4 1 Response Syntax The following table shows the types of responses for various commands described in the previous chapter The DX returns a response affirmative negative response to a command that is delimited by a single terminator The controller should follow the one command to one response format When the command response rule is not followed the operation is not guaranteed Commands Response Group Affirmation Negation Setting commands _ Setting Affirmative response Single negative Control response or multiple Basic Setting commands negative responses Output commands _ Control Setup m
343. u can set the host name as a server name For details on setting the DNS see section 1 3 e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required e Port number Enter the port number of the SNTP server in the range of 1 to 65535 The default value is 123 e Access interval Set the time interval for synchronizing the time with the server to OFF 1 8 12 or 24h If you select OFF you can synchronize the time manually by operating soft keys The time is not synchronized if the difference in the time between the DX and the server is greater than or equal to 10 minutes e Access reference time Set the reference time for making queries e Access timeout Set the time to wait for the response from the SNTP server when querying the time to 10 30 90s e Time adjust on Start action Select On to synchronize the time using SNTP when memory start is executed Otherwise select Off Manually Synchronizing the Time You can synchronize the time at any time by operating the FUNC key The SNTP client setting must be enabled Press FUNC and select SNTP 1 52 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 8 Synchronizing the Time Setting the SNTP Server Carry out the steps below to run the DX as an SNTP server Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet gt Server gt Server modes net Basic Setting Mode Cine Server
344. um value is inserted in the header sum and data sum sections If the check sum is disabled parameter 0 a zero is inserted in the header sum and data sum sections For a sample program that calculates the sum value see Calculating the sum value on the next page If the amount of data output in response to a ME MO command is large not all the data may be returned in one output request parameter GET In this case the END flag becomes 0 You must send output requests parameter NEXT to receive the rest of the data until the END flag becomes 1 The bits that have e for the name and flag are not used The value is undefined An ID number indicating the binary data type The table below indicates the data types and the corresponding output commands Binary data that is not indicated in the above table is considered undefined files ID Binary Data Type Type Format Output Number Command 0 Undefined file file ME 1 Instantaneous data Data Yes ED 1 FIFO data Data Yes FF 13 Screen data file File PNG ME FC 15 Display data file File DAD No ME 16 Event data file File DAE No ME 17 Manual sample file File DAM Yes ME MO 18 Report file File DAR Yes ME MO 19 Setup data file File PDL No ME FE4 25 Setup channel information output Data Yes FE5 26 Configured alarm information output Data Yes FE6 31 Display data file File DSD No ME 32 Event data file File DS
345. unction The DX is used as a Modbus slave For the Modbus specifications see section 6 3 Setting the Serial Communication Select Modbus as a protocol on the Basic settings For detail see section 2 4 Setting the Serial Communication Reading Writing the DX Data on Another Device Another device master device sends commands to the DX to read the DX data or write data to the DX You can perform some operations such as memory start by writing in the registers For the function codes that the DX supports and the DX registers that the master device can access see Modbus Server Function in section 6 3 IM 04L41B01 17E 2 11 eu zu jenas y Buisy G 2 6 Using the Modbus Master Function The DX is used as a Modbus master For the Modbus specifications see section 6 3 Setting the Serial Communication Select Modbus M as a protocol on the Basic settings For detail see section 2 4 Setting the Serial Communication Setting the Modbus Master Press MENU to switch to setting mode hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Serial gt Modbus master gt Basic settings or Command settings Basic settings Command settings Basic Setting Node fe Basic Setting Node Hodbus master basic settings Master command number Read cycle First Last Addr Resi Type Timeout Is ifr n cor cas 1 30001 INT16 Retrials 1 2 w fooi aoa 1 400
346. und and the DX s ground the method of connecting the shield also to the computer s ground may be effective two sided grounding In addition in some cases using two sided grounding with a capacitor connected in series on one side is effective Consider these possibilities to eliminate noise When using the two wire interface Modbus protocol the 485 driver must be set to high impedance within 3 5 characters after the last data byte is sent by the host computer Serial interface converter The recommended converter is given below SYSMEX RA CO LTD MODEL RC 770X LINE EYE SI 30FA YOKOGAWA ML2 CAUTION Some converters not recommended by Yokogawa have FG and SG pins that are not isolated In this case do not follow the diagram on the previous page do not connect anything to the FG and SG pins Especially in the case of long distance communications the potential difference that appears may damage the DX or cause communication errors For converters that do not have the SG pin they can be used without using the signal ground For details see the manual that comes with the converter On some non recommended converters the signal polarity may be reversed A B or indication In this case reverse the connection For a two wire system the host device must control the transmission driver of the converter in order to prevent collisions of transmit and received data When using the recommended converter the driver is controll
347. urement range to R Set the span lower limit to 10 0 C and span upper limit to 100 0 C SRO10 DELTA TC R 100 1000 001 Description e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling or computation is in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you cannot use this command if any of the batch groups is recording memory sampling e Set p1 and p4 by referring to the table in section 3 3 e For parameters p5 and p6 enter values with five digits or less excluding the decimal point When Setting Channels to Scaling Syntax Query Example SR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 pe p9 p10 lt terminator gt pl Measurement channel number p2 Setting type SCALE p3 Input type VOLT DC voltage TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance temperature detector DI ON OFF input p4 Measurement range p5 Span lower limit p6 Span upper limit pP7 Scaling lower limit 30000 to 30000 p8 Scaling upper limit 30000 to 30000 p9 Scaling decimal place 0 to 4 p10 Unit up to 6 characters SR p1 Convert the DC voltage measured on channel 002 to DC current Set the measurement range to 6 V the span lower limit to 1 V the span upper limit to 5 V the scaling lower limit to 1 00 A and the scaling upper limit to 5 00 A SR002 SCALE VOLT 6V 1000 5000 100 500 2 A Description e You cannot use this command while recording memory sampling or computation is in progress When using the BT2 multi batch option you
348. ut data number p4 Last channel communication input data number p5 Slave device address 1 to 247 p6 First register number 30001 to 39999 40001 to 49999 300001 to 365535 400001 to 465535 p7 Type of data assigned to the registers INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L YM p1 Register the following command in command registration number 2 Read the 32 bit signed integer data that is assigned to registers 30003 upper 16 bits and 30004 lower 16 bits in the slave device at address 5 into the DX channels C02 to C05 YM2 R M C02 C05 5 30003 INT32 B To set a command that writes to measurement channels Syntax Query Example YM pl1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p lt terminator gt pl Registration number 1 to 16 p2 Command type W p3 First channel measurement channel number p4 Last channel measurement channel number p5 Slave device address 1 to 247 p6 First register number 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465535 p7 Type of data assigned to the registers INT16 F LOAT_B FLOAT_L YM p1 Register the following command in command registration number 3 Write the measured data IM 04L41B01 17E 3 57 ainiin e 3 6 Basic Setting Commands of channels 003 to 006 in registers 40003 to 40006 in the slave device at address 7 YM3 W 003 006 7 40003 INT16 To set a command that writes to computation channels Syntax YM pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p lt terminator gt p1 R
349. ut format of ASCII data output format of binary data output format of instrument information ceeee OUTOUIE CLAYS iaa aE a NEE P parameters enee aaa aE a a E EEEIEE iiS 3 1 parity 2 10 parts name aNd USES OF o c22 4 ssereesee ies neers uranta v PASSWONG Aisina as eee ty los ieee Aol nti PASV IMOCG sciis arianarian teases POP3 server connection POPS SOUS usoei PO epres seri cdeemesatscacncrensestucn E PERE E EERE port connection Ofra succes lod ie eh port number printing the screen PRORBUS DP irion PROLOG ss A tans PUISS IM PUS nn o A Q UG occas cere cats ENANA esate AE E T E 3 2 Roo read Cyel snenie a aa 1 56 2 12 reading writing the DX data cceeeeceeeeeeeeees 1 55 2 11 REALNAME easier reiaus a 1 78 1 80 rear panel ELSO A EA AET E A A E A Pei UMG soea S refreshing the page KE o E E A E AERA register assignments relay Stasera aea e e O ae Ea RELCASSMUIN DET E iii releasing network information 1 16 remote control terminals 3 18 report channelSiisnsna ninna a 3 18 report data arinettasasa tasta 1 39 4 38 report data information asss aias 4 30 BOPORE Oro arane E coarser eames 3 18 report layout 1 39 1 40 report mail 000 R E ecient eases 1 26 report settings 6 Mall casein ene r 1 20 requesting network information cccceeeseeeeeeeeees 1 15 response RESPONSE SyitaK iss
350. ut in the order specified by the command parameter e The output order of the parameters when a11 is specified is not constant Even if the same parameters are specified numerous times only the first occurrence is output e Lower case characters are used for the parameters e An underscore _ indicates a space The following table shows the parameter types Parameter Output Information serial Serial number host Host name ip IP address Output Example Several output examples are indicated below Packet Parameter Sent as Commands Response Parameters are not case sensitive ip HoSt EA ip 192 168 111 24 host DX2000 EN Even if the same parameters are specified numerous times only the first occurrence is output host ip host ip host EA host DX2000 ip 192 168 111 24 EN Undefined parameters will be ignored Space EA EN IM 04L41B01 17E 4 39 Chapter 5 Status Reports 5 1 Status Information and Filter The following figure illustrates the status information and filter on the DX 1bytes 2al s 4 5 6 7 8 _ Status information A A A A A Filter i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 _ Condition register The IF command can be used to set the filter When a status indicated on the following page is entered the corresponding bit in the condition register is set to 1 The logical AND of the condition register and the filter becom
351. ve 1 46 IM 04L41B01 17E 1 6 Accessing the Measurement Data File on the DX from a PC Note ___ You can view the files by installing the provided DAQSTANDARD software on the PC and by associating DAQSTANDARD with the files you want it to receive Memory is linked to ftp hostname MEMO DATA Media is linked to ftp hostname DRVO The external storage medium is the CF card e You cannot retrieve data files that are being created e The display is not automatically updated Perform the operation again if necessary Connecting from a PC via the FTP An example of retrieving files using a browser is described below In the Address box enter the following ftp host name domain name file name Drag the data you want to retrieve from the MEMO DATAO folder in the case of internal memory data or the DRVO folder in the case of data on the external storage medium to the PC You can also use the IP address in place of the host name domain name When Using the Login Function Standard You will be prompted for a user name and password when you access the server Enter a user name and password that are registered on the DX to connect to it For information about the operations that can be executed see the explanation in section 1 1 Login On DXs without the AS1 advanced security option You cannot perform the operations described under Accessing Data Files from the Web Browser or Connecting from a PC via t
352. ver Burnout Down 32768 Skip Error Undefined Power failure data IM 04L41B01 17E 6 5 suonesyioeds l 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications e Loading to Communication Input Data and Direct Writing of Values to the Server Communication input data Register Data format type Values from the server register are loaded into the DX communication input data When you perform the appropriate operation from the custom display the values are written to the server register Loading and writing occur in sync with the communication interval Communication Write operation from uae the custom display Executed Read Read Read Write Read command Values are only written to the server when the state of communication is normal the lamp in the Modbus status display is green otherwise an error occurs The DX only attempts to write to the server once It does not retry after failing Communication input data is an option M1 PM1 option The data type of the communication input data is 32 bit floating point You can display communication input data on a computation channel by including the data in the equation of a DX computation channel M1 PM1 option You can also set the measurement range and unit for computation channels DX1000 DX2000 Server Device Number C01 to C24 DX1000 40001 to 49999 INT 16 UINT 16 C01 to C60 DX2000 400001 to 465536 INT 32_B INT 32_L Format
353. was used before you started using communication commands UDO Set comment number 2 to THIS_ PRODUCT_IS IM 04L41B01 17E 3 37 ainiin eo 3 5 Control Commands Description On models with the AS1 advanced security to the currently displayed batch group option use the BE command to return to e Set parameter p3 by referring to the table in operation mode section 3 3 The setting p2 ANNUNCIATOR is only valid when the annunciator mode is turned on by the WU command To switch to one panel display Syntax UD pl1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Screen type 1 p2 Display item To switch to four panel display TREND Trend display Syntax UD pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 DIGITAL Digital display lt terminator gt BAR Bar graph display p1 Screen type 2 OVERVIEW Overview display p2 Screen 1 type see SY sets a screen group alarm indicator p3 Number of the group to display in screen 1 ALARM Alarm summary display p4 Screen 2 type see SY sets a screen group MESSAGE Message summary display p5 Number of the group to display in screen 2 MEMORY Memory summary display p6 Screen 3 type see SY sets a screen group MODBUS M Modbus master status display p7 Number of the group to display in screen 3 MODBUS C Modbus client status display p8 Screen 4 type see SY sets a screen group RELAY Relay status display p92 Number of the group to display in screen 4 REPORT Report display Example Assign group 1 to screen 1 group 2 to
354. write destination and subsequent registers can be omitted write only to 410611 If you omit them an all space message is written to every group Example To write the free message ABCD to all display groups in batch group number 4 using message number 10 write the values in the following table using one command denotes any value Register Value to Write Hexadecimal Notation 410611 10 000AH 410612 0 0000H 410613 4 0004H 410614 A B 4142H 410615 C D 4344H 410616 Aok 00 H Computation reset On models without the multi batch function BT2 option or on models with the multi batch function BT2 option but with the multi batch function disabled if you access computation reset of a batch group an error occurs 6 18 IM 04L41B01 17E 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Item Description Simultaneous access Batch numbers and lot numbers can be written using one command for each batch Example 1 On models without the multi batch function BT2 option you can write to registers 407833 to 407851 using one command Example 2 For batch group 1 you can write to registers 410001 to 410020 using one command Example 3 To set the batch number of batch group 1 to ABCD see the explanation for Data type STRnn for details you can write registers 410001 to 410005 using one command You cannot simultaneously access batch numbers or lot numbers across multiple batch
355. xternal storage media Syntax Query Example RF pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt p1 Type MEDIA p2 External storage media operation FREE LOCK p3 Setup loading operation FREE LOCK RF pl Lock the MENU key leave other keys unlocked RFKEY FREE FREE LOCK FREE FREE FREE IM 04L41B01 17E 3 49 aniio e 3 6 Basic Setting Commands Description This command is invalid on models with the AS1 advanced security option RN Sets basic key login Syntax RN pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt p1 Auto logout OFF 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN p2 Operation when logged out OFF Disables DX operation DISPLAY Only enables screen operations p3 Whether or not to use a user ID USE NOT p4 Number of password retries OFF 3 5 Query RN Example Set the auto logout time to 1 minute and disable the DX operation when logged out Use a user ID Set the number of password retries to 5 RN1MIN OFF ON 5 Description p3 and p4 are only valid on models with the AS1 advanced security option e When you use password management the WU command on models with the AS1 advanced security option p3 is fixed at OFF RP Sets user limitations On DXs without the AS1 Advanced Security Option Syntax RP pl p2 lt terminator gt p1 User limitation number 1 to 10 p2 User limitation item KEY FUNC MEDIA Description Parameters p3 and subsequent parameters vary depending on the p2 setting as follows When p2 is set t
356. y and product names that appear in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by the registered trademark or trademark symbols and 1st edition December 2005 2nd edition October 2006 3rd edition April 2007 Ath edition December 2007 5th edition November 2008 6th edition March 2010 7th edition December 2010 IM 04L41B01 17E How to Use This Manual DX s version and functions described in this manual The contents of this manual cover DXs with hardware style number 3 and firmware release number 4 For details on the functions that have been added or changed see DX s Version and Functions Described in This Manual in the DX1000 DX1000N or DX2000 User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E Edition DX Description 2 Version 1 11 Additions and improvements to functionality Version 1 21 3 Release number 2 Additions and improvements to functionality Version 2 0x Style number 2 NEMA4 compliance 4 Same as edition 3 Additions and improvements to functionality Changed the direction of the clamp input terminal H2 option 5 Release number 3 Additions and improvements to functionality Version 3 0x Style number 3 Changed the boot ROM 6 Release number 4 Additions and improvements to functionality Version 4 0x Added models with 400 MB of int
357. y value when the multi batch function is not available 410614 to Free message 410631 Up to 18 registers up to 35 characters with 0 termination The message must be 32 characters or less 410632 to Reserved Free 410680 message 410681 Batch 1 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 and stop 410682 Batch 2 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 and stop and stop 410684 Batch 4 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 and stop 410685 Batch 5 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 and stop tL R W R W suonesyioeds l 410687 Batch 7 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 and stop and stop 410689 Batch 9 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 and stop 410690 Batch 10 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 R and stop 410691 Batch 11 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 R and stop 410692 Batch 12 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 R and stop ACUEEEEE 410686 Batch 6 memory start Stop 0 Start 1 INT16 and stop W W W 6 3 Modbus Protocol Specifications Description Supplementary Information 410693 Batch 1 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 reset 410694 Batch 2 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 reset Simultaneous Access Write Read 6 16 IM 04L41B01 17E 410695 Batch 3 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 a cn 410696 Batch 4 computation Execute computation reset 1 fixed INT16 feet a ee 410697 Batch 5 computatio

DX2000 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents